1. What is a set ID or Table set? It is going share common control table values. 2. What is an object group?

Collection of one or more objects that form a logical group for security purpose. 3. What is business Process Map? It is an alternative method for accessing panels or it is a graphical representation of a map. 4. What is an activity? It is a collection of logical steps. It represents specific transaction a user might need to perform. 5. What is a business Process? It is a collection of activities and it represents broad area functionality, categorizing the several activities. 6.What is a Process? A task involved by the system. 7. What is a process instance? It is a process number used to request process. 8. What is a process server agent? It is going to initialize, select and parse the program. 9. What is a command line parameter? The executable (.EXE) file is nothing but command line parameter. E.g. C:/SQLbin\SQL.exe. 10. What is Parameter List? It defines under what database, platform will the program. (Nothing but the meta-strings) 11. What is Application Upgrade? It is a migration of object from one database to another and updating other system components such as application software. 12. What is Mass change and explain the uses of Mass change? Mass change is a SQL generator you can use to develop and perform custom applications. Using mass change, a developer can set up a series of INSERT, UPDATE, OR DELETE SQL statements that the end user can execute to perform business functions. The overall structure of Mass change is similar to that of People soft Query Except that Query retrieves data from the database while mass change actually updates the database. The uses of Mass change are as follows. 1. It is used to perform high volume set oriented transactions. 2. Copy data from table or table 3. Archive table data (Archive means that the data does not have backup file and uses to update the values) 13. Why use Mass change and why not SQL execute to update a record, which is not attached to the panel? The reason why Mass change is preferred over SQL exec is…. 1. Two- Three Mass change program can work at a single time. 2. Data / information need not be defined in Mass change 3. Mass change can be used for file download upload. 14. What are the steps involved in Mass change? The following are the order of steps involved in Mass change. `1. Define type 2. Assign to template 3. Operator security 4.Mass change definition 15. What is Mass change group? Adding all Mass change into a group. (i.e., Multiple Mass change definitions can be executed simultaneously). 16. What is workflow?

To an extent all the business processes defined using the Application designer involve workflow. However we usually reserve the term to refer to processes that involve multiple users and the routing of data between the users. People soft workflow tools help you build the routings into your computer systems. You use them to tie together the individual steps so that the system can help coordinate the activities. 17. How Workflow is controlled? It is controlled by Decision Point (it is graphically denoted by a (?)). Where user has to choose which activity is appropriate towards the next step. 18. What are the key fields used in Key list? 7 key fields used in a key list. They are as follows.. 1. Busprocname- (Business Process Name) 2. Activity name 3. Event name 4. Work list name 5. Instance Id 6. Transaction Id 7. Emplid Note: While defining the above fields in the record definition, a key has to be assigned in the record field properties. 19. What is routing in workflow? Transfer of roles / users 20. Why workflow is used and explains the advantage of workflow in People soft application? Workflow typically eliminates the job tasks associated with controlling paper flow, and frees people the once performed clerical functions to do more meaningful work. • Tasks that don’t require user involvement • Tasks that involve non People soft users • Tasks that several users work on together. 21. Define the components of workflow? There are 3 underlying components of workflow i.e., Rules, Roles, Routing. Rules Rules are your company’s business practices captured in software. Rules determine what activities are required to process your business data. The rules are contained in policies and procedures documents. Roles Roles describe how people fit into the workflow. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as clerks or managers. Your business rules typically specify what user role needs to do an activity. Roles direct the work to types of people rather than to individuals. Identifying roes instead of individual users makes your workflow more flexible and easier to maintain. Roles remain stable even as people change jobs. Routings Routings connect the activities in the workflow. They are the systems means of moving information from one place to another, from one step to the next. Routings bring the flow into workflow. The network of routings creates a business process from what used to be isolated activities. Routings make it possible to deploy applications throughout the enterprise. They work through the levels and departments of an enterprise to bring together the role that are necessary to complete complex tasks. Peoplesoft Interview Questions - Component Interface Builder 1) What are the main elements in the component Interface ? Main elements of component Interface • Component interface name • Keys • Properties and collections • Methods 2) Difference between Get keys, find keys and Create Keys ? Get keys: - These are mapped to the fields marked as scrh in the component’s search record. Automatically “Search key” fields in search record become Get keys.

We cannot change it. Find keys: - These are mapped to fields marked as Alt or Srch in the component search record. You may remove Find keys that you do not wish to make available for searching. Create Keys: - It is generated from the key fields for the search record. If Add search record is present then its key fields are taken. We cannot change it. 3) How do you provide security for the component interface? • Open the Permission list • On the Component Interface tab • Add row and select the newly created Component Interface • Edit the permissions to give permission for the standard methods • Get, Create, Save, cancel, find. 4) What the steps that you need to do in people code to invoke Component Interface? • Establish a user section • Get the component interface definition • Populate the create keys • Create an instance of the component interface • Populate the required fields • Save the component Interface. &Session = GetSession(); &CI = &Session.GetcompIntfc(CompIntfc.INTERFACE_NAME) &CI.KEY_FILED_NAME = ‘NEW’ If not &CI.Create () Then Else Populate other fields End-if; Populate the other fields If not &CI.Save () Then Else End-if; 5) How do you test Component Interface? • Using the Component Interface tester • Give values in the tester for options • Get Existing, Create new, Find and perform the operation from the CI Tester 6) Catching error message in the component Interface? Or Use of PSMessages in the CI ? This function needs to be called when ever methods like Find, Save, Create methods return false. Error text and Error type can be printed in the log message for any other action in to the log messge. Function CheckErrorCodes() &PSMessages = &Session.PSMessages; &ErrorCount = &PSMessages.Count; For &i = 1 To &ErrorCount &ErrorText = &PSMessages.Item(&i).Text; &ErrorType = &PSMessages.Item(&i).Type; End-For; End-Function; 7) What is method? What are the different types of method? Methods: - A method is an object that performs a very specific function on a component interface at run-time. Standard methods and user-defined methods. Standard methods: - Automatically generated upon the creation of a new component Interface in Application. Apart from the Standard methods there are Standard methods available for the use with any collection.

User-Defined methods: - User-defined methods are those that you can create to meet the requirements of an individual component interface. 8) What are properties? The Fields in the level 0 in the component are the properties of the component. Standard properties User-Defined properties Createkeyinfocollection Developer can further control the exposed Getkeyinfocollection field properties. Findkeyinfocollection Property Info collection GetHistoryItems (Update/Display mode or Correction mode) EditHistory Items InteractiveMode. 9) Traversing the Collections in the Component Interface? COLL_JOB – Collection Coll_JOBItm – Row in the collection. &COLL_JOBCol = &CI_JOB_DATA.COLL_JOB; For &i = 1 to &COLL_JOBCol.Count &COLL_JOBItm = &COLL_JOBCol.Item (&i); &COLL_JOB_JRCol = &COLL_JOBItm.COLL_JOB_JR; For &J = 1 to &COLL_JOB_JRCol.Count &COLL_JOB_JRItm = &COLL_JOB_JRCol.Item (&j); &COLL_JOB_JRItm.KEYPROP_EFFDT =; 10) How do you login in correction mode in the Component Interface? Get History Items and Edit History items property to should be set to true. Get History Items alone: - Update display all - modes will be used. Interview Questions on PeopleSoft ,FAQs and Answers 1.What are the physicals attributes Applications designer screen? The following are the attributes of Application Designer 1. Title bar 2. Menus 3. Toolbar 4. Project Workspace – it arranges Peoplesoft objects in Windows explorer format 5. Object Workspace – Open Multiple Object and store in main window. 6. Output Window – Deals about the output generated by using project development or Up gradation. 7. View tabs – Development tools / Upgrade 2. What is MDI? Multiple Document Interface – having an option to open multiple windows at the same time. But only one window can be activated at a time. 3. What is Morphing? The Application designer uses an approach of morphing, or dynamically transforming the menus and toolbars to edit the definition in the active window. 4. How is data stored, retrieved, manipulated and processed in People soft applications? People soft is a table-based system. A database for a people tools application contains three major sets of tables… 1. System catalog tables; it stores physical attributes of tables and views. (e.g. Sys, Columns, Sys tables) 2. People Tools tables; it contains information that you define using People Tools (e.g. PSRECDEFN, PSPNLDEFN, PSMENUDEFN) 3. Application Data Tables; Store the actual data users enter and access through People Soft application windows and panels. (E.g. PS_ <>) 5. What is SQL Talk? SQL Talk is an interface to Peoplesoft database. 6. How many types of RDBMS support Peoplesoft? The following are the list of RDBMS supporting Peoplesoft application..

1. DB2 2. DB2/AS400 3. DB2/MVS 4. SQL Base 5.Oracle 6. MSSQI.Server 7. Informix 7. Define a Field? Fields are basic building blocks in People soft and can be used in application when they are added to atleast one record. Fields are globally defined. 8. What are the various Field attributes? The commons filed attributes are: 1. Data type 2. Field name 3. Long name 4. Short name 5. Formatting 6. Help context number 7. Translate values – stored in separate table (XLATTABLE). 9. Define Field properties? Fields are 1.Globally defined 2.Reusable components and can be shared across multiple record definitions 3.A change to the Field properties affects all the records that include the field. 1.What conditions are required to establish parent child relationship between two records? What are the advantages with that? Conditions are: 1) The child record should have all the key fields of parent record and at least one more key field other than the key fields of parent record. 2) We should mention the parent record in the record properties of child record. 3) We can not go for more than three levels of parent/child relationships. Advantages are: 1) To have referential integrity. 2) No need to enter information again and again 2. Which effective dated rows can be retrieved in update/display mode, update/display all and correction mode? Update/display – can view current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Update/display all – can view history, current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Correction – can view and update history, current and future rows. 3. What types of audits are supported by people soft? In case of record level audit what is the structure of table? We have field level audit and record level audit. The structure of the table in record level audit is: AUDIT_OPRID, AUDIT_STAMP, AUDIT_ACTN, AUDIT_RECNAME and can add fields from record. 4. What are Table Edits? We have prompt table edit, yes/no table edit, translate table edit as the table edits. 5. What is the difference between Key and alternate search Key? KEY-It is the primary key of the record. Can be used as search key or need not be. Alternate search key-it is used for searching purposes. 6. Can you place Sub page into Grid? If yes How? Yes we can insert subpage using insert subpage. After insert subpage into main page, drag the subpage into the grid. When we save the page we are successfully able to save the page showing that we can insert a subpage into a grid. 7. Can you hide a primary page in a component? Reason? No, we can not hide the primary page of a component. If the component had only one page then by making this page also invisible we won’t have any component existing so we are not allowed to hide the primary page. 8. What is an Expert Entry? Expert entry enables a user to change from interactive to deferred mode at runtime for appropriate transactions. 9. What is Auto Update? This record field property is used to update the date field of particular record with the server's current date and time whenever a user creates or updates a row. Even the user enter the data into that field, the data which the user enters will be updated by the system’s current date and time. 10.How can a component have more than one search record? Give a situation. You might want to reuse the same component multiple times with different search records. You can accomplish this by

overriding the component search record at runtime when the component is opened from a menu item without creating separate copies of the component. The component override is temporary, and occurs only when the component is opened from the menu item in which the override is set. It does not change the component definition. 11. How can you improve the security and usability of a Prompt table edit.? Prompt table view 12. What are the different ways to setup row level security? We can setup row-level security using a SQL view that joins the data table with an authorization table. And By having Query search for data using a query security record definition. The query security record definition adds a security check to the search. 13. How does peoplesoft use views? Which are online functions? A) People soft uses views for search records, summary pages, prompt views, reports. Search records and summary pages are online functions. 14. Why do PeopleSoft often use views as search records? A) Search views are used for three main reasons. 1. Adding criteria to the search dialogue page 2. Providing row level security. 3. Implementing search page processing. 15. What is Record Group? Which records can be included into a record group? Record group consists of records with similar functionality. To setup a record in record group we should enter a set control field value in record properties PeopleSoft Interview Questions and Answers– Application Engine 1) There are different types of variables in the Application Engine people code? Local variable – these are available for the duration of the program in which they are declared. Global / Component – These variables are available while the Application Engine program is running. They are saved at commits and checkpoints, So they can be used for restarts. Component variables are same as Global incase of the AE. 2) What are the Different ways pass data between the steps? 1) State records – One row can be passed and can have many state records. 2) Component/Global People code variables 3) Temporary records – Multiple rows of data can be passed. 3) What is Prerequisite for the State record? 1) Should be either Derived work record Or SQL Table. 2) Name of the record must end in AET; this is how the system identifies the record as a state record. 3) PROCESS_INSTANCE must be a key. 4) Any data types except character or numeric must not be required fields. Note: - No People code fires on an Application Engine state record. No Validation of translate values or Prompt tables are done. 4) How to read the runctrl parameters in AE 1) SQL: - %Select (EMPLID) Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL where PROCESS_INSTANCE = %PROCESS_INSTANCE and ORPID = %oprid 2) People code: - &SQL = “Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL Where PROCESS_INSTACNE =” PS_TEST_AET.PROCESS_INSTANCE “and OPRID =” %oprid. %PROCESS_INSTANCE or %Bind (PROCESS_INSTANCE) can be used. %PROCESS_INSTANCE is more efficient and faster. 5) How do you execute Application Engine through Push Button? 1) CreateProcessRequest () , Schedule () 2) CallAppEngine. 6) What is the syntax for CallAppEngine? CallAppEngine (applid [, state record]); 7) What are the 3 trace parameters you can pass to your psae.exe?

- TRACE - TOOLSTRACESQL - TOOLSTRACEPC 8) Which Trace option is the best place to start for general performance information? - TRACE 384 – mostly used trace value. 9) What is the difference between a Trace value and Trace parameters? A Trace parameter determines which type of trace is turned on. A Trace parameter determines what type of data is recorded in your trace files (s). 10) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 11) What are the Different types of Application Engine? Standard: Standard entry-point program. Upgrade Only: Used by PeopleSoft Upgrade utilities only. Import Only: Used by PeopleSoft Import utilities only Daemon Only: Use for daemon type programs. Transform Only: Support for XSLT Transform programs. 12) How do you program AE program for the restarts? Program Level State Record One of the state record needs to SQL Table, Since All Derived work record will be re-initializing on commit. Program Properties On the Advanced tab in the program properties dialog box, make sure that disable restart is not checked. Configuration manager In the configuration manager, sure that Disable restart is not selected on the process scheduler tab. Section Level Section type The option for section type are prepare only and critical updates If the section is preparing data i,e select data, Populating temporary tables, or updating temporary tables then the section should be prepare only. If the section is updating the permanent application tables in the database, you should select critical update. Step Level Add an order by clause %Select Field Select Field1 from PS_SOME_RECORD Where FIELD1 > %Bind (FIELD1) Order by FIELD1. Add a switch to the selected table Delete processed rows. The only restriction for batch runs occurs when you have restart enabled, and you are inside a Do Select that is of the Select/Fetch type (instead of "Re-select" or "Restartable"). with select/Fetch, all commits inside the loop are ignored, including the commit frequency if it's set. 13) What is Set Processing? Set Processing uses SQL to process groups, or sets, of rows at one time rather than processing each row individually. With row by row processing you following a repetitive loop that selects a row, determines if it meets a given criteria, if so, apply rule x to row Update row, commit. With set processing, you only select those rows that meet the filtering criteria and then run the rule once again all the affected rows. 14) Advantages of Set Processing? Improved Performance: - Our internal testing has revealed that, in an overwhelming majority of cases, set processing performs significantly better than it is -by-row counterpart for “reasonable” batch processing volumes. Minimized SQL Overhead: - It tends to use fewer Application Engine SQL statements that each processed more data than the statements executed in row-by-row processing. Easy Maintenance: - if need to make a fix or add an enhancement to SQL, it’s just a matter of modifying the SQL or inserting the new “Chunk”. Leveraging the RDBMS: - With Set – based processing, you take advantage of the SQL processing engine on the database rather than placing the processing burden and overhead on the application executable. 15) Testing and debugging application engine? Application Engine Trace file-You can track the step execution of your application execution.

Application Engine Interactive Debugger – First click on the trace tab and turn off the statement timings. Select Profile -> Edit Profile-> Process Scheduler Tab -> Application section Select Debug check box. (You can dynamically modify the state record run application engine step by step People Code Debugger for the Application Engine.) AE Trace files: - AE__.AET Without the process instance: - AE__.AET 1) Order and flow of action types 1) Do When 2) Do While 3) Do Select 4) Peoplecode 5) SQL 6) Call Section 7) Message Log 8) XSLT 9) Do until 2) What is Prerequisite for the Temporary record? 1) Should have process Instance as key 2) Name should end with _TAO 3) Different types of Temporary tables - Dedicated - Un Dedicated (Shared) 4) Why Parallel Processing required? Potential performance improvements by splitting the data to be processed into groups and simultaneously running multiple instance of your program to deal with different groups of data. If you have a one program that uses a temporary table and is invoked multiple times, that single temporary table could be used concurrently in multiple executions of the code. This could create unpredictable results since the different instances of the code would be issuing delete, Inserts and/or updates unsynchronized with each other. You could solve the problem by creating multiple temporary tables as a pool of tables. Each invocation of your program would have to allocate an unused temporary table, mark it as ‘in use’ , use it and release it back to the pool when you through with it (for each Application Engine program you write). 5) How running AE program as Batch differs from running it online? Application Engine programs are designed for two types of execution and each has its own pool of Temporary Tables Online: Invoked by CallAppEngine from People code Run quickly, synchronously, and at random times. Potential for simultaneous executions Uses the online Temporary Table pool. Not restart able. Psae.exe randomly assigns an instance number from the number range on your online temp tables. If the instance number is in use psae.exe puts the program in Queue until the assigned instance becomes free. Unlock on completion, on Crash free from Manage Abends. Batch: Invoked through the Process Scheduler. Run for longer amounts of time, asynchronously, and at scheduled times. Can be designed for parallel execution for performance. Uses the Batch/Dedicated Temporary table. Restart able. It allocates instance number based on the availability on a record by record basis and psae.exe begins with the lowest instance numbers.If the properties are set continue - Base table is used with Process instance as key. If Re-starable – Locked across Restarts until completes successfully. If not Re-startable on Program completion. 6) What are the important steps for implementing the parallel processing? Define you Temporary Tables.

Set the Temporary Tables Online pool. Assign Temporary Tables to your Application Engine program in it program. Set Temporary Table Batch Pool – Instance count in the AE. Build / Rebuild your Temporary Table record. Code %Table Meta – SQL as reference to Temporary Tables in your Application Engine program, so that Application Engine can table references to the assigned Temporary Table instance dynamically at runtime. 7) What happens when all the instance of the temporary table are in use? It behavior can control by AE developer. If the runtime options are set to continue “People Tools will insert rows into the base table using the PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key”. If temp table doesn’t contain PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key field in a Temporary table, you should change the Temp table runtime options to “Abort” in the appropriate Application Engine programs. 8) How can you divide the data to be processed by different instance of the program to perform parallel program? Run control parameters passed to each instance of the AE program enable it to identify which input rows “belong” to it, and each program instance inserts the rows from the source table into its assigned temporary table instance using %Table. 9) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 10) What is the main purpose of the Access property in the Section? Basically they have two option, public and private if section declared as public then it be access from other program.Private we cannot call from other program. 11) Which actions are mutually exclusive and why they are mutually exclusive? Sql and callsection. 12) Error handling or Exception handling in Application Engine ? Step properties:On Error:Abort – Write message to message log and terminate. Ignore - Write message to message log and continue. uppress – No message will be written, but program will continue. People code Action: - On return options can used to handle run time errors. Abort: - Exits immediately – Not recommended. Break:- Exits the current step and section and control returns to the calling step. Skip Step:- The program exits the current step, and continues processing at the next step in the section. If this is the last step in the section, the calling step resumes control of the processing. SQL Action properties:No Rows:- When the Sql doesn’t return any rows, you can tell what application engine program should do. Abort: - Program terminates Section Break: - Application Engine exits the current section immediately, and control returns to the calling step. Continue: - The program continues processing Skip Step: - Application Engine exits the current step immediately and moves on to the next step. When using skip step keep the following in mind: 1) Application Engine ignores the commit for the current step at runtime 2) If the current step contains only one Action, only use skip step at by-pass the commit. 13) What are different types Do Select? 1) Select/Fetch 2) Reselect 3) Restart able Select/Fetch: Opens the cursor only at the first time and retrieve rows one at loop. Commits inside the step (commits in the Called Section) are ignored if AE is Restart enabled. Reselect: It opens the cursor and closes the cursor on each iteration of the loop. It will reselect the same row of data. Logic in Actions of the step should be such that it will be changing the status of the rows in the table the do select is selecting. Commits are not ignored and will be committed in a reselect loop when the restart is enabled. Restart able: - similar to select/Fetch but it WILL COMMIT inside the loop thus allowing the checkpoint to the PS_AERUNCONTROL table.

14)What is the maximum limitation on temporary tabel instances in AE. 99 15) what is the difference between the %SELECT and %SELECTINIT meta sql functions. Ans %select : if any values have not selected then previous value will be there %selectinit : if any values have not selected then previous value will reinitilate to null 16) what is the difference between exit(0),exit(1) when we are using this functions in AE Exit (1) causes immediate termination of a PeopleCode program. Use this parameter to rollback database changes. Exit (0) caused immediate termination of a Peoplecode Program but don’t make rollback in the database. Peoplesoft Interview questions and answers- SQR 1. What are the sections and paragraphs available? There are five sections and three paragraphs available in SQR programming. The sections include a. Begin-setup End-setup. b. Begin-program End-program. c. Begin-procedure End-procedure. d. Begin-heading End-heading. e. Begin-footing End-footing And the paragraphs include Begin-select paragraph. Begin-SQL paragraph. Begin-document paragraph 2. Is it possible to increase the array size once defined? No, it is not possible to increase the Array size once defined 3. What is Load-lookup? Give the Syntax for Load-Lookup? The LOAD-LOOKUP command defines an array containing a set of keys and values and loads it into memory. With LOADLOOKUP, you can reduce the number of tables that are joined in one SELECT. Use this command in conjunction with one or more LOOKUP commands. Syntax: begin-setup load-lookup name=prods table=products key=product_code return_value=description end-setup 4. Can you Call a SQR from another SQR? How? We can call one SQR program from another SQR program using Call.callsystem. But this is possible only in UNIX Operating system. 5. Briefly explain Most commonly used SQC’s in SQR programs? : Some of the most commonly used SQC’s are 1.STDAPI.sqc : This Is Process Scheduler Interface which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 2.SETENV.sqc : This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size,Date formats Etc…. 3.NUMBER.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format numbers. 4.DATETIME.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format dates and times. 6.RESET.sqc : This is an important Footing SQc. 6. What are the commands used in filehandling of sqr? Using File Handling we can Import. Steps are 1. Opening a File Using ‘OPEN FOR-READING’ command. 1. Reading Data From File Using ‘READ’ command. Writing Data into Table Using ‘BEGIN-SQL’ paragraph & ‘INSERT’ command 7. What are On-break parameters?

ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes. The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 8. How can you Debug SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 2. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 9. What is the difference between sqr and sqc? SQR SQC 1.This is nothing but the Actual 1.This is like a function in SQR. Source program. 2.This consists of Program Section. 2.This does not consists of program Section. 3.This can be Compiled & Executed. 3.This cannot be Compiled and Executed. 4.We cannot call one SQR from 4.We can call one SQC from another SQC or another SQR or SQC. SQR program. 10. What are different types of variables in sqr? Types of variables in SQR are 1. Column Variables. 2. List Variables. 3. System Variables. 4. Document Variables. 5. Substitution Variables. User Defined Variables 11. Is there any read-only variable in sqr? Column Variables & System Variables are Read-Only Variables. 12. How to pass Inputs for sqr program while running from windows? Using ASK & INPUT Commands. 13. How to pass Inputs to the SQR while running through the Process Scheduler? Using Procedures & SQC’s to access data on Run Control Page (Run Control Fields). 14. What is the purpose of Stdapi.sqc This is a Process Scheduler Interface sqc which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 15. What is the SQT file? What are the advantages of SQT files? SQT’ file is nothing but resultant file after the compilation (i.e.) Runtime File. By using this SQT file for Execution we can increase the Performance of the program by reduciong the Compilation Time. 16. What is the SQC used to read data from translate table? ‘READXLAT.sqc’ is the SQC used to read data from Translate Table. 17. Which section is mandatory in an SQR program? ‘BEGIN-PROGRAM’ Section is Mandatory for an SQR program. 18. How will you display an image in SQR? Using ‘DECLARE-IMAGE , END-DECLARE’ command. 19. What is use of SETENV.SQC? This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size, Date formats Etc…. 20. How will you perform ERROR handling in SQR? We can do Error handling in SQR using some command line flags such as –O, -L,-ZMF,-XMB and using Error handling commands such as ON-ERROR = Skip/Warn/Stop (for Compile time errors) ON-ERROR = Procedure Name (for execution stage errors).

21. How many ways of performance tuning are there in SQR? 1. Using LOADF-LOOKUP & LOOKUP. 2. Using ARRAYS. 3. Using MULTIPE REPORTS. 4. Using SQT Files. 5. Using –Bnn Command line Flag. 6. Running on BATCH SERVER. 7. Using Proper Programming Logic in SQR such as Using BREAK statement in EVALUATE Command. 8. Proper SQL tuning such as using Sub queries instead of Joins. 22. Can you call procedure in oracle from Sqr? How? To call a database procedure using Begin-select paragraph, the syntax is as follows: Begin-select [(report arguments)] from Dual End-select To call from Begin-sql, the syntax will be Begin-SQL ;; End-SQL 23. Can you connect more than one database using one Sqr? How? Yes. 24. What are the differences between Load lookup and Array ARRAYS LOAD-LOOKUP 1. Arrays can be declared in any section. 1. Load-Lookup is declared in only in SETUP section only. 2. Number of rows are not automatically 2. Numbers of rows are automatically added. gives a error if the number of added. Exceeds the specified number. 3. We should insert data in to Array by 3. Rows are automatically inserted in to programming. Load-Lookup. 4.We can retrive any number of fields. 4.We can retrive only Two fields from from a table. a table. 5.We have Length & Data type. 5.We don’t have Length & Data type. 6.We cannot directly print from Array. 6.We can directly print from Load-Lookup. 25. What are the steps required to run the SQR from peoplesoft environment? Three steps we have to fallow to run the SQR program from the peoplesoft environment (Process Scheduler). These steps include a. Making the SQR program API aware by calling two procedures (stdapi-init, stdapi-term) from the Begin-program section and including the Stdapi.sqc in the bottom of the program. b. Create new run control table or using existing run control table and creating run control page, component and register the component. Creating new run control SQC if we create a new run control table. c. Giving the permission to the user by giving process groups. 26. How to pass command line flags to a sqr report running through process scheduler? Using override options in the process definition in the Process Scheduler in the People Tools. 27. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes . The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 28 .How does peoplesoft Process monitor knows that the process (Say sqr report) is at what stage such as initiated, in process, completed etc From the Field Value of ‘RUNSTATUSDESCR’field from ‘PS_PMN_PRCSLIST’ table. 29. How can u Debugging SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 3. #IF DEBUGxxx

#END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 30. How to refer a global variable in local procedure? After special character (ex.#,&) we use underscore(_) after that variable name. 31. What is -Bnn flag? This is used to specify the number of rows that are to be taken from Dbase to the Buffer because default the system takes 10 rows at a time. 32. What is -Tnn flag? This is mainly used for testing purpose. We can restrict the system to generate only a specific number of pages instead of generating all pages for testing. This is used in Windows Environment. 33. What is -RS & -RT Flags? RS is used to generate SPF file ie; stopping the program after the comilation. _RT is used to run the SPF file .This is also one kind of Performance increasing technique by saving the compilation time. 34. What are the sections in Sqr? Which one is necessary? Setup, Heading, Footing, Program & Procedure Sections. Program section is the Mandatory section. 35. What is -debug command line flag? This is used for Debugging in SQR. 36. How to place an corporate logo in sqr? Using “Declare Image” command 37. what are the debugging commands in sqr? Show & Display are debugging commands 38. what is the difference between them? Show is used to display more than one variable at a time. Display is used to display only one variable at a time. 1. we map more than one component at a time from the Component Interface? A: No. A component interface maps to one, and only one, PeopleSoft component. 2. How can we create a new Component Interface? 1. Select File, New from the PeopleSoft Application Designer menu. 2. Select the Component Interface definition type from the new dialog box. 3. Select the component which is base for the component interface. 4. Click Save to save the Component Interface. 5. Save the component interface 3. What are the major elements in the Component Interface Architecture? A: There are three fundamental elements in the component interface architecture 1. components 2. component interfaces 3. Component interface API. 4. How can we access the component data? A: By internal (PeopleCode) and external (Java, C/C++, or COM) applications. 5. What are the attributes of the Component Interface? 1. Name 2. Keys 3. Properties 4. Collections 5. Methods 6. Can we create the get keys and find keys manually? A: No. When we create a new component interface, get and find keys are created based on the search record definition for the underlying component. 7. How many types of properties can include the Component Interface? A: Two. Standard properties and User-Defined Properties 8. What are the standard properties? A: InteractiveMode, GetHistoryItems, and EditHistoryItems 9. Can we create the user-defined methods? A: Yes. We can create user-defined methods after creating a Component Interface. 10. How many types of keys have the Component Interface?

A:

1. 2. 3. 4.
1.

Get keys: Find keys: Search keys: Create keys:

Get keys are nothing but search keys and alternative search keys of the search record. represents list box items. represents only search keys.

What is the difference between Key and alternate search Key?

KEY-It is the primary key of the record. Can be used as search key or need not be. Alternate search key-it is used for searching purposes. 2. Which effective dated rows can be retrieved in update/display mode, update/display all and correction mode?

Update/display – can view current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Update/display all – can view history, current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Correction – can view and update history, current and future rows. 3. What types of audits are supported by people soft? In case of record level audit what is the structure of table?

We have field level audit and record level audit. The structure of the table in record level audit is: AUDIT_OPRID, AUDIT_STAMP, AUDIT_ACTN, AUDIT_RECNAME and can add fields from record. 4. What are Table Edits? We have prompt table edit, yes/no table edit, translate table edit as the table edits. 5.

What conditions are required to establish parent child relationship between two records? What are the advantages wit

Conditions are:

1) The child record should have all the key fields of parent record and at least one more key field other than the key fields of parent rec 2) We should mention the parent record in the record properties of child record. 3) We can not go for more than three levels of parent/child relationships. Advantages are: 1) To have referential integrity. 2) No need to enter information again and again 6. Can you place Sub page into Grid? If yes How?

Yes we can insert subpage using insert subpage. After insert subpage into main page, drag the subpage into the grid. When we save the are successfully able to save the page showing that we can insert a subpage into a grid. 7. Can you hide a primary page in a component? Reason?

No we can not hide the primary page of a component. If the component had only one page then by making this page also invisible we w any component existing so we are not allowed to hide the primary page. 8. What is an Expert Entry?

Expert entry enables a user to change from interactive to deferred mode at runtime for appropriate transactions

9.

What is Auto Update?

This record field property is used to update the date field of particular record with the server's current date and time whenever a user cre updates a row. Even the user enter the data into that field, the data which the user enters will be updated by the system’s current date an 10. What is Record Group? Which records can be included into a record group?

Record group consists of records with similar functionality. To setup a record in record group we should enter a set control field value i properties 11. How can you improve the security and usability of a Prompt table edit.? Prompt table view 12. What are the different ways to setup row level security?

We can setup row-level security using a SQL view that joins the data table with an authorization table. andBy having Query search using a query security record definition. The query security record definition adds a security check to the search. 13. How does peoplesoft use views? Which are online functions? A) People soft uses views for search records, summary pages, prompt views, reports. Search records and summary pages are online functions. 14. Why do PeopleSoft often use views as search records? A) Search views are used for three main reasons. 1. Adding criteria to the search dialogue page 2. Providing row level security. 3. Implementing search page processing. 15. How can a component have more than one search record? Give a situation.

You might want to reuse the same component multiple times with different search records. You can accomplish this by overriding the c search record at runtime when the component is opened from a menu item without creating separate copies of the component. The com override is temporary, and occurs only when the component is opened from the menu item in which the override is set. It does not chan component definition.

16. What is PIA and what are its components? It is n-tier architecture. We have client, web server, application server and Database server. We have jolt and tuxedo. We have WSL, W JSH, QUEUES and services. In database server we have system tables, peopletools tables and application tables. 17. Differentiate Field edit and Save edit?

In Field edit for each field change, a transition to the application server to the database is taken place. In Saveedit for all the fields , only one transition to the application server to the Database is taken place. 18. What are think time functions?

Think-time functions suspend processing either until the user has taken some action (such as clicking a button in a message box), o external process has run to completion.

19.

In which events error & warning are used most extensively.

Field edit, Save edit, Search save, row delete, row insert 20. Is there any way by which you can find out whether the user is in Add mode or Update mode? %mode---returns A---for Add mode. Returns U –for Update mode 21. What is the purpose of the SQLEXEC function? What are its benefits and draw backs?

SQLEXEC is used to execute the sql statements(select,insert,update,delete). We can get only one row at a time. 22. How is the searchinit event most often used by people soft application?

A)Searchinit fires before the search dialogue page is displayed to the end user.For this reason searchinit is often used to enhance ro security by inserting and graying out certain values to the search dialogue page. 23. What are the options for using SQL in people code?

a) sqlexec b) Record class methods (selectbykey,delete,insert,update) c) Using sql class, its properties and methods. 23. What is the difference between component buffer and data buffer? Component buffer contains all the data of the active component. Data buffer contains the data other than the data in the component buffer (Data of other records) 24. What databuffer classes are available in people code?

Rowset, Row, Record, Field, Array, File, Sql, chart, grid and so on. 25. When we select a component what events will be fired?

If default mode for component is search mode: only searchinit will fired .If default mode for component is new mode :field default, formula, rowinit, searchinit. 26. What are different variables in people code and their Scope? System variables and User defined variables. Scope ---Global, Component, Local. 27. What is default processing? In default processing, any blank fields in the component are set to their default Field Properties, or in FieldDefault PeopleCode 28. What is difference between field default and Row init? Field default specifies only the default value for a field when we are in Add mode. Row init fires only when a row of data coming from database to component buffer 29. What is difference between saveprechange and savepostchange? Which function directly interacts with the database?

value. You can specify the default value either in

Saveprechange---last event that executes before updating the data from component buffer to the database. Savepostchange –fires after the updation of data in the database. SQLEXEC --- function directly interacts with the database. 29. What is Getlevel0()? What is the use of %subrec and %selectall functions? Getlevel0()---used the get the rowset of the level0. %subrec--is used only in Dynamic View SQL where it expands to the columns of a subrecord:

%selectall--%SelectAll is shorthand for selecting all fields in the specified record, wrapping date/time fields with %DateOut, %Tim

30. What is an array in people code? What is maximum dimension of an array? Which function inserts values into an array “pop”? An array is a collection of data storage locations, each of which holds the same type of data. The maximum depth of a PeopleCode array is 15 dimensions.

Push and unshift are the functions of the array used to add the elements into the array one from the end of the array and one from th beginning. Pop is a function of array used to select and delete an element from the end of the array. 31. What is difference between Getrowset and Createrowset in people code? Getrowset –is used to get rowset for a record in the component buffer. Createrowset—is used to create rowset for a record which in database, and is also called a 32. Can you save the component programmatically? Using Dosave and Dosavenow functions. 33. What is differed processing and its advantages? Standalone rowset

Postpones some user actions to reduce the number of trips to the database so that increases the performance (in system edits, field e field change). Advantages: 1) 2) Reduces the network traffic. Increases the performance.

33. Write the syntax to access third level record field using object oriented peoplecode? &fld=Getlevel0()(1).GetRowset(Record.<level1 record>.GetRow(1), GetRowset(Record.<level2record>).GetRow(1), GetRowset(Record.<level3 record>).GetRow(1), GetRecord(Record.<level3 record>).GetFieild(Field.<field name>)) 34. What are the built-functions used to control translate values dynamically?

Adddropdownitem() Deletedropdownitem() 35. How to populate data into grid in online? &Rs.Select or Scrollselect(). 1. Before accessing a people soft application what levels of security must be passed through. a) Field level security b) Row level security c) Maintain security d)definition security e) Portal security. 2. What is the use of primary permission list in user profile? Primary permission list is used for mass change and definition security purposes. 3. How to authorize the user to run a process or report?

To authorize a user to run a process, the process group, which contains the process or report, should be added to the permission list user. 4. How to give access to the records that are to be used in a query?

To give access to the records that are to be used in query, we have create a new query security tree and add the records which we w the access and then assign a access group to the tree. After that we have to add that query tree and query access group to the permis 5. What are the rules used by the system to determine whether a user is authorized to update an object?

The user should have the permission to update the object. This is given by the Definition security. The group, which holds the obje be added to the permission list of the user in update mode. 6. What are the different ways we can set up the portal security to access component in portal? 1) Structure & content 2) Menu import 3) Register component

1. Which of the following links are found in PeopleBooks
a. Customer Connection, Process Scheduler, People Code Language Reference b. Developer’s Portal, Query, Tree Manager c. Query, Process Scheduler, Application Engine d. None of the above. e. All of the above 2. Which of the following two servers used by Process scheduler to run a process a. PSPRCSRV b. PSDSTSRV

c. PSAESRV d. PSMSTPRCS e. None of the above f. All of the above 3. Which of the following data type accepts null value? a. Date b. Binary c. Number d. Long Char e. None of the above f. All of the above 4. Department Manager should approve the each Business activity before it goes to next step. How would u implement this in Work Flow? a. Rule b. Role c. Users d. None of the above e. All of the above 5. A Business manager logged in to the system. He is not able to see the specific menu name in that. What would be the reason? a. Permission is not granted b. Setting has to be done in Configuration Manager. c. Options has to be set in Application Designer d. None of the above e. All of the above 6. In which of the following code would be automatically generated when u drag the component? (multiple answers) a. File Layout b. Component Interface c. Application Engine d. None of the above e. All of the above

2. 7. What is the default format of SQR Reports?
a. Txt b. PDF c. HTML d. CSV e. None of the above f. All of the above 8. Which of the following is applicable for UPG Convert? Options like a. Conversion of Data, consists of Cobol programs b. Conversion of Data, consists of SQR programs c. Data conversion consists of AE programs. d. None of the above e. All of the above 9. Criteria in PS Query refers which of the following in SQL a. Where b. Select c. Insert d. Commit e. None of the above f. All of the above 10. Where report would be processed? a. Process Scheduler b. Application Server

c. Client d. Workstation e. None of the above f. All of the above 11. Which of the following would be stored in to the database? (Choose 3) a. SQL Table b. SQL View c. Dynamic View d. Derived Work/Record e. Temporary Table f. None of the above g. All of the above 12. How many keys you can set for Dynamic View? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 0 f. None of the above g. All of the above 13. Which of the following are the ways to execute AE Program? (choose 4) a. Application Designer Run Button b. Process Scheduler c. People Code d. SQR e. Cobol f. Bat File g. None of the above h. All of the above 14. Which is correct SQR Comment Syntax? a. ! b. /* */ c. <* *> d. Remark e. None of the above f. All of the above 15. Which is correct People Code comment Syntax (choose 2) a. <* *> b. /* */ c. Comments d. None of the above e. All of the above 16. People Soft Partner wants to know the implementation information. Where he can get it? a. Partner Connection b. Partner Alliance c. People soft University d. None of the above e. All of the above f. Customer Connection 17. U downloaded some patches. What are all the things that might come with those patches? a. SQR b. People Code c. Upgrade template d. Some other options e. None of the above

f. All of the above 18. Entity Relationship diagram means? a. Business process map b. Work flow process c. A flow chart that indicates each entity and its relationship d. None of the above e. All of the above 19. Which of the following is applicable for LDP? (Choose 2) a. Central security b. Streamline various people soft applications. c. some other options d. None of the above e. All of the above 20. Regarding Deferred processing which of the following is correct? a. u can easily find out the answer b. None of the above c. All of the above 21. Where the default style sheet should be stored if user wants it to reflect through out the portal? a. Application Designer b. Configuration manager c. Configuration. properties d. People Tools - Utilities - Options - Style Sheet e. None of the above f. All of the above 22. Where u would give the parameter values for Process to run? a. Run control table b. State record c. Some other options d. None of the above e. All of the above 23. Simple SQL Select Question? 24. Simple SQL Delete Question? 25. Which is of the following are valid Variable scopes. a. component , Record ,Global b. Component, Local, Field c. Local, Global, Component d. None of the above e. All of the above 26. PeopleSoft reserves ALL Win Help context numbers (in Utilities, PeopleTools Options) up to which number? a. 10,000,000 b. 12,000,000 c. 14,000,000 d. 16,000,000 e. 18,000,000 f. None of the above g. All of the above 27. Which one of the following PeopleCode debugging tools automatically converts values of any data type other than object into string values for viewing during debugging? a. MsgGetText b. MsgGet c. MessageBox d. WinMessage

e. ExpandBindVar 28. In which one of the following views would you see the fields, criteria, and other details associated with the current query? a. Object view b. Record view c. Component view d. Designer view e. Query view 29. In which PeopleCode event does ALL data validation take place? a. SavePostChange b. FieldFormula c. SavePreChange d. FieldEdit e. FieldChange 30. Which one of the following is NOT a valid PeopleSoft query type? a. Message agent queries b. Reporting queries c. Role queries d. Ad-hoc queries e. View queries 31. The following is an entry from the application reviewer LOG File: start Field=PERSONAL_DATA.EMPLID-RowInit Temps=1 Stack=4 Source=233 What does the Source=233 parameter in the above LOG file entry identify? a. The statement being executed is line 233 of the PeopleCode program. b. The number of references to the PERSONAL_DATA.EMPLID field c. The log file line number 233 d. The value contained in the PERSONAL_DATA.EMPLID field e. The length of the PeopleCode program 32. Which one of the following is the primary purpose of the application designer's SQL Alter function? a. To update the database table to be in sync with the PeopleTools object definition of that table b. To alter the definition of a PeopleTools object without affecting the actual object within the database c. To drop and recreate a table that must be changed as the result of a customization d. To modify a table that needs changes as part of a customization e. To update the PeopleTools object definition to be in sync with the definition of that table in the database 33. Which one of the following PeopleSoft Objects CANNOT be locked by developers as part of Change Control Locking as displayed above? a. Process Definitions b. Business Process Maps c. Panel Groups d. Fields e. Records 34. How do you define the names of the application servers being used to access PeopleSoft? a. In Configuration Manager, under the Application Servers tab. b. In Application Designer, under the Tools menu. c. In Application Designer, using the Create New Object option. d. In Security Administrator, under the Define Profiles option. e. In the Application Servers parameters of the configuration file, PSAPPSRV.CFG. 35. PeopleSoft has its own naming convention for system and non-system (application) tables. In the list below, RECORDNAME refers to the name of any table or record. Referring to the above information, which one of the following identifies the naming convention PeopleSoft uses for non-system (application) tables? a. SYS_PSRECORDNAME b. PS_RECORDNAME c. SYSRECORDNAME d. PSRECORDNAME e. PS$RECORDNAME

36.PeopleSoft tracks object changes using a system table. Which PeopleTools System table is used to track object changes? a. SYSRELEASE b. SYSOBJECTS c. PSRELEASE d. PSOBJECTS e. PSVERSIONS 37. Suppose the CEO wants a list of the departments whose MINIMUM salary is greater than $100,000. Your manager asks you to determine the quickest method to deliver this data to the CEO. Since writing an SQR will take too much time, you decide to use PeopleSoft query. Referring to the above, what function would you use, in combination with the aggregate function "Minimum" to produce the result set required? a. JOIN b. SUB-SELECT c. UNION d. EXPRESSION e. HAVING CRITERIA 38. What is the minimum number of objects an object group can consist of? a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. 3 e. 4 39. Where do you create the process security groups? a. Application Designer b. Process Scheduler c. Define Business Rules, Define General Options d. Security Administrator e. Process System 40. What effect would making a change to the EMPLID field in the above project have? a. No effect on the field itself, but only on the field's definition. b. Changes would occur globally; meaning the field is changed everywhere else in the database. c. Changes to the field cannot be made unless you rename the field. d. Changes to the field do not take effect until you build or rebuild the entire project. e. Changes to the field are only reflected within the current project. 41. Which security administrator profile provides the necessary IDs and passwords for the behind-the-scenes database logon that occurs when an operator signs on to PeopleSoft? a. Class b. Operator c. Access d. Tree e. Object 42. You are asked to perform some security-related tasks. You determine the quickest method to do this is using the Data Mover utility and the GRANT_USER and ENCRYPT_PASSWORD commands. However, to perform these commands you must login to Data Mover in bootstrap mode. Referring to the above, how do you launch Data Mover in bootstrap mode? a. Login using the SYSADM user ID and password. b. Login using the database access ID and password. c. Login using your regular user ID without a password. d. Login using your regular user ID and password, and execute SET BOOTSTRAP. e. Login using your regular user ID and password.

43. UPDATE PSLOCK SET SECURITY_OPTION = ''; what function does the above SQL statement perform? a. Disables the PSLOCK security option for ALL users. b. Enables the PSLOCK security option for the current user ONLY. c. Suspends the PSLOCK security option for the current transaction. d. Enables the PSLOCK security option.

e. Disables the PSLOCK security option for the current user ONLY. 44. &OPRID = %OperatorId; Where would the above PeopleCode event be found on a Run Control Record? a. SearchInit b. RowDelete c. RowSelect d. RowInsert e. RowInit 45. The example below demonstrates the use of SQR flags in the configuration manager directories folder: -F C:\PSHrms\Sqr\ what do the above SQR flags signify to the SQR Report Writer upon execution? a. Directs log messages to the specified file b. Specifies the output path c. Specifies the path to SQC include files d. Specifies the path to the ALLMAXES.MAX file e. Sets full path to and name of the SQR initialization file 46. What application server service initiates a COBOL program to run a transaction? a. Jolt Internet relay b. Remote call c. Database agent d. Jolt relay e. Message agent 47. After going live with your new application, you realize that one of the values being used for computing Employee Leave Accruals is not correct. You've narrowed the problem down to a section of PeopleCode within the application. You now need to execute the process and display the values of the variables being used to determine where the problem is occurring. Referring to the above information, how would you display the in-question value of the LeaveRate variable contained in the PeopleCode? a. WinMessage("The value is: ", &LeaveRate, 64); b. WinMessage("The value is: ", ShowVar &LeaveRate, 64); c. WinMessage("The value is: ", Show &LeaveRate, 64); d. WinMessage("The value is: ", DisplayVar LeaveRate, 64); e. WinMessage(DisplayText "The value is: ", DisplayVar LeaveRate, 64); 48. Which one of the following is NOT a standard enforced by Data Mover? a. With the exception of double-dash (--) comment statements, statements may span multiple lines. b. With the exception of double-dash (--) comment statements, every command statement must be followed by a delimiter. c. Statement text is case-sensitive. d. Command statements may contain any amount of white space between items. e. You must add a space after the double-dash (--) before you start your comments. 49. Which one of the following files are NOT stored in the process scheduler logging directory? a. Application server logs b. COBOL trace logs c. Process scheduler logs d. Application engine trace logs e. Process request logs 50. Which process requests will run through the process scheduler server? a. All processes submitted on the server b. All SQR and COBOL processes ONLY c. All processes submitted on the client d. Application related processes ONLY (no PeopleTools processes) e. All processes submitted on the client or server 51. The major types of Trees that can be created using the Tree Manager? a. Position, Succession, Department, Access Group b. Detail Trees, Summary Trees, Node Oriented Trees, Query Access Trees c. Detail Trees, Summary Trees, Node Oriented Trees, Reporting Trees d. Reporting, Succession, Department, Access Group e. Summary Trees, Node Oriented Trees, Dimensional Trees, Query Access Trees

52. 1.View 2. SQL Table 3.Derived / Work Record 4. Sub Record 5. Query View Which of the above record definitions is NOT stored on the database and is therefore NOT required to be built? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 53. You created a new menu with three new data entry panels. The panels were created by another member of the development team. You must now add these panels to the new menu so users can key data into the system. Referring to the above information, which one of the following objects would you add to a menu to include the series of new panels? a. Panel b. Business process map c. Project d. Business process e. Panel group 54. Which one of the following PeopleCode events should NOT contain the WinMessage function? a. SearchInit b. SavePreChange c. FieldChange d. SaveEdit e. RowInit 55. The Process Scheduler Logging detail can be manipulated using the TraceSQL feature. Following is a sample use of this feature: TraceSQL=4 What items will be included in the Process Scheduler log, given the above value of the TraceSQL parameter? a. COBOL statement timings and SQL statements b. Set select buffers c. SQL statements d. SQL connect, disconnect, commit, and rollback e. SQL statements and variables 56. The Application Reviewer is not working correctly, and you are in a hurry to find the problem with a piece of PeopleCode that's been causing problems. You need a quick method to find all the fields being referenced by the PeopleCode program without having to read through the entire program. Referring to the above, how do you determine ALL the fields referenced by the PeopleCode program without having to read every line of code? a. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFMNPC. b. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFPNPC. c. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFPCFL. d. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFPCMN. e. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFFLPC. 57. Before performing an upgrade, it is a good idea to validate the consistency of the database in which the upgrade will occur. This helps ensure a "clean" starting point for the upgrade process. Referring to the above information, which Utility program would you run to ensure the underlying database is consistent with the data structures defined in PeopleTools? a. Stamp the PeopleSoft Database b. Upgrade Compare & Report c. Perform a PeopleSoft System Audit d. Validate PeopleSoft Project e. Run a PeopleSoft Database Audit 58. Which one of the following is NOT a task performed by Data Mover? a. Transfer application data between PeopleSoft databases. b. Rename record and field names within PS Database. c. Re encrypt passwords globally for a single operator. d. Move Object definitions contained in the PeopleTools tables.

e. Imports into an existing PS Database. 59. As a last resort, query will write the default Crystal Report to which directory? a. CRWRPTPATH directory b. Root directory of the PeopleSoft application server c. Server %TEMP% directory d. Windows %TEMP% directory e. User's language directory beneath the CRWRPTPATH directory 60. The Security Administrator is not available. You are in a hurry to grant a user the ability to start an application server, and you decide to make the change in the actual application server configuration file, rather than using the Security Administrator. Referring to the above information, how would you grant a user the ability to start an application server using the application server configuration file, PSAPPSRV.CFG? a. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV.CFG file, and update the STARTAPPSVR column of the PSOPRDEFN table to a value of 1. b. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV table, and update the STARTAPPSVR column of the PSOPRDEFN table to a value of 1. c. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSOPRDEFN table, and update the STARTAPPSVR parameter in the PSAPPSRV.CFG file to a value of 1. d. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV.CFG file, and update the STARTAPPSVR parameter in the PSAPPSRV.CFG file to a value of 1. e. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV table, and update the STARTAPPSVR parameter in the PSAPPSRV.CFG file to a value of 1. 61. 2. print " " 3 BLANKLINE = 1 4. .B 5 display " " Which of above SQR statements allows you to print a blank line within a document when creating a letter within SQR? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 62. Which one of the following PeopleCode events can run in both two-tier and three-tier environments on either the client or application server? a. SavePostChange b. SavePreChange c. FieldEdit d. RowInit e. FieldChange 63. How many security administrator profiles does PeopleSoft Security Administrator use? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 64. How do you set up table-sharing in PeopleTools applications? a. Add the field, SETID, as a key field to each table you want to share, and then define the set control field. b. Add the field, BUSINESS_UNIT, as a key field to each table you want to share, and then define the set control field. c. Add the field, SETID, as a key field to each table you want to share. d. Add the fields, BUSINESS_UNIT and SETID, as key fields to each table you want to share. e. Add the field, BUSINESS_UNIT, as a key field to each table you want to share. 65. When running PS Query to output to Excel as demonstrated above, how would you prevent the space between Excel columns being printed? a. Set Space between Query Columns to " " within the nVision tab of the Configuration Mgr. b. Set Space between Query Columns to 999 within the nVision tab of the Configuration Mgr. c. The default setting is no spaces. d. Write a macro within Excel to delete all columns with no data. e. Set Space between Query Columns to 0 within the nVision tab of the Configuration Mgr.

66. Select max(effdt) from ps_car_alloc where emplid = &EMPLID and effdt <= %currentdate and end_dt is null; What problem exists in the above PeopleCode statement? a. Use of the "null" keyword is not permitted in PeopleCode. b. No alias used for the ps_car_alloc table. c. The &EMPLID variable should not contain an "&". d. The %currentdate variable is not a valid META-SQL function. e. The "is" keyword is invalid and should be "=" instead. 67. What are the steps involved in joining PS_JOB and PS_POSITION_DATA forcing a row to be returned even when there is NOT a match between the records while still maintaining PS Query security? a. Create a view and include the outer join as required as part of the view. Add View to Query Tree. Select View as part of Query. b. Create a view and include the outer join as required as part of the view. Select View as part of Query. c. Write an SQR to perform the outer join. Write the data to a temp table. Query the temp table using PS Query. d. Create a new record and include the outer join as required. Add Record to Query Tree. Select Record as part of Query. e. Create an expression within PS Query joining the two records and including the outer join on the correct field. 68. \PTPUPRCS_ProcessServerName_MMDD.log Which one of the following log files does the above log file naming syntax and path location identify? a. Process server SQR trace b. Process monitor log c. Process server agent log d. Process server COBOL trace e. Process server SQL trace 69. PeopleSoft reserves ALL Message Sets (in Utilities, Message Catalog) up to which number? a. 10,000 b. 19,999 c. 30,000 d. 40,000 e. 50,000 70. In which one of the following views would you see the fields, criteria, and other details associated with the current query? a. Component view b. Object view c. Query view d. Designer view e. Record view 71. Why is the record description displayed above important when creating a new record? a. It is used for Upgrade processes. b. PS Query and Tree Manager use it to identify the record. c. It is a required description. d. Record Description is not used. e. To help search for records within the Application Designer. 72. Which one of the following Data Types is NOT supported by the PeopleCode programming environment? a. OBJECT b. NUMBER c. TIMESTAMP d. DATE e. STRING 73. As a member of the development team, you are asked to create a new record definition to be used in an existing PeopleSoft application. Referring to the above information, in which one of the following workspaces would you create a new Record definition? a. Project workspace b. Project workspace, upgrade view c. Object workspace d. New object workspace e. Project workspace, development view

74. What is the default Crystal Report that PeopleSoft Query tool creates? a. DEFAULT.RPT b. ACTQRY.RPT c. CRYQRY.RPT d. QRYCRY.RPT e. QUERY.RPT 75. Which one of the following steps is NOT part of performing an upgrade? a. Apply all outstanding patches, prior to upgrade. b. Perform a comparison of objects between the source and target databases. c. Populate a project to be used for the upgrade. d. Stamp the target database. e. Copy the project to the database being upgraded. 76. Application engines are comprised of one or more steps and are quite similar, in construct, to other programming language constructs. Referring to the above information, which one of the following has the equivalent construction of an application engine? a. A SQL script b. A database agent c. A message agent d. A SQR program e. A COBOL paragraph 77. \ProcessName_ProcessInstance.log Which one of the following log files does the above log file naming syntax and path location identify? a. Process server message agent log b. Process server agent log c. Process server COBOL or SQR trace d. Process server SQL trace e. Process monitor log 78. PeopleSoft uses which one of the following tables to automate the process of creating large volumes of users on tables? a. PSOPRCLASS b. PSOPRLOAD c. PSOPRDEFN_INTFC d. PSOPRDEFN e. PSOPRCLASS_INTFC 79. Your UNIX system administrator have just informed you that they are reorganizing some directory structures on the UNIX machine. They want you to determine if the PeopleSoft architecture will be affected. You quickly realize that your CAB and JAR files locations will be changed. Referring to the above, how do you ensure the Web client will perform correctly once these directory structures have changed? a. Modify the ARCHIVE parameter to point to the new directory. b. Modify the JAR parameter to point to the new directory. c. Modify the LOCALE parameter to point to the new directory. d. Modify the CAB parameter to point to the new directory. e. Modify the CODEBASE parameter to point to the new directory. 80. How would you run SQL Alter to alert you to discrepancies between your record definitions and underlying SQL tables, without actually performing changes to the object in the database? a. Run as a user with AUDIT permissions to the underlying database. b. Run as a user with SELECT ONLY permissions to the underlying database. c. Run as a user that has NO permissions to modify the underlying database. d. Run the SQL Alter in Report Mode. e. Run the SQL Alter in Audit Only Mode. 81. When do configuration changes made using the configuration manager take effect? a. Immediately upon saving the changes. b. After exiting PeopleSoft and rebooting your workstation. c. Once you save the changes and exit the Configuration Manager. d. Once you exit PeopleSoft and log back in. e. After you shutdown the database and application servers and then reboot.

82. Which command is valid in both bootstrap and regular mode when operating the data mover? a. REPLACE b. RENAME c. EXPORT d. REPLACE_VIEW e. GRANT_USER 83. How many security layers are involved in the PeopleSoft environment? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 84. How are PeopleCode programs saved within the database? a. Saved as ASCII text, and stored in the field definition. b. Saved as binary, and stored in the field definition. c. Saved as ASCII text, and stored in the field definition with a copy ALSO saved as binary and stored in a separate PeopleTools table. d. Saved as binary, and stored in a separate PeopleTools table. e. Saved as ASCII text, and stored in a separate PeopleTools table. 85. What is PeopleSoft's recommended way to access panel groups and the business logic associated with them outside of PeopleSoft online panels? a. Component Interface b. Application engine c. Database agent d. Application designer e. Web client 86. Which events occur when an error or warning is issued during a FieldDefault PeopleCode event? a. Displays the Error or Warning message, and continues processing. b. Causes a runtime error, and forces cancellation of the PeopleCode program ONLY. c. Causes a runtime error, and forces cancellation of the entire panel group. d. Displays the Error or Warning message, and prompts the user for a default value to be used. e. Displays the Error or Warning message, and discontinues processing of the PeopleCode program. 87. Your manager requests that you modify the label of the Leave Accrual menu item from Leave Accrual to Monthly Leave Accrual. Your manager does not tell you the name of the menu on which the Leave Accrual menu item exists. To make the change, you must know on which menu the item is located. Referring to the above information, which step(s) will help you find the menu that must be updated? a. Open Security Administrator. Open Menu Items. Choose Find Menu. b. Choose Open. Select Object Type of Menu, and choose Menu Name Search. c. Open the panel within the Application Designer. Choose Edit, Find Object References. Open Panel Group. Choose Edit, Find Object References. d. Choose Edit, Find in PeopleCode, and choose Find Menu. e. Open the panel. Choose Edit, Find Menu. 88. Which one of the following database management systems requires that you key the SERVER NAME in lower case in the configuration manager signon defaults? a. Microsoft SQL Server b. Informix c. Oracle d. Sybase e. DB2 89. Which one of the following is NOT a component of the Process Scheduler? a. Process scheduler server shutdown b. Process monitor c. Process scheduler server agent d. Process scheduler PeopleTools

e. Process scheduler request dialog 90. Your application users are experiencing problems with one of the customizations your development team has recently worked on. The customization involved changes to a PeopleCode object within the database. You decide to use Application Reviewer to debug the PeopleCode. When you try to start the Application Reviewer you receive an error that the Reviewer cannot be started. Referring to the above, why is the Application Reviewer unable to start in your normal three-tier client configuration? a. The three-tier database server is not configured to allow Application Reviewer access. b. The database connectivity software has not been installed on the workstation you are currently using. c. The database server software has been disabled not allowing it to accept incoming requests from the workstation you are currently using. d. Access to the Application Reviewer has not been granted through the Security Administrator. e. The PeopleCode object you are trying to debug is currently being modified by another member of the development team. 91. You created a new menu with three new data entry panels. The panels were created by another member of the development team. You must now add these panels to the new menu so users can key data into the system. Referring to the above information, which one of the following objects would you add to a menu to include the series of new panels? a. Project b. Panel c. Panel group d. Business process map e. Business process 92. Your delivered PeopleSoft reports do not contain enough information in the headings. Your users want more detailed information in the headings. Referring to the above information, which one of the following utilities allows you to customize the headings in your SQR Reports? a. Message catalog b. Language settings c. Control tables d. Strings table e. General options 93. When naming system (non-application) tables in PeopleSoft, there is one exception of which you need to be aware. Referring to the above information, which one of the following records is the aforementioned exception for PeopleSoft System tables? a. XLATTABLE b. SYS_LOCKS c. SYS$VIEWS d. SYSXLATTABLE e. SYSVIEWS 94. How would you track ongoing changes to PeopleTools objects within your database? a. Use change control administrator's Lock All Objects option. b. Use change control administrator's Use Change Control Locking option. c. Use change control administrator's Use Change Control history option. d. Perform PeopleCode trace. e. Run online SQL traces. 95. The example below demonstrates the use of SQR flags in the configuration manager directories folder: -F C:\PSHrms\Sqr\ .What do the above SQR flags signify to the SQR Report Writer upon execution? a. Specifies the path to the ALLMAXES.MAX file b. Directs log messages to the specified file c. Sets full path to and name of the SQR initialization file d. Specifies the output path e. Specifies the path to SQC include files 96. A user requests a new field to be added to the data entry application used by the company. This new field will capture large amounts of text, up to 2000 characters long. As a developer, you must decide what type of field to use to store this data. Referring to the above information, which one of the following field types would you create to store this amount of data? a. Long character b. Long text c. Variable character d. Text e. Character

97. Which of the tools below would you use to view the business process map display? a. Tree manager b. Security administrator c. Utilities d. Application designer e. Navigator 98. Where do you define the properties for Process Scheduler process security groups? a. Define Business Rules, Define General Options b. Security Administrator c. Process System d. Process Scheduler e. Application Designer 99. In the above workspace, which one of the following folders would you choose to display the results of a search through PeopleCode? a. Find in PeopleCode folder b. Validate folder c. Results folder d. Find Object References folder e. Upgrade folder 100. PeopleSoft Query is split into which of the following two views? a. Query view and data view b. Record view and field view c. Component view and designer view d. Object view and field view e. Object view and results view 101. The TUXEDO Connect String is designed for advanced configuration to support dynamic load balancing. The following example illustrates a sample TUXEDO Connect String: //ip1:port1|//ip2:port2|//ipn:portn where ip = IP Address and port = port number. Which one of the following identifies the purpose of the above example? a. Specifies multiple application servers to which the client will arbitrarily connect. b. Specifies multiple application servers to which the client will connect in sequential order. c. Specifies a single web server, and allows Web clients to connect to a common URL. d. Specifies multiple application servers to which the client will always connect. e. Specifies multiple web servers, and allows Web clients to connect to a common URL. 102. Which one of the following situations requires the installation of database connectivity software on the client workstation in a three-tier environment? a. If you run application designer b. If you wish to run a process on the server c. If you run a SQL statement trace d. If you wish to change an object in the database e. If you need to perform an application upgrade 103. If an object is removed from the database, it will NOT automatically be removed from the project(s) to which it was added. How do you determine if a project contains valid objects without checking every object manually? a. Open Project. Choose Edit, Find Object References. b. Open Project. Choose Edit, Find in PeopleCode. c. Open Project. Choose Tools, Validate Project. d. Open Project. Choose Build, Build Project. e. Open Project. Choose Tools, Upgrade, Compare & Report. 104. Which query type requires the use of aggregate functions on the columns being selected in the query? a. Reporting query b. PS/nVision matrix query c. Ad-hoc query d. Search query e. Search dialog box query

105. Which option best describes the term, upgrading, in PeopleSoft? a. Migrating PeopleSoft objects from one database to another. b. Installing new executables that increase the current software version to a higher version. c. Migrating PeopleSoft objects and transactional data from one database to another. d. Migrating objects from one database to another, and updating system components such as software. e. Obtaining up-to-date skills on more recent versions of the products. 106. Following is an example of a command line used to login to a database in three-tier mode. However, something is wrong with this command. PSTOOLS -CTAPPSERVER -CDRVDB -CODVB -CPDVB Why will the above command line fail? a. The database type parameter value is incorrect. b. The operator ID parameter's value is not specified. c. The operator password parameter's value is not specified. d. The database name parameter is incorrect. e. The database type parameter is not specified. 107. Which one of the following is NOT a component of the various tree types in the PeopleSoft tree manager? a. Root b. Setid/Effective date c. Record definition d. Tree structure e. Category 108. You have a situation where a field value changes, and you don't know how it changed. There are two ways to find all references to a field. Referring to the above information, which of the following two tools will help you find ALL references to a field? a. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Find Object References (in Application Designer) b. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports c. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query d. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query e. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports 109. Which one of the following situations requires the installation of database connectivity software on the client workstation in a three-tier environment? a. If you need to perform an application upgrade b. If you run a SQL statement trace c. If you run application designer d. If you wish to change an object in the database e. If you wish to run a process on the server 110. Which one of the following tasks CANNOT be performed using PeopleSoft's Process Scheduler? a. Schedule a process to run monthly, daily, hourly, and even by the minute. b. Schedule recurring processes. c. Schedule the startup and shutdown of the application server. d. Create jobs (groups of processes). e. Schedule a job to run several processes, each dependent on the prior. 111. Which one of the following security administrator profiles does NOT have a password associated with it? a. Tree b. Access c. Operator d. Object 112. Which one of the following components is NOT part of the PeopleSoft three-tier architecture? a. Application server b. Batch server c. Web server d. Client workstation e. Database server 113. What does the ACCEPT operation of the application reviewer LOG file do? a. Causes control to transfer to the next level-1 statement. b. Duplicates the value of the top element or the stack.

c. Passes control to the specified instruction location. d. Adds the contents of the top two items on the stack, and pushes the result onto the stack. e. Retrieves the value of record.field and pushes it onto the stack. 114. Which one of the following database management systems requires the use of the Connect ID and Connect Password in the configuration manager signon defaults section? a. DB2 b. Microsoft SQL Server c. SQLBase d. Oracle e. Sybase 115. A system user wants a new report added to the Reports menu of the Administer Human Resources (US) menu. As a developer, you need to add this new report to the menu and provide the user access to use the new item. Referring to the above information, which of the following tools would you use to add the new item to the Reports menu and grant access to the item? a. Utilities and Object Security b. Security Administrator and Query Security c. Application Designer and Security Administrator d. Query Security and Utilities e. Object Security and Security Administrator PART !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!2222222222222222222 116. You have a situation where a field value changes, and you don't know how it changed. There are two ways to find all references to a field. Referring to the above information, which of the following two tools will help you find ALL references to a field? a. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports b. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports c. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query d. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Find Object References (in Application Designer) e. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query 117. Which query type requires the use of aggregate functions on the columns being selected in the query? a. Reporting query b. Search dialog box query c. Search query d. PS/nVision matrix query e. Ad-hoc query 118.1) REM This is an example of commenting PeopleCode;2) /* ----- Logic for Compensation Change ----- */ 3) /*Recalculate compensation for next row. Next row is based on*/ 4) prior value of EFFDT 5) calc_next_compchg(&OLDDT, EFFSEQ, 0); Which line of code in the above statement contains an error? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 119. Message definitions are created using which one of the following tools? a. EDI manager b. Application engine c. Application designer d. PeopleTools utilities e. PeopleSoft query 120. Which one of the following programming languages does PeopleCode most closely resemble? a. COBOL b. Fortran c. C d. C++ e. Pascal

121. How does granting a user authority to start an application server affect other authorizations granted to that same user? a. None of the user's current authorizations are affected by the change. b. All other authorizations are disabled until the user starts an application server. c. Only authorizations granted to PeopleTools objects are disabled. d. The user is no longer allowed to start a process scheduler service. e. The user is granted full System Administrator access to the database in the three-tier mode. 122. Which one of the following is true about PIA? 123. What BEA product is used for DB transaction in PS 124. How do you login into BS mode? 125. What commands are valid in BS mode? 126. What event gets fired after DB Update? 127. PeopleCode events pertaining to Record Field: 128. Changing Prompt Table with NO Edit to Prompt Table with Edit? 129. Find which not part of AE Program is. a. Action, b. Section c. Step d. Event 130. Which RDBMS uses Tablespace? a. Oracle b. DB2 c. SQL Server d. Informix e. Sybase 131.Database Connectivity Drivers should be installed in the following System a. Client Workstation in two tier mode (Yes) b. App Server (Yes) c. Batch Server (Yes) d. File Server e. Data Mover (Yes) f. Web Server 132. Customization done in Dev DB, Which tool i will use to move it to Prod DB? Use App Designer -> Copy DB Simple Select Statement and Find the Results 133. What are the People Tools available for Integration Broker? a. Application Messaging b. Component Interface c. File Layout d. Message Agent (Not an Integration Broker tool) 134. In which platform does Crystal and Psnvision works? a. Windows b. Unix c. All of the Above d. None of the Above 135. What are the Search Keys you use to find Patches and Fixes a. Release b. Updated date time c. Platform d. Report Id 136. When a business requirement in Fit/Gap Analysis does not meet by PeopleSoft then a. Customize PS application (Yes) b. Buy third party software (Yes)

c. Change policies and procedures to meet the requirement d. Call PS Development Center for Enhancement (Yes) 137. A Customer wants to use a new Image in HRMS, where it is stored? a. File Server b. Web Server c. Batch Server d. DB Server 138. Where will you configure for failover of Application Server (Scenario) a. Configuration Manager b. PSAPPSRV.cfg c. Configuration.properties d. None of the Above 139. What are Menu types available? a. Component b. PeopleCode c. Separator d. All of the above 140. What is added as new option in Build apart from Create Tables, Indexes, Views? 141. What views available in Application Designer project workspace? 142. I have created a Menu and a Page and given user access to that page, which of the tables gets affected on this (Scenario) 143. What hyperlinks available in PeopleBooks? Some options with different hyperlinks not available in peoplebooks, select the correct one Study all hyperlinks in the first page of people books. 144. What Record Changes does not affect Database? a. Change in List box in Record Field properties (correct) b. Deleting a field c. Removing the search key and alternate search key 145. In PeopleCode Debugger what are the valid values (Just Check) a. Go b. Commit c. Step Over d. View Variable Value 146. Which Web Services is only used as a Proxy Server (Just Check) a. MS IIS b. Apache c. Web Logic d. Web Sphere 147. Which of the following are not parts of an AE program? a. Section b. Procedure c. Step d. Function e. Action 148. Where is workflow work items found? a. Email b. Worklist c. Forms d. File server 149. Where do you need to install connectivity software? (choose 3) a. file server b. web server c. batch server d. App server

e. two tier client 150. Which process is used for running AE programs which are to be run at a frequency of less than a day? a. PSAppsrv b. PSAESRV c. PSDAEMON d. PSQCKSRV 151. In the following url http://localhost/Peoplesoft/EMPLOYEE/PSFT_HR/c/PROCESS_SCHEDULER.PRCSTYPEDEFN.GBL which one is the component definition? a. EMPLOYEE b. PSFT_HR c. PROCESS_SCHEDULER d. PRCSTYPEDEFN.GBL 152. Which of the following are Record field events ? (choose 3) a. FieldChange b. SearchSave c. ScrollEdit d. RowSave e. SavePreChange 153. Which of the following fires after the database is updated? a. SavePreChange b. SavePostChange c. SaveEdit d. RowDelete 154. If you want to log into DataMover in Bootstrap mode, you would login as.. a. Database superuser b. Peoplesoft superuser c. Data Mover Superuser d. Security Administrator 155. Which of the following shortcuts would you install on a developer's workstation to allow quick access to the PeopleSoft applications while also allowing them to change the database to which they access? a. Configuration Manager and PSADMIN Utility b. Security Administrator and Import Manager c. PeopleTools and Configuration Manager d. Security Administrator and PSADMIN Utility e. PeopleTools and Application Server 156. Which of the following commands can be run in Bootstrap mode? a. EXPORT b. RENAME_VIEW c. ENCRYPT_PASSWORD d. None of the above 157. Your Onsite DBA has called you up and told you that one of the tables PS_ABC_TAO has grown very big in size. Based on the standard naming convention, you have determined that the record is a temporary record since it ends with _TAO. You look into the database and decide that that the data is not required any more. You ask the DBA to delete the data in the table. Next day you get a call from an irritated user who says that a daily process that took only 1 minute to run is taking about 2 hours today. You look into his process and find that it uses PS_ABC_TAO as a temporary table. What would you suggest the DBA to do? a. Drop table b. Re-create table c. Update statistics on the table d. Refresh the table with yesterday’s data 158. You want to update your password and enter a hint for forgotten password. What would you access? a. Access Profile

b. Permission Lists c. User Profile d. Primary Permission List 159. For downloading patches and fixes , you have gone to the customer connection and looking under 8 april, 2000 and see Report IDS like R-CCHEN-VP14JM. What does R stand for ? a. Tools b. Released c. Required d. Application e. Resolved 160. After logging into customer connection, you wish to search for fixes/patches. What are the search criterias available ? (choose 3) a. Report ID b. Date / time c. Platform d. Release e. Developer ID 161. You are a PeopleSoft Partner and wish to get information on database performance benchmark (or something like this).Where would you look for the info? a. Partner Alliance b. Alliance Partner c. PeopleSoft Knowledge base d. Partner knowledge base 162. You have downloaded an Application fix as a project from the customer connection. Whrere would you upgrade it to ? a. Demo b. Production db c. development db d. Application upgrade 163. Which one of the following is a trasaction control statement .. a. insert b. delete c. create d. Commit 164. Given a SQL Statement, we have been asked to check the right syntax .. Select the components which form the part of Integration Broker a. Msg. Agent b. File Layout c. CI d. app. Messaging 165. How many Message nodes are possible for a database. a. 1 b. 10 c. 100 d. Unlimited 166. Question based on changing prompt table, what happens when changing from NO EDIT TO EDIT option a. user can type own values b. user can type only prompt table values c. user can type only prompt table values and the default values gets populated from the database. 167. How will you get a single ouptut by combining two or more queries... a. UNION b. Outer join

c. Inner Join d. Sub query 168. What are the views available in App. Designer project workspace(multiple answer) a. Development b. Upgrade c. Results d. Validate e. Reference 169. In which one of the following views would you see the fields, criteria, and other details associated with the current query? a. Component view b. Object view c. Query view d. Designer view e. Record view 170. Which one of the following Data Types is NOT supported by the PeopleCode programming environment? a. OBJECT b. NUMBER c. TIMESTAMP d. DATE e. STRING 171. What is the default Crystal Report that PeopleSoft Query tool creates? a. DEFAULT.RPT b. ACTQRY.RPT c. CRYQRY.RPT d. QRYCRY.RPT e. QUERY.RPT 172. Which one of the following steps is NOT part of performing an upgrade? a. Apply all outstanding patches, prior to upgrade. b. Perform a comparison of objects between the source and target databases. c. Populate a project to be used for the upgrade. d. Stamp the target database. e. Copy the project to the database being upgraded. 173. Which command is valid in both bootstrap and regular mode when operating the data mover? a. REPLACE b. RENAME c. EXPORT d. REPLACE_VIEW e. GRANT_USER 174. What are the Tabs that you see in a Application Engine’s Program Properties? 1. General 2. State Records 3. Advanced 4. Section Filtering 5. Temp Tables a. 1, 2, 4, 5 & 3 b. 1, 5, 2 & 4 c. 1, 2, 5 & 3 d. 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 e. 1, 2, 5 & 3 175. You have modified some values on a page and then accidentally clicked the navigation headings in the breadcrumbs. Which of the following is true in that situation? a. The system will prompt you to save before the navigation takes place. b. The system will exit the page without prompting you to save any changes.

c. The system will display a warning message before exiting the page. d. The system will exit the page but the changes are saved automatically. e. The system will exit the page without prompting you to save any changes. 176. What is the max length a record definition can have? a. 13 b. 15 c. 17 d. 14 177. The Section Filtering menu options allow you to filter the current view so that you only see Sections and Steps based on specified criteria. This feature will typically be used in situations where you are developing Application Engine programs intended to run: a. in Multiple Markets b. on Multiple Platforms c. with effective dated sections d. All of the above 178. Why shouldn’t you run the scripts (generated by the build process) through Data Mover? a. The scripts may contain syntax specific to your database platform that Data b. Mover is not designed to process. c. The scripts generated may not include all the fields in the record definition. d. Data Mover can run any kind of scripts. e. None of the above 179. You can select deferred mode processing at the field level, page level and component level. Which level will override the other two? a. Page level b. Field level c. Component level d. In order for a field on the component to run in deferred mode, deferred mode must be selected at each of those levels. 180. Pressing the Refresh button on a Page will force: a. Processing on the application server to determine which fields have changed since the last transmission; and to execute any processing logic associated with those changes. b. Processing on the Database server to determine which fields have changed since the last transmission; and to execute any processing logic associated with those changes. c. Processing on the web server to determine which fields have not changed since the last transmission changes. d. None of the above 181. While creating a Query (Public or Private) involving two tables using PSQUERY, what happens as soon as you select a second record. a. Query will detect the second record and warns the user by displaying a warning message. b. Query executes the query displaying results. c. Query will detect the join and display the Join Criteria dialog box. d. Query includes only common key fields and will delete other fields in the fields tab. e. Query will detect the join and display the Join Criteria dialog box. 182. Which of the following is not provided by PSQUERY for formatting QUERY output? a. Change the column headings b. Specify a sort order for the result rows c. Display Translate Table values in place of codes. d. Display Prompt Table Values in place of codes. e. Display Prompt Table Values in place of codes. 183. Which of the following is correct in regards to the usage of ReUse statement in App.Engine Programs: (1). Don't use ReUse if you use %BIND variables to build parts of the SQL statement (2). If you use STATIC option on the %BIND you can use ReUse. (3). Don't use ReUse if you have %BIND variables in the field list of a SELECT statement unless the value is constant. (4). You can have Application Engine recompile a reused statement by using the %ClearCursor function.

a. 1, 3 only b. 2 & 4 only c. 1, 2 & 3 only d. 2, 3 & 4 only e. All 1, 2, 3 & 4 184. Which of the following is not true: a. Application Engine Definition is an Application Designer Object b. Application Engine Developers can take advantage of all the interface benefits that Application Designer offers. c. Multiple window support, which allows a developer to have multiple Application Engine programs open simultaneously. d. Change control support allows you to manage access to Application Engine objects by locking records. e. You can easily launch the PeopleCode Editor and the SQL Editor from within the Application Engine Designer interface, as needed. f. None of the above. 185. What is the order of the standard boolean operators in people code? a. OR, AND, NOT b. NOT, AND, OR c. AND, NOT, OR d. NOT, OR, AND e. NOT, AND, OR

186. If the Component Processor encounters an Error in one of these events, the user can't fix it. The user has no control over processing that occurs in these events: 1) FieldDefault 2)FieldFormula 3)RowInit 4)FieldChange 5)Prepopup 6)RowDelete 7)SavePreChange a. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6 only b. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 7 only c. 2, 4, & 7 only d. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 7 only e. 1, 2, 3 & 6 only f. 3, 4, 5, 6 & 7 only. 187. What does the PeopleCode Built-in function Exact do? a. Compares two Date Variables b. Compares two text strings c. Compares two string variables d. Compares two numeric variables. 188. When you add or subtract 2 date values or 2 time values, the result is given in a. DATE b. TIME c. DATETIME d. NUMBER 189. There are ___________ PeopleCode events that act as exit points from the Component Processor Flow. a. 20 b. 15 c. 17 d. 19 190. Which one of the following is incorrect in case of System Variables: a. Provide access to system information. b. Prefixed with the ‘&’ character. c. can be used wherever you can use a constant d. can assign their values to temp variables.

191. Usually RowInit is paired with a. FieldDefault b. SaveEdit c. FieldChange d. RowDelete e. FieldChange 192. Which of the following are true with SQR Server 6.0? a. Expanded DDO functionality b. Multi-byte encoding c. Color-printing support d. All of the above e. None of the above 193. Which SQR do you have to run to setup/create a sample database. a. aurefrsh b. cretaedb c. loadall d. setupdb e. None of the above 194. Page numbers can be printed in a __________format with the PAGE-NUMBER and LAST-PAGE commands. a. “Page n of m” b. “n of m” c. “Page# n” d. “n/m” 195. What happens if SQR commands in a SELECT paragraph are not indented at least by one space. a. Nothing happens b. While compiling SQR automatically indents all SQR commands c. They will be treated as COLUMN names and the SQR will abend. d. SQR treats them as Database columns but will not abend the SQR program. 196. What will be the output in #loc? LET $code = ‘abcdefgh’ find ’cde’ in $code 0 #loc a. 2 b. 1 c. 4 d. 3 197. When a business event is triggered, the system follows these 3 steps to decide to whom to route the work item. Find out which does not. a. It binds the query's bind variables using data from the page that's triggering the event. b. It runs the query, checking each user's route control profile to determine whether the user meets the selection criteria. c. It routes the work item to the appropriate role users. d. Assigns one of the roles provided for use with route controls. 198. Which function is used in every Workflow PeopleCode Program? a. TriggerWorkFlowEvent b. OnRouteSubscriptionEvent c. TriggerBusinessEvent d. None of the above e. TriggerBusinessEvent 199. Which of the following has Workflow as one of their events? (1) Record Field (2) Component Record Field (3) Menu (4). Component a. 2 & 4

b. 1 & 3 c. 1 & 4 d. 2 & 3 200. When using COM API bindings to access a component interface from a local client machine or web server, you need three of the following. Find one which is not. a. Third party application (non-PeopleSoft) b. External API installation c. PeopleSoft_PeopleSoft.tlb d. The Microsoft JDK 201. How are the fields that appear on a search dialog box determined? a. All fields on the search record that have the search key, alternate search key and the list box item checked on. b. All fields on the search record that have the search key or alternate search key. c. All fields on the search record that have the alternate search key. d. All fields on the search record that have the search key and the list box item checked on. 202. List out the actions that can be performed using a PeopleSoft Page that is not Effective-dated? a. Add & Update/Display Only. b. Add, Update/Display, Update/Display All & Correction only. c. Add, Update/Display All & Correction only. d. Update/Display, Update/Display All & Correction only. 203. Is Translate Table Effective Dated? a. No. b. If we include historical rows then it is Effective-dated. c. Yes d. None of the above. 204. When can more than one record be referenced under a scroll area? a. If you want to Add key values to a search record and if you specify Add Search Record option in Component properties. b. If the search record is a SQL view and built at the database level. c. If it is a related Display field it can be used from another record. d. If Level zero keys are available in the scroll area we can refer to more than one record in a scroll area. 205. What is the significance of Reasonable Date record field property? a. When the date entered is 45 days more than or 45 days less than the system date, a error is displayed. b. When the date entered is 30 days more than or 30 days less than the system date, a warning is displayed. c. It does the field validation using PeopleCode if date is not entered in the correct format. d. It correctly formats the date no matter in which format it was entered 206. What happens if you do not make a check box required? a. You will get warning message “Check Box is not marked as required” when you tab out of that field. b. You will be able to save the Page, but the Check Box will have the default value of “NO”. c. The property is automatically set when the Record Definition is Built. d. You will get an error message “Invalid On/Off Checkbox Value” when you save the Page. 207. What is the purpose of Inquiry Pages? a. To view the data and make changes if necessary in correction mode. b. To view the data without making any changes. c. To update and view the data using Update/Display mode. d. To be able to Add an Inquiry using Add action. 208. Name a few Predefined formats for Character Field Type? a. Uppercase, Mixedcase b. Name, Number and SSN c. Both (a) & (b) d. Uppercase, Mixedcase, Name & Number only.

209. What is the difference between the development view and upgrade view? Limit your answer to one sentence. 210. What PeopleCode events are invoked before a Page is displayed? a. RowSelect, FieldDefault, FieldFormula, and RowInit. b. RowSelect, FieldChange, FieldFormula, and RowInit. c. RowSelect, FieldDefault, FieldChange, and RowInit. d. RowSelect, FieldDefault, FieldFormula, and RowDelete. 211. What PeopleCode events are invoked when a Component is saved? a. Pre-popup, SavePreChg, Workflow, and SavePostChg. b. SaveEdit, SavePreChg, Workflow, and SavePostChg. c. SavePreChg, Workflow, Activate and SavePostChg. d. SaveEdit, SavePostChg, Activate and Workflow 212. What major difference is there between derived/work fields and other fields on panel definitions? a. Derived/Work fields can be only on occurs level 0 and need to come from the primary record definition for the level. b. Derived/Work fields can be only on occurs level 3 and do not need to come from the primary record definition for the level. c. Derived/Work fields can be on any occurs level and need to come from the primary record definition for the level. d. Derived/Work fields can be on any occurs level and do not need to come from the primary record definition for the level. 213. In which sections , the Begin-Select paragraph is allowed. a. Begin-Program b. Begin-Procedure c. Both (a) & (b) d. None of the above 214. What will be the output in #loc? LET $code = ‘abcdefgh’ find ’cde’ in $code 0 #loc a. 2 b. 1 c. 4 d. 3

215. In which section can you create an array? a. You can use it in Begin-SETUP and End-SETUP. b. You can use it in Begin-PROCEDURE and End-PROCEDURE. c. You can use it in Begin-Program and End-Program. d. All of the above. 216. For downloading patches and fixes , you have gone to the customer connection and looking under 8 april, 2000 and see Report IDS like R-CCHEN-VP14JM. What does R stand for? a. Tools b. Released c. Required d. Application e. Resolved 217. After logging into customer connection, you wish to search for fixes/patches. What are the search criteria available ? (choose 3) a. Report ID b. Date / time c. Platform d. Release e. Developer ID 218. Which one of the following is a trasaction control statement ..

a. insert b. delete c. create d. Commit 219. Identify the below script? (d) 1. (e) (f) 1. (g) a. HTML b. Java Script c. Java d. People code e. XML 220. Client has a batch process that was running for one hour. Now it is taking four hours to execute the same process without a considerable change in data. What would you suggest to rectify this problem? a. Delete client cache - Correct b. Restart the Process scheduler server c. Tune Database d. Re write the program 221. Which one is not part of PIA a. Web Server b. Web Browser c. Windows Client d. App Server e. Batch Server 222. Where is the default system style sheet defined for the entire system? a. Web Server b. App Server c. Configuration Manager d. File Server 223. When a SQL table is dropped or recreated in RDBMS, which of the below are restored by People Soft? a. Only the Views b. Only the tables indexes c. Only the grants d. Views & Indexes 224. How many settings can be done for a check box that appears in a search dialog box? a. One - Correct b. Two c. Three d. None of the above 225. What does a system catalog table store? a. Application Data b. Record definitions c. Database related information d. Objects information 226. Which of the following became obsolete with PS Ver8 ? a. User Profiles b. Permission Lists

c. Roles d. Operator Class

227. Which of the following menu options allows you to modify the Last Process Instance Number used within the system? a. Process Scheduler, Use, Job Definitions b. Process Scheduler, Use, Process Servers c. Process Scheduler, Use, Process System d. Process Scheduler, Use, Administration e. Process Scheduler, Use, Process Definitions f. None of the above 228. You just finished customization work that involved the creation of many new objects. You must now migrate these objects from your development database (source) to a testing database (target) to conduct more elaborate testing. Referring to the above information, why would adding your objects to a Project streamline the migration to a new database? a. Projects do not copy the actual objects, but only the Project Definition. You should still migrate the objects individually. b. Projects automatically overwrite the same objects in the target database and, thus, reduce the need for consistency checks. c. Migrating projects automatically produces a comparison report of the objects in the Project and those same objects in the target database. d. Projects enable migration of individual objects only which ensures you do not overwrite objects in the target database unknowingly. e. Projects provide the ability to migrate all objects at once or each object type individually.

229. PeopleSoft has its own naming convention for system and non-system (application) tables. In the list below, RECORDNAME refers to the name of any table or record. Referring to the above information, which one of the following identifies the naming convention PeopleSoft uses for system tables? a. PS_RECORDNAME b. SYSRECORDNAME c. PS$RECORDNAME d. PSRECORDNAME e. SYS_PSRECORDNAME 230. Your company obtained the newest Application Release of PeopleSoft, and you need to prepare for the upgrade. Upon reading the new Release Notes, you notice that changes were made to two COBOL modules (batch programs). 231. You need to decide how to compare the current versions of these COBOL programs with the versions delivered with the new PeopleSoft application release. Which would be the fastest method of comparing these different versions? a. Find Object References. b. Application Designer, Compare Batch Programs.c. Application Designer, Upgrade View.d. Use nonPeopleSoft comparison tools.e. Application Designer, Tools, Upgrade, Compare & Report.Ans.25. Which one of the following tree types is NOT supported in the PeopleSoft tree manager?a. Node-Oriented trees b. Query trees c. Detail trees d. Summary trees e. Combination treesf. None of the aboveg. All of the above Ans. e

232. Why would the File, New and File, Delete menu items be disabled in the security administrator interface? a. You have not been granted access to the menu items within security administrator. b. You have not been granted access to department security. c. You have not been granted object security access. d. You do not have access to the tree manager. e. You have not been granted access for creating and deleting operator and class definitions. 233. In SQL query, how do you use dynamic where clause? a. You should enclose it in forward slashes. Like /$dynamic_query/ b. You should enclose it in backward slashes. Like \dynamic_queryc. You should enclose it in square brackets. Like [$dynamic_query] d. None of the above

234. Where can you use the other SQL DDL statements like Create, Drop, Alter , Grant, Revoke? a. You can use it in Begin-SELECT and End-SELECT paragraph. b. You can use it in Begin-SQL and End-Sql paragraph. c. You can use it in Begin-Program and End-Program paragraph. d. You can use it in Begin-SQC End-SQC paragraph. PS Interview Questions 1) What is the difference between Access ID, Connect ID and Operator ID in PeopleSoft? 2) What is the advantage of writing the peoplecode at component record level? 3) When should a sub-page be used? How is it different from a page? 4) What is 'Change Control Locking'? How is it accomplished in PeopleSoft? 5) How can you set dependency between the process that are running in the process scheduler? 6) What is the difference between SQLEXEC and CreateSQL? 7) What is the advantage of writing peoplecode inside an application class? 8) What is a Rowset Cache class? 9) What are the different ways to send email from PeopleSoft? 10) What are the objects that 'people' user will access? How does an authentication take place in PeopleSoft GUI? Objective PeopleSoft HRMS / HCM Interview Multiple Choice Questions and Answers.The answers of the MCQs are highlighted with a (*) You are setting up a new medical plan that requires employee deductions from pay. Where do you set up the sequencing of the deductions so that this deduction is taken before all others? A.Medical Plan Table B.Benefit Plan Table C.Deduction Table (*) D.Calculation Rules Table E.Benefit Program Table Which statement is true about an Effective-dated row? A.It can be modified only using Correct History. B.It copies all data to the new inserted row, including the effective date. C.It copies all data to the new inserted row, except the effective date. (*) An existing row can be modified using Update/Display if the effective date is equal to system date.Despite advice from various consulting firms, a local company wants to pay its employees 13 times a year. They currently pay their employees monthly. What can the company do to pay its employees 13 times a year? A.set up a pay frequency with an annualization factor of 12 and a pay frequency with an annualization of 1 and combine them in Payroll B.set up a pay frequency with an annualization factor of 13 (*) C.It is not possible to set up a pay frequency greater than 12. D.run the last payroll of the year twice E.set up the annualization frequency with a pay factor of 13 Which components of Multiple Components of Pay comprise the Comprate field on the Job record? A.Shift components, Supplemental Pay components, and components with the Base Pay checkbox selected B.U.S. Dollar Base components only C.components with the Base Pay checkbox selected (*) D.components with the Base Pay checkbox selected and the Shift checkbox selected

E.all components You have just added a new department to the Department Table. It is active and its effective date is less than today's date. When you try to transfer an employee to that department on an inserted row with today's date, the new department is NOT showing up. How can you resolve this issue? A.add the department to the active Department Security Tree (*) B.run the Update Department Security Tree Processed C.change the effective date of the record to match the effective date of the new department D.manually type in the department in the Department field and select Save from the icon menu E.run the Refresh Employees Table Process Which table is NOT set up within the Workforce Administration module? A.Competency Table (*) B.Volunteer Organizations Table C.Action/Reason Table D.Visa Permit Table E.Title Table Many businesses are moving valuable, high-profile employees with sought-after skills across borders to where they are needed most. What is the official name for these employees? A.foreign assignees B.foreign country nationals C.expatriates (*) D.remote workers E.multinational employees F.global workers Which delivered table is a consolidation of employee information from different transaction tables? A.Person Table B.Employment Table C.Consolidated Employee List Table D.Employees Table (*) E.Job Table In the PeopleSoft 8.8 Internet Architecture, what is the static information at the top of the page called? A.Favorites B.Breadcrumbs C.Universal Navigation Header (*) D.Menu Bar E.Components Which three HCM product modules are included in the PeopleSoft HRMS Release Notes? (Choose three.) A.HRMS Portal Pack (*) B.Resource Management C.Global Payroll (*) D.Recruiting and Admissions E.Human Resources (*) Operator A has only update/display access to the Job Data component. Operator A needs to correct the Job Code on EMPLID 10500 job row dated March 12, 2002. Operator A asks the supervisor why he is NOT allowed to make this change. Why can't Operator A perform this correction? A.The supervisor needs to add Operator A to a different permission list. B.The effective sequence on the row is equal to one. C.The row with effective date March 12, 2002 is the current row for EMPLID 10500 (*) D.Operator A can correct history only Your client is upgrading from HRMS 7.5 to HRMS 8.8 and is not happy about the removal of the Personal_Data Table. They want to retain this table for use and remove it when they upgrade to HRMS Release 9. What is PeopleSoft's recommended approach? A.engage PGS to customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table B.customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table C.have the client apply the PERSONAL_DATA_RECALL project (*)

D.stay on HRMS 7.5 until HRMS 9 is released Which common reporting table is used by many PeopleSoft delivered reports, such as PER002-Employee Birthdays and PER005-Employees on Leave of Absence? A.Pers Data Effdt Table B.Employees Table (*) C.Employment Table D.Personal Data Table What are three security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft? (Choose three.) A.Fast Security 3 (*) B.Location Security C.Department Security (*) D.Company Security E.Fast Security 2 (*) Which five tables store the data from the hire process? (Choose five.) A.Name (*) B.Department C.Business Unit D.Employment (*) E.Benefits Program Participation (*) F.Competencies F.Job (*) G.Person (*) Operator A has only update/display access to the Job Data component. Operator A needs to correct the Job Code on EMPLID 10500 job row dated March 12, 2002. Operator A asks the supervisor why he is NOT allowed to make this change. Why can't Operator A perform this correction? A.The supervisor needs to add Operator A to a different permission list. B.The effective sequence on the row is equal to one. C.The row with effective date March 12, 2002 is the current row for EMPLID 10500 (*) D.Operator A can correct history only Your client is upgrading from HRMS 7.5 to HRMS 8.8 and is not happy about the removal of the Personal_Data Table. They want to retain this table for use and remove it when they upgrade to HRMS Release 9. What is PeopleSoft's recommended approach? A.engage PGS to customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table B.customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table C.have the client apply the PERSONAL_DATA_RECALL project (*) D.stay on HRMS 7.5 until HRMS 9 is released What isEffective Date? Information Component /Record linked to the data EFFDT. Information changes based on the EFFDT. What is Effective Sequence? Identifier to find the order of multiple transactions occurring on a same EFFDT. What is the effective sequence’s default number? 0 What’s the difference between a position number and a job code? Position number is the unique identification number for driven by business unit , department ,location , job code and other parameters What is the purpose of update/display mode? To add the new information current and future as well view the current data. What is the purpose of correct history mode? To correct the past and current information based on the EFFDT. What is the purpose of include history mode? To view the past information based on the EFFDT.

What is Employee Record Number? Number to identify an employee’s different organizational relationships. What are all the mandatory fields need to key in while add a person on the system? 1) Name 2) Organizational relationship National ID , Address, Birthdate gives us warning message. What is employment instance? Employee relationship with organization. Where employee can have multiple relationship (instances) with the organization. What is the difference between Set Id and a Business Unit? Where a Business Unit organizes your company or your organization, SetIDs help you organize your data within the system. The HRMS system uses tables (Control Tables or Prompt Tables) that use a high-level key that enables you to identify and retrieve data from the system. A secondary high-level key,referred to as a SetID, has also been added on various tables. SetIDs are simply the labels used to identify a TableSet. Business Unit and SetID functionality in PeopleSoft also provides you with a higher business level for reporting purposes and other business data roll-up. What is HCCPALL? Delivered primary permission list with access to all the components and pages What is HCDPALL? Delivered row level security permission list with full access. What is the default tree name need to give while creating the new tree? Dept_Security followed by any name as per your requirement. What would be the default effective date for creating the new tree? 1/1/1900 or 1/1/1901 What are all the tree manager definitions? • Level • Node • Parent • Sibiling • Child What are all the various types of SJT? • SJT_CLASS • SJT_CLASS_ALL • SJT_PERSON • SJT_DEPARTMENT What are all the organisational instance components? • Add Employment Instance (Job_Data_Emp) • Add Contingent Worker Instance (Job_Data_CWR) • Add Person of Interest Job (Jon_Data_POI) What are all the job instances used for POIs? • COBRA qualified beneficiaries • Stock employees not administered in Human Resources • Global Payroll Employees • Pension Payees • Stock board members What are all the purpose of the Job Earnings Distribution Information Page? We can distribute the worker’s compensation on the basis of the following: • Department

• Job Code • Earnings Code • Business Unit • Shift • Position Number • General Ledger Pay type What are all the job level defaults? • Work • Job Information • Job Labor • Payroll • Salary Plan • Compensation • Employment Information • Benefit Program Participation • Earnings Distribution What are all the main components for setting the hire template? • Template Record/Field • Template Section • Template Category Table • Template Creation What are all the statuses used to define templates? • Test (Default Value) • Active • Inactive What are all the statuses available on the template hire status page? • Pending Hires • Cancelled Hires • Processed Hires What are the methods available to update worker’s compensation packages? • Seniority Pay increases • Grade Advance increases • Automated step increases • Step increases using review bands • Amount increases • Percentage increases what are all the components available under Setup HRMS? • Install • Security • Upgrade • Foundation Tables • Common Definitions • Product Related • System Administration Which pay component comprises the Compensation Rate on the Job Table? A. Annual Benefits Base Rate B. Non-Base Pay C. Rate Code Group D. Non-Base Supplemental Pay E. Base Pay (*) Where do you define user related defaults? A.Department Security Tree B.Org Defaults By Permissions Table (*) C.Row Security Table

D.Roles Table Business Unit Options Defaults Table You have been asked to set up the Job Code Table. Which two foundation tables should you set up initially? (Choose two.) A.Pay Group Table B.SetID Table (*) C.Salary Plan Table (*) D.Career Plan Table E.Job Description Table An employee has been promoted and you are adding the new Job row to his record. When you try to enter the Job Code, it does not show up in the prompt table search results. What are three possible causes of this problem? (Choose three.) A.The effective date on the Job Code is greater than the effective date on the Job row. (*) B.The Job Code has no salary plan or grade associated with it. C.Your security does not include access to the Job Code's SetID. (*) D.The SetID of the Job Code is different from the SetID assigned to the employee's Business Unit on the TableSet Control Table (*) Which PeopleSoft-delivered benefit plan types are assigned to 30 through 39? A.life insurance plans B.health plans C.disability plans (*) D.pension plans E.leave plans Which PeopleSoft-delivered benefit plan types are assigned to 20 through 29? A .life insurance plans (*) B. health plans C. disability plans D. leave plans E. pension plans The dependent age limit is 19 for all benefits. Which table should you use to exclude disabled dependents from the age limit? A. Benefit Program Table (*) B. Calculation Rules Table C. Dependent/Beneficiary Table D. Benefit Plan Table What three elements of a benefit deduction are specified on either the benefit plan or plan specific tables? (Choose three) A .a calculation routine for the deduction (*) B. vendor information for payment of the deduction C. the deduction code (*) D. the priority of the deduction E. how to handle arrears for the deduction You are going to set up a long term disability plan. Which plan type group should you use? A.5X B.9X C.LTD D.3X (*) A company has a maximum coverage of $1,000,000 over all life insurance plans. The maximum coverage for each plan is: Life - $600,000 Supplemental Life - $300,000 AD/D - $300,000 If an employee selects the maximum coverages for each life insurance plan, what will be the saved coverages for each plan type? A.Life - $600,000; Supplemental Life - $300,000; AD/D - $300,000 B.Life - $600,000; Supplemental Life - $300,000; AD/D - $100,000 (*) C.Life - $333,333; Supplemental Life - $333,333; AD/D - $333,333 D.Life - $400,000; Supplemental Life - $300,000; AD/D - $300,000 E.Life - $600,000; Supplemental Life - $100,000; AD/D - $300,000

The PeopleSoft system is configured to allow partial deductions and deduction arrears. An employee has net pay of $300 and deductions totaling $500. Which partial deduction is taken? A.$400 B.$0 C.$300 (*) D.$200 E.$500 On which benefits setup table do you associate health plans and providers? A. Benefit Plan Table (*) B. Deduction Table C. Health Plan Table D. Benefit Program Table E. Provider/Vendor Table What are all the components will have data permission security control access? • Departments • Employee, Contingent Worker, and POI with Jobs. • POI without jobs. • Recruiting Federal People with jobs. • Template based hires. What are all the organisational relationships available while hiring an employee? • Employee • Contingent Worker • Person of Interest (POI) List down the people part of the POI? • COBRA Participants • Pension Payees • Global Payroll Payees • Stock non-HR Person • Stock board members • External Instructor • Payroll Employees • External Trainers what are all the People Tools Security? • Permission List • Roles • User Profiles what are all the default programs you need to run after the creating the user profile? • Refresh SJT CLASS ALL • Refresh Trans. SJT tables • Refresh SJT OPR CLS What are all the default Permission List used while creating the User ID? • Navigator Homepage Permission List • Process Profile Permission List • Primary Permission List What are all the methods for assigning Data Permission Access to Permission List? • Tree based data permission security • Role based data permission security What are all the Access types for Department security sets? • Departments by Tree • Departments by non – tree • Departments by set id

What are all the Access types for People with jobs security sets? • Job department tree • Job location • Jon business unit • Job Company • Job regulatory region • Job salary grade • Person organisation • Department ID – non tree • Company – Pay group What are all the Access types for People without jobs security sets? • POI Business Unit • POI Location • POI Institution • Person of Interest what are all the Access types for Recruiting Job Opening security sets? • RS Company • RS Business Unit • RS Department ID • RS Location • Recruiting Team What are all the Access types for Template Based Hire security sets? • Template ID • Template Category • Person Organisation • Country How many types of payrolls are there? How do you declare bonus of an employee in PeopleSoft HRMS Payroll? What is the most important Record in PS HRMS A Customer wants to use a new Image in HRMS, where it is stored? what are the important tables in PeopleSoft HRMS What is the purpose of update/display mode? What is difference between Person ID and Employee ID? What are four security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft What are all the two statuses will be available on the top of the job data? What are all the different types of action/reasons available on the system? Which table has SetID as a high-level key? Where do you define user related defaults? What are three security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft? What is the default tree name need to give while creating the new tree? Which deduction classification is used to set up a savings plan employer before-tax match? Which table is considered an Implementation Processing Rules and Default Table? What do you mean by budget and incumbents? What is Effective Sequence? What is the difference between Set Id and a Business Unit? How should you inactivate an Effective-dated row in a foundation table? You are going to set up a long term disability plan. Which plan type group should you use? Which table is used to add additional plan types to the database? A.Benefit Program Table B.Benefit Plan Table C.Plan Specific Table D.Translate Table (*) E.Plan Type Table When building a Benefit Program, which four fields are in the Option section? (Choose four.) A.Option Type (*)

B.Benefit Plan (*) C.Self-Service Configuration D.Deduction Code (*) E.Calc Table ID F.Coverage Code (*) An employee has a current row with the action of Promotion with an effective date of June 6, 2002. The human resources administrator then receives a personnel change form that states the employee should have received a merit increase as of March 1, 2002. What action type does the administrator use to A. insert the Merit Increase row? B. Update/Display All C. Correct History (*) D. Update/Display E. Add F. Include History Which table has SetID as a high-level key? A. Comp Rate Code Table B. Job Profile Table C. Company Table D. Job Code Table (*) Which table is considered an Implementation Processing Rules and Default Table? A. Establishment Table B. Business Unit Table C. Set ID Table D. TableSet Control Table E. Installation Table (*) How can the Location Table impact an employee's compensation? A. Salary grades are defaulted from the Location Table B. Salary plans are defaulted from the Location Table. (*) C. Compensation is not affected by the Location Table. D. Comp rate codes are set up on the Location Table. You have been asked to participate in a fit/gap analysis for the Payroll module. You have never participated in a fit/gap before. Which three questions are part of a fit/gap analysis for Payroll? (Choose three.) A.What are the names and addresses of the company's benefit providers? B.Does the company currently offer savings plans? (*) C.How do you collect time information for your employees? (*) D.How many Job Codes does your company currently have? E.How many earnings types does your organization have? (*) A data entry clerk is processing a new hire. He is about to enter data into the Supervisor ID field and finds it has already been populated. On which table was this default set? A.Department Table (*) B.Location Table C.Paygroup Table D.Org Defaults by Permission List Table E.Job Code Table A company has a maximum coverage of $1,000,000 over all life insurance plans. The maximum coverages for the company are: Life - $500,000 Supplemental Life - $400,000 AD/D - $300,000 If an employee selects the maximum coverages for each life insurance plan, what will be the saved coverages for each plan type? A.Life - $500,000; Supplemental Life - $400,000; AD/D - $300,000 B.Life - $500,000; Supplemental Life - $400,000; AD/D - $100,000 (*) C.Life - $333,333; Supplemental Life - $333,333; AD/D - $333,333 D.Life - $500,000; Supplemental Life - $200,000; AD/D - $300,000 E.Life - $300,000; Supplemental Life - $400,000; AD/D - $300,000 How should you inactivate an Effective-dated row in a foundation table?

A.using Add, insert a new row with an effective date greater than Current row B.using Correct History, change the status to Inactive C.insert a new row and change the effective status to Inactive (*) D.verify that there are no references to the value in any other tables, then delete the row E.change the values on all records that use this row, then delete it Which employees appear on the BEN733 - Base Benefits Audit Report? A.all employees not enrolled in a benefits program B.employees with dependents signed up for benefits C.employees younger than 16 years old (*) D.employees with spouses signed up for benefits E.employees with multiple job records What are four security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft? (Choose four.) A.Fast Security 4 B.Fast Security 3 (*) C.Location Security D.Fast Security 2 (*) E.Company Security F.Department Security (*) G.Fast Security 1 (*) For the action of Short Term Disability, what is the resulting employee status? A.Active B.Termination C.Leave of Absence (*) D.Leave with Pay E.Suspension When working on a conversion, what does PeopleSoft recommend you use as the initial effective dates on the Job Code Table? A.use 01/01/1900 use the date of your conversion B.accommodate your longest active tenured employee C.accommodate your longest tenured employee (*) You have just added a new department to the Department Table. It is active and its effective date is less than today's date. When you try to transfer an employee to that department on an inserted row with today's date, the new department is NOT showing up. How can you resolve this issue? A.run the Refresh Employees Table Process B.add the department to the active Department Security Tree (*) C.run the Update Department Security Tree Process D.manually type in the department in the Department field and select Save from the Icon menu E.Change the effective date of the record to match the effective date of the new department You are helping the Compensation department set up the Job Code Table. Which three tables are associated with the Job Code Table and therefore should be set up prior to setting up the Job Code Table? (Choose three.) A.Salary Plan Table (*) B.Job Function Table (*) C.Job Description Table D.SetID Table (*) E.Job Hazard Table A company wants you to set the dependent age limit to 19 for all benefits. Which table should you use? A.Benefit Plan Table B.Calculation Rules Table C.Dependent/Beneficiary Table D.Benefit Program Table (*) Which table has SetID as a high-level key? A.Business Unit Table B.Location Table (*) C.Job Profile Table

D.Comp Rate Code Table E.Company Table Which HRMS module does NOT use the Group Build functionality? A.Payroll (*) B.Training Administration C.Total Compensation Reporting D.Variable Compensation E.Salary Planning A customer asks you to set up a medical plan on the Benefit Plan Table. Which table must you set up first? A.Flat Rate Table B.Calculation Rules Table C.Health Plan Table D.Plan Specific Table E.Provider/Vendor Table (*) Which statement is true when processing benefits with multiple jobs? A.For each benefit record number, one job must be designated as the primary job. (*) B.Benefit deductions are taken from all paychecks associated with the same benefit record number C.Each benefit record number must be unique. D.Each job must be assigned a unique benefit record number. Your client has seasonal workers and wants to base the annual compensation rate on 125 work days per year. On which table do you define this requirement? A.Comp Rate Table B.Frequency Table (*) C.Job Code Table D.Installation Table E.Default Frequency Table A company has many employees who have two jobs. They want their employees to enroll in their benefits programs only once, instead of once per job. To accomplish this, they must use the same _____ for both jobs. A.Employee Record Number B.Benefits Program C.Pay Run ID D.Pay Group E.Benefits Record Number (*) Where do you enter default values that are specific to a PeopleSoft user? A.Business Unit Options Defaults B.Location Table C.Installation Table D.Org Defaults by Permission List (*) E.User Profiles Component A customer wants to set up a vacation plan and have the ability to track the vacation balances. Which three tables must be set up before you can track the vacation balances? (Choose three.) A.Calculation Rules Table B.Provider/Vendor Table (*) C.Earnings Table (*) D.Deduction Table E.Benefit Program Table (*) On the Job Earnings Distribution Page, what are three ways you can distribute the employee's compensation? (Choose three.) A. to a different Company B. to a different Department (*) C. to a different Job Codes and/or Position (*) D. to a different Pay Group E. to a different General Ledger Type (*)

Which deduction classification is used to set up a savings plan employer before-tax match? A. Before-Tax B. Nontaxable Before-Tax Benefit (*) C. Nontaxable Benefit D. After-Tax E. Taxable Benefit

PeopleSoft Interview Questions and Answers– Application Engine 1) There are different types of variables in the Application Engine people code? Local variable – these are available for the duration of the program in which they are declared. Global / Component – These variables are available while the Application Engine program is running. They are saved at commits and checkpoints, So they can be used for restarts. Component variables are same as Global incase of the AE. 2) What are the Different ways pass data between the steps? 1) State records – One row can be passed and can have many state records. 2) Component/Global People code variables 3) Temporary records – Multiple rows of data can be passed. 3) What is Prerequisite for the State record? 1) Should be either Derived work record Or SQL Table. 2) Name of the record must end in AET; this is how the system identifies the record as a state record. 3) PROCESS_INSTANCE must be a key. 4) Any data types except character or numeric must not be required fields. Note: - No People code fires on an Application Engine state record. No Validation of translate values or Prompt tables are done. 4) How to read the runctrl parameters in AE 1) SQL: - %Select (EMPLID) Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL where PROCESS_INSTANCE = %PROCESS_INSTANCE and ORPID = %oprid 2) People code: - &SQL = “Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL Where PROCESS_INSTACNE =” PS_TEST_AET.PROCESS_INSTANCE “and OPRID =” %oprid. %PROCESS_INSTANCE or %Bind (PROCESS_INSTANCE) can be used. %PROCESS_INSTANCE is more efficient and faster. 5) How do you execute Application Engine through Push Button? 1) CreateProcessRequest (), Schedule () 2) CallAppEngine. 6) What is the syntax for CallAppEngine? CallAppEngine (applid [, state record]); 7) What are the 3 trace parameters you can pass to your psae.exe? - TRACE - TOOLSTRACESQL - TOOLSTRACEPC 8) Which Trace option is the best place to start for general performance information? - TRACE 384 – mostly used trace value. 9) What is the difference between a Trace value and Trace parameters? A Trace parameter determines which type of trace is turned on. A Trace parameter determines what type of data is recorded in your trace files (s). 10) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 11) What are the Different types of Application Engine? Standard: Standard entry-point program. Upgrade Only: Used by PeopleSoft Upgrade utilities only. Import Only: Used by PeopleSoft Import utilities only

Daemon Only: Use for daemon type programs. Transform Only: Support for XSLT Transform programs. 12) How do you program AE program for the restarts? Program Level State Record One of the state record needs to SQL Table, Since All Derived work record will be re-initializing on commit. Program Properties On the Advanced tab in the program properties dialog box, make sure that disable restart is not checked. Configuration manager In the configuration manager, sure that Disable restart is not selected on the process scheduler tab. Section Level Section type The option for section type are prepare only and critical updates If the section is preparing data i.e. select data, Populating temporary tables, or updating temporary tables then the section should be prepare only. If the section is updating the permanent application tables in the database, you should select critical update. Step Level Add an order by clause %Select Field Select Field1 from PS_SOME_RECORD Where FIELD1 > %Bind (FIELD1) Order by FIELD1. Add a switch to the selected table Delete processed rows. The only restriction for batch runs occurs when you have restart enabled, and you are inside a Do Select that is of the Select/Fetch type (instead of "Re-select" or "Restartable"). with select/Fetch, all commits inside the loop are ignored, including the commit frequency if it's set. 13) What is Set Processing? Set Processing uses SQL to process groups, or sets, of rows at one time rather than processing each row individually. With row by row processing you following a repetitive loop that selects a row, determines if it meets a given criteria, if so, apply rule x to row Update row, commit. With set processing, you only select those rows that meet the filtering criteria and then run the rule once again all the affected rows. 14) Advantages of Set Processing? Improved Performance: - Our internal testing has revealed that, in an overwhelming majority of cases, set processing performs significantly better than it is -by-row counterpart for “reasonable” batch processing volumes. Minimized SQL Overhead: - It tends to use fewer Application Engine SQL statements that each processed more data than the statements executed in row-by-row processing. Easy Maintenance: - if need to make a fix or add an enhancement to SQL, it’s just a matter of modifying the SQL or inserting the new “Chunk”. Leveraging the RDBMS: - With Set – based processing, you take advantage of the SQL processing engine on the database rather than placing the processing burden and overhead on the application executable. 15) Testing and debugging application engine? Application Engine Trace file-You can track the step execution of your application execution. Application Engine Interactive Debugger – First click on the trace tab and turn off the statement timings. Select Profile -> Edit Profile-> Process Scheduler Tab -> Application section Select Debug check box. (You can dynamically modify the state record run application engine step by step People Code Debugger for the Application Engine.) AE Trace files: - AE__.AET Without the process instance: - AE__.AET 1) Order and flow of action types 1) Do When 2) Do While 3) Do Select 4) Peoplecode 5) SQL 6) Call Section 7) Message Log 8) XSLT

9) Do until 2) What is Prerequisite for the Temporary record? 1) Should have process Instance as key 2) Name should end with _TAO 3) Different types of Temporary tables - Dedicated - Un Dedicated (Shared) 4) Why Parallel Processing required? Potential performance improvements by splitting the data to be processed into groups and simultaneously running multiple instance of your program to deal with different groups of data. If you have a one program that uses a temporary table and is invoked multiple times, that single temporary table could be used concurrently in multiple executions of the code. This could create unpredictable results since the different instances of the code would be issuing delete, Inserts and/or updates unsynchronized with each other. You could solve the problem by creating multiple temporary tables as a pool of tables. Each invocation of your program would have to allocate an unused temporary table, mark it as ‘in use’ , use it and release it back to the pool when you through with it (for each Application Engine program you write). 5) How running AE program as Batch differs from running it online? Application Engine programs are designed for two types of execution and each has its own pool of Temporary Tables Online: Invoked by CallAppEngine from People code Run quickly, synchronously, and at random times. Potential for simultaneous executions Uses the online Temporary Table pool. Not restart able. Psae.exe randomly assigns an instance number from the number range on your online temp tables. If the instance number is in use psae.exe puts the program in Queue until the assigned instance becomes free. Unlock on completion, on Crash free from Manage Abends. Batch: Invoked through the Process Scheduler. Run for longer amounts of time, asynchronously, and at scheduled times. Can be designed for parallel execution for performance. Uses the Batch/Dedicated Temporary table. Restart able. It allocates instance number based on the availability on a record by record basis and psae.exe begins with the lowest instance numbers.If the properties are set continue - Base table is used with Process instance as key. If Re-starable – Locked across Restarts until completes successfully. If not Re-startable on Program completion. 6) What are the important steps for implementing the parallel processing? Define you Temporary Tables. Set the Temporary Tables Online pool. Assign Temporary Tables to your Application Engine program in it program. Set Temporary Table Batch Pool – Instance count in the AE. Build / Rebuild your Temporary Table record. Code %Table Meta – SQL as reference to Temporary Tables in your Application Engine program, so that Application Engine can table references to the assigned Temporary Table instance dynamically at runtime. 7) What happens when all the instance of the temporary table are in use? It behavior can control by AE developer. If the runtime options are set to continue “People Tools will insert rows into the base table using the PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key”. If temp table doesn’t contain PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key field in a Temporary table, you should change the Temp table runtime options to “Abort” in the appropriate Application Engine programs. 8) How can you divide the data to be processed by different instance of the program to perform parallel program? Run control parameters passed to each instance of the AE program enable it to identify which input rows “belong” to it, and each program instance inserts the rows from the source table into its assigned temporary table instance using %Table. 9) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe?

Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 10) What is the main purpose of the Access property in the Section? Basically they have two options, public and private if section declared as public then it be access from other program. Private we cannot call from other program. 11) Which actions are mutually exclusive and why they are mutually exclusive? Sql and callsection. 12) Error handling or Exception handling in Application Engine ? Step properties:On Error:Abort – Write message to message log and terminate. Ignore - Write message to message log and continue. uppress – No message will be written, but program will continue. People code Action: - On return options can used to handle run time errors. Abort: - Exits immediately – Not recommended. Break:- Exits the current step and section and control returns to the calling step. Skip Step:- The program exits the current step, and continues processing at the next step in the section. If this is the last step in the section, the calling step resumes control of the processing. SQL Action properties:No Rows:- When the Sql doesn’t return any rows, you can tell what application engine program should do. Abort: - Program terminates Section Break: - Application Engine exits the current section immediately, and control returns to the calling step. Continue: - The program continues processing Skip Step: - Application Engine exits the current step immediately and moves on to the next step. When using skip step keep the following in mind: 1) Application Engine ignores the commit for the current step at runtime 2) If the current step contains only one Action, only use skip step at by-pass the commit. 13) What are different types Do Select? 1) Select/Fetch 2) Reselect 3) Restart able Select/Fetch: Opens the cursor only at the first time and retrieve rows one at loop. Commits inside the step (commits in the Called Section) are ignored if AE is Restart enabled. Reselect: It opens the cursor and closes the cursor on each iteration of the loop. It will reselect the same row of data. Logic in Actions of the step should be such that it will be changing the status of the rows in the table the do select is selecting. Commits are not ignored and will be committed in a reselect loop when the restart is enabled. Restart able: - similar to select/Fetch but it WILL COMMIT inside the loop thus allowing the checkpoint to the PS_AERUNCONTROL table. 14)What is the maximum limitation on temporary tabel instances in AE. 99 15) what is the difference between the %SELECT and %SELECTINIT meta sql functions. Ans %select : if any values have not selected then previous value will be there %selectinit : if any values have not selected then previous value will reinitilate to null 16) what is the difference between exit(0),exit(1) when we are using this functions in AE Exit (1) causes immediate termination of a PeopleCode program. Use this parameter to rollback database changes. Exit (0) caused immediate termination of a Peoplecode Program but don’t make rollback in the database. Peoplesoft Interview Questions - Component Interface Builder

1) What are the main elements in the component Interface ? Main elements of component Interface • Component interface name • Keys • Properties and collections • Methods 2) Difference between Get keys, find keys and Create Keys ? Get keys: - These are mapped to the fields marked as scrh in the component’s search record. Automatically “Search key” fields in search record become Get keys. We cannot change it. Find keys: - These are mapped to fields marked as Alt or Srch in the component search record. You may remove Find keys that you do not wish to make available for searching. Create Keys: - It is generated from the key fields for the search record. If Add search record is present then its key fields are taken. We cannot change it. 3) How do you provide security for the component interface? • Open the Permission list • On the Component Interface tab • Add row and select the newly created Component Interface • Edit the permissions to give permission for the standard methods • Get, Create, Save, cancel, find. 4) What the steps that you need to do in people code to invoke Component Interface? • Establish a user section • Get the component interface definition • Populate the create keys • Create an instance of the component interface • Populate the required fields • Save the component Interface. &Session = GetSession(); &CI = &Session.GetcompIntfc(CompIntfc.INTERFACE_NAME) &CI.KEY_FILED_NAME = ‘NEW’ If not &CI.Create () Then Else Populate other fields End-if; Populate the other fields If not &CI.Save () Then Else End-if; 5) How do you test Component Interface? • Using the Component Interface tester • Give values in the tester for options • Get Existing, Create new, Find and perform the operation from the CI Tester 6) Catching error message in the component Interface? Or Use of PSMessages in the CI ? This function needs to be called when ever methods like Find, Save, Create methods return false. Error text and Error type can be printed in the log message for any other action in to the log messge. Function CheckErrorCodes() &PSMessages = &Session.PSMessages; &ErrorCount = &PSMessages.Count;

For &i = 1 To &ErrorCount &ErrorText = &PSMessages.Item(&i).Text; &ErrorType = &PSMessages.Item(&i).Type; End-For; End-Function; 7) What is method? What are the different types of method? Methods: - A method is an object that performs a very specific function on a component interface at run-time. Standard methods and user-defined methods. Standard methods: - Automatically generated upon the creation of a new component Interface in Application. Apart from the Standard methods there are Standard methods available for the use with any collection. User-Defined methods: - User-defined methods are those that you can create to meet the requirements of an individual component interface. 8) What are properties? The Fields in the level 0 in the component are the properties of the component. Standard properties User-Defined properties Createkeyinfocollection Developer can further control the exposed Getkeyinfocollection field properties. Findkeyinfocollection Property Info collection GetHistoryItems (Update/Display mode or Correction mode) EditHistory Items InteractiveMode. 9) Traversing the Collections in the Component Interface? COLL_JOB – Collection Coll_JOBItm – Row in the collection. &COLL_JOBCol = &CI_JOB_DATA.COLL_JOB; For &i = 1 to &COLL_JOBCol.Count &COLL_JOBItm = &COLL_JOBCol.Item (&i); &COLL_JOB_JRCol = &COLL_JOBItm.COLL_JOB_JR; For &J = 1 to &COLL_JOB_JRCol.Count &COLL_JOB_JRItm = &COLL_JOB_JRCol.Item (&j); &COLL_JOB_JRItm.KEYPROP_EFFDT =; 10) How do you login in correction mode in the Component Interface? Get History Items and Edit History items property to should be set to true. Get History Items alone: - Update display all - modes will be used. Peoplesoft Interview questions and answers- SQR 1. What are the sections and paragraphs available? There are five sections and three paragraphs available in SQR programming. The sections include a. Begin-setup End-setup. b. Begin-program End-program. c. Begin-procedure End-procedure. d. Begin-heading End-heading. e. Begin-footing End-footing And the paragraphs include Begin-select paragraph. Begin-SQL paragraph. Begin-document paragraph 2. Is it possible to increase the array size once defined? No, it is not possible to increase the Array size once defined 3. What is Load-lookup? Give the Syntax for Load-Lookup? The LOAD-LOOKUP command defines an array containing a set of keys and values and loads it into memory. With LOADLOOKUP, you can reduce the number of tables that are joined in one SELECT. Use this command in conjunction with one or more LOOKUP commands. Syntax: begin-setup

load-lookup name=prods table=products key=product_code return_value=description end-setup 4. Can you Call a SQR from another SQR? How? We can call one SQR program from another SQR program using Call.callsystem. But this is possible only in UNIX Operating system. 5. Briefly explain Most commonly used SQC’s in SQR programs? : Some of the most commonly used SQC’s are 1.STDAPI.sqc : This Is Process Scheduler Interface which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 2.SETENV.sqc : This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size,Date formats Etc…. 3.NUMBER.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format numbers. 4.DATETIME.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format dates and times. 6.RESET.sqc : This is an important Footing SQc. 6. What are the commands used in filehandling of sqr? Using File Handling we can Import. Steps are 1. Opening a File Using ‘OPEN FOR-READING’ command. 1. Reading Data From File Using ‘READ’ command. Writing Data into Table Using ‘BEGIN-SQL’ paragraph & ‘INSERT’ command 7. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes. The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 8. How can you Debug SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 2. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 9. What is the difference between sqr and sqc? SQR SQC 1.This is nothing but the Actual 1.This is like a function in SQR. Source program. 2.This consists of Program Section. 2.This does not consists of program Section. 3.This can be Compiled & Executed. 3.This cannot be Compiled and Executed. 4.We cannot call one SQR from 4.We can call one SQC from another SQC or another SQR or SQC. SQR program. 10. What are different types of variables in sqr? Types of variables in SQR are 1. Column Variables. 2. List Variables. 3. System Variables. 4. Document Variables. 5. Substitution Variables. User Defined Variables 11. Is there any read-only variable in sqr? Column Variables & System Variables are Read-Only Variables. 12. How to pass Inputs for sqr program while running from windows? Using ASK & INPUT Commands.

13. How to pass Inputs to the SQR while running through the Process Scheduler? Using Procedures & SQC’s to access data on Run Control Page (Run Control Fields). 14. What is the purpose of Stdapi.sqc This is a Process Scheduler Interface sqc which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 15. What is the SQT file? What are the advantages of SQT files? SQT’ file is nothing but resultant file after the compilation (i.e.) Runtime File. By using this SQT file for Execution we can increase the Performance of the program by reduciong the Compilation Time. 16. What is the SQC used to read data from translate table? ‘READXLAT.sqc’ is the SQC used to read data from Translate Table. 17. Which section is mandatory in an SQR program? ‘BEGIN-PROGRAM’ Section is Mandatory for an SQR program. 18. How will you display an image in SQR? Using ‘DECLARE-IMAGE , END-DECLARE’ command. 19. What is use of SETENV.SQC? This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size, Date formats Etc…. 20. How will you perform ERROR handling in SQR? We can do Error handling in SQR using some command line flags such as –O, -L,-ZMF,-XMB and using Error handling commands such as ON-ERROR = Skip/Warn/Stop (for Compile time errors) ON-ERROR = Procedure Name (for execution stage errors). 21. How many ways of performance tuning are there in SQR? 1. Using LOADF-LOOKUP & LOOKUP. 2. Using ARRAYS. 3. Using MULTIPE REPORTS. 4. Using SQT Files. 5. Using –Bnn Command line Flag. 6. Running on BATCH SERVER. 7. Using Proper Programming Logic in SQR such as Using BREAK statement in EVALUATE Command. 8. Proper SQL tuning such as using Sub queries instead of Joins. 22. Can you call procedure in oracle from Sqr? How? To call a database procedure using Begin-select paragraph, the syntax is as follows: Begin-select [(report arguments)] from Dual End-select To call from Begin-sql, the syntax will be Begin-SQL ;; End-SQL 23. Can you connect more than one database using one Sqr? How? Yes. 24. What are the differences between Load lookup and Array ARRAYS LOAD-LOOKUP 1. Arrays can be declared in any section. 1. Load-Lookup is declared in only in SETUP section only. 2. Number of rows are not automatically 2. Numbers of rows are automatically added. gives a error if the number of added. Exceeds the specified number. 3. We should insert data in to Array by 3. Rows are automatically inserted in to programming. Load-Lookup. 4.We can retrive any number of fields. 4.We can retrive only Two fields from

from a table. a table. 5.We have Length & Data type. 5.We don’t have Length & Data type. 6.We cannot directly print from Array. 6.We can directly print from Load-Lookup. 25. What are the steps required to run the SQR from peoplesoft environment? Three steps we have to fallow to run the SQR program from the peoplesoft environment (Process Scheduler). These steps include a. Making the SQR program API aware by calling two procedures (stdapi-init, stdapi-term) from the Begin-program section and including the Stdapi.sqc in the bottom of the program. b. Create new run control table or using existing run control table and creating run control page, component and register the component. Creating new run control SQC if we create a new run control table. c. Giving the permission to the user by giving process groups. 26. How to pass command line flags to a sqr report running through process scheduler? Using override options in the process definition in the Process Scheduler in the People Tools. 27. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes . The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 28 .How does peoplesoft Process monitor knows that the process (Say sqr report) is at what stage such as initiated, in process, completed etc From the Field Value of ‘RUNSTATUSDESCR’field from ‘PS_PMN_PRCSLIST’ table. 29. How can u Debugging SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 3. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 30. How to refer a global variable in local procedure? After special character (ex.#,&) we use underscore(_) after that variable name. 31. What is -Bnn flag? This is used to specify the number of rows that are to be taken from Dbase to the Buffer because default the system takes 10 rows at a time. 32. What is -Tnn flag? This is mainly used for testing purpose. We can restrict the system to generate only a specific number of pages instead of generating all pages for testing. This is used in Windows Environment. 33. What is -RS & -RT Flags? RS is used to generate SPF file ie; stopping the program after the comilation. _RT is used to run the SPF file .This is also one kind of Performance increasing technique by saving the compilation time. 34. What are the sections in Sqr? Which one is necessary? Setup, Heading, Footing, Program & Procedure Sections. Program section is the Mandatory section. 35. What is -debug command line flag? This is used for Debugging in SQR. 36. How to place an corporate logo in sqr? Using “Declare Image” command 37. what are the debugging commands in sqr? Show & Display are debugging commands 38. what is the difference between them? Show is used to display more than one variable at a time. Display is used to display only one variable at a time.

PeopleSoft SQR Interview Questions,SQR Interview Questions asked in MNCs given below What are the Important SQC are need to be attached?

How do you do Performance tuning of SQR? Did you worked with functions, procedures in SQR? Can we call two Procedures in On-Break? If yes Then How? How can you send emails using SQR What are the compulsory SQC's that should be used in SQR Program? How do you generate two output files from one SQR. What is hierarchy in Arrays in SQR? What is the difference in using inner join and outer joins? Did you worked with functions, procedures in SQR? Can we include SETENV.SQC at the end of the SQR program? If "NO" then why? How do you include SQCs in middle of the program? Is it possible ? We wish to print the EMPLID in the BARCODE Format. What are the commands we have to be used in SQR? What are the compulsary SQC's that should be used in SQR Program? What is Calculated,Dependent and Conditional Marter Inspection Characteristic? Explain Normalization in oracle? What is difference between Load Look up and Array What is search Record? What is the program flow of SQR? What are the validation is done in SQR program before loading in to the database? How to create SQC? How to connect other application in component interface? What is the main difference between SQR and APP ENGINE? How do you decide between appeng/Ci and SQR while conversion? What is Outer join, inner join in sql? Explain the difference between Translate & Prompt tables. What are the occasions when to use Translate values instead of Prompt table? What is the advantage of one over the other? What is the difference between BI,CI and IB? Tell me your experience with CI?

1. Advantages of People Code? 2. Why SQR is used and advantages of SQR? 3. How are you running your HRMS systems either by JOBCODE or by POSITION_NBR? 4. What is the challenging and complicated People code you have written? Why do you think it is complicated? 5. What is the challenging and complicated SQR you have written why do you think it is complicated? 6. Steps involved in Data Conversion? Extract data from the legacy system Reconcile the extracted data Identify the tables to be leaded with the new system Data Mapping Identify the tools (SQR or Import Manager or SQL Loader etc) Write programs to perform conversion Test the programs using test data Check the data outline Reconcile concerted data. 7. Why SQR is used? Data conversion Reports Interface programs. 8. SQR Runtime flags? 9. Import SQC files? 10. How do you link SQR reports to process scheduler? Create/modify/add run control table if you have any new fields Create/modify/add run control panel if you have any program inputs Create a menu definition (Note Menu group name: XYZ) Give operator security Create Process scheduler definition Use-Process definition – process definition add Give report name and report type Give menu group name (XYZ) 11. How do you create operator classes / users? 12. What are variable types in SQR? & Data base reference fields – Read only $ Character (Same for Date) # Numeric { } Variable in ASK or # define [$ variable] Dynamic variable referencing 13. How do you format in PRINT (9,X, B, etc)? 14. How many types of display views are there in Data Designer? 15. What is a record definition?

16. What are the types of record definitions? SQL Tables SQL views Dynamic views Derived / Work Records Sub Records Query views 17. What is an Application Processor? 18. Types of People code? Search Field Row Save Workflow 19. Field Edit Vs Field change? 20. Save edit Vs save pre change Vs save post change? 21. Scroll select Vs scroll select new? 22. SQL EXEC Vs Scroll select? 23. Scroll select Vs Row Scroll select? 24. Row scroll select Vs Row scroll select new? 25. Table loading Sequence (installation)? Company table Installation Location Department Salary Plan Salary step Job code Pay group Benefit Programs 26. What are FUNCLIB* records? 1. What is a set ID or Table set? It is going share common control table values. 2. What is an object group? Collection of one or more objects that form a logical group for security purpose. 3. What is business Process Map? It is an alternative method for accessing panels or it is a graphical representation of a map. 4. What is an activity? It is a collection of logical steps. It represents specific transaction a user might need to perform. 5. What is a business Process? It is a collection of activities and it represents broad area functionality, categorizing the several activities. 6.What is a Process? A task involved by the system.

7. What is a process instance? It is a process number used to request process. 8. What is a process server agent? It is going to initialize, select and parse the program. 9. What is a command line parameter? The executable (.EXE) file is nothing but command line parameter. E.g. C:/SQLbin\SQL.exe. 10. What is Parameter List? It defines under what database, platform will the program. (Nothing but the meta-strings) 11. What is Application Upgrade? It is a migration of object from one database to another and updating other system components such as application software. 12. What is Mass change and explain the uses of Mass change? Mass change is a SQL generator you can use to develop and perform custom applications. Using mass change, a developer can set up a series of INSERT, UPDATE, OR DELETE SQL statements that the end user can execute to perform business functions. The overall structure of Mass change is similar to that of People soft Query Except that Query retrieves data from the database while mass change actually updates the database. The uses of Mass change are as follows. 1. It is used to perform high volume set oriented transactions. 2. Copy data from table or table 3. Archive table data (Archive means that the data does not have backup file and uses to update the values) 13. Why use Mass change and why not SQL execute to update a record, which is not attached to the panel? The reason why Mass change is preferred over SQL exec is…. 1. Two- Three Mass change program can work at a single time. 2. Data / information need not be defined in Mass change 3. Mass change can be used for file download upload. 14. What are the steps involved in Mass change? The following are the order of steps involved in Mass change. `1. Define type 2. Assign to template 3. Operator security 4.Mass change definition 15. What is Mass change group? Adding all Mass change into a group. (i.e., Multiple Mass change definitions can be executed simultaneously). 16. What is workflow? To an extent all the business processes defined using the Application designer involve workflow. However we usually reserve the term to refer to processes that involve multiple users and the routing of data between the users. People soft workflow tools help you build the routings into your computer systems. You use them to tie together the individual steps so that the system can help coordinate the activities. 17. How Workflow is controlled? It is controlled by Decision Point (it is graphically denoted by a (?)). Where user has to choose which activity is appropriate towards the next step. 18. What are the key fields used in Key list? 7 key fields used in a key list. They are as follows.. 1. Busprocname- (Business Process Name) 2. Activity name 3. Event name 4. Work list name 5. Instance Id 6. Transaction Id 7. Emplid

Note: While defining the above fields in the record definition, a key has to be assigned in the record field properties. 19. What is routing in workflow? Transfer of roles / users 20. Why workflow is used and explains the advantage of workflow in People soft application? Workflow typically eliminates the job tasks associated with controlling paper flow, and frees people the once performed clerical functions to do more meaningful work. • Tasks that don’t require user involvement • Tasks that involve non People soft users • Tasks that several users work on together. 21. Define the components of workflow? There are 3 underlying components of workflow i.e., Rules, Roles, Routing. Rules Rules are your company’s business practices captured in software. Rules determine what activities are required to process your business data. The rules are contained in policies and procedures documents. Roles Roles describe how people fit into the workflow. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as clerks or managers. Your business rules typically specify what user role needs to do an activity. Roles direct the work to types of people rather than to individuals. Identifying roes instead of individual users makes your workflow more flexible and easier to maintain. Roles remain stable even as people change jobs. Routings Routings connect the activities in the workflow. They are the systems means of moving information from one place to another, from one step to the next. Routings bring the flow into workflow. The network of routings creates a business process from what used to be isolated activities. Routings make it possible to deploy applications throughout the enterprise. They work through the levels and departments of an enterprise to bring together the role that are necessary to complete complex tasks.

1. Explain about the work you have one on People soft? 2. How do you use select data in People code (A) Fetch value (Record, recordname, field name, taeget_row ) OR Fetch value (record, record name, field name, current row number (123)? 3. What is a scroll select? 4. Limitations of SQLEXEC? 5. Work record Vs Derived Record? 6. What is the complicated code you have written in People code and why do you think it is complicated? 7. What is the complicated code you have written in SQR and why do you think it is complicated? 8. How do you Debug (Application Reviewer)? 9. Levels in Panel Designer? 10. How do you link crystal reports? 11. Ordinary record Vs Work record? 12. What is a record in PS? 13. Record Vs Table? 14. How many types of records are there in PS? 15. PS database management?

16. Arrays in SQR? 17. How do you arrange fields in SCROLL area? 18. How do you sort the data in SQR in being select (Using ORDER BY clause)? 19. Where do you write People code? 20. How do you modify table/record? 21. Limitations of Scroll select? 22. Nested select in SQR? 23. Inner join / outer join? 24. Show / display in sqr? 25. Ask / Input in sqr? 26. How do you audit in PS (In Menu designer)? 27. How do you rename panel / field / record and what are the consequences / effects? 28. What is ENCODE in oracle? 29. Explain about Operator and Object security and differentiate operator security is at min level Object security for object level? 30. Add / Update display / Update display all / correction with respect to EFFDT? 31. EFFDT Vs EFFSEQ? 32. Translate table Vs Prompt table? 33. Your strong and weak points? 34. What is your role in the project? 35. What are the modifications or customizations you have done in PS? 36. Project team size and your role? 37. What are the modifications or customizations you have done in existing SQR? 38. Batch process in HRMS? 39. Audit tables? 40. Import manager Vs SQR? 41. What are the important tables that you use in Personal Administration? 42. What are the important tables that you use in Benefits? 43. What are the important tables that you use in Pay roll? 44. Explain about your experience? 45. What are new developments you have done in PS?

46. What are the new reports you developed in SQR (Interface, Conversion, Formatted)? 47. Advantages of People Tools? 48. Advantages of People Code? 49. Why SQR is used and advantages of SQR? 50. How are you running your HRMS systems either by JOBCODE or by POSITION_NBR? Real Time 1. What is PIA and what are its components? It is n-tier architecture. We have client, web server, application server and Database server. We have jolt and tuxedo. We have WSL, WSH, JSL, JSH, QUEUES and services. In database server we have system tables, peopletools tables and application tables. 2. Differentiate Field edit and Save edit? In Field edit for each field change, a transition to the application server to the database is taken place. In Save edit for all the fields, only one transition to the application server to the Database is taken place. 3. What are think time functions? Think-time functions suspend processing either until the user has taken some action (such as clicking a button in a message box), or until an external process has run to completion. 4. In which events error & warning are used most extensively. Field edit, Save edit, Search save, row delete, row insert. 5. Is there any way by which you can find out whether the user is in Add mode or Update mode? %mode---returns A---for Add mode. Returns U –for Update mode 6. What is the purpose of the SQLEXEC function? What are its benefits and draw backs? SQLEXEC is used to execute the sql statements (select, insert,update,delete). We can get only one row at a time. 7. How is the searchinit event most often used by people soft application? A) Searchinit fires before the search dialogue page is displayed to the end user.For this reason searchinit is often used to enhance roll level security by inserting and graying out certain values to the search dialogue page. 8. What are the options for using SQL in people code? a) Sqlexec b) Record class methods (selectbykey, delete, insert, update) c) Using sql class, its properties and methods. 9. What is the difference between component buffer and data buffer? Component buffer contains all the data of the active component. Data buffer contains the data other than the data in the component buffer (Data of other records) 10. What databuffer classes are available in people code? Rowset, Row, Record, Field, Array, File, Sql, chart, grid and so on. 11. When we select a component what events will be fired? If default mode for component is search mode: only searchinit will fired .If default mode for component is new mode :field default, field formula, rowinit, searchinit. 12. What are different variables in people code and their Scope? System variables and User defined variables. Scope --- Global, Component, Local. 13. What is default processing? In default processing, any blank fields in the component are set to their default value. You can specify the default value either in

the Record Field Properties, or in FieldDefault PeopleCode 14. What is difference between field default and Row init? Field default specifies only the default value for a field when we are in Add mode. Row init fires only when a row of data coming from database to component buffer. 15. What is difference between saveprechange and savepostchange? Which function directly interacts with the database? Saveprechange---last event that executes before updating the data from component buffer to the database. Savepostchange –fires after the updation of data in the database. SQLEXEC --- function directly interacts with the database. 16. What is Getlevel 0()? What is the use of %subrec and %selectall functions? Getlevel0 ()---used the get the rowset of the level0. %subrec--is used only in Dynamic View SQL where it expands to the columns of a subrecord: %selectall--%SelectAll is shorthand for selecting all fields in the specified record, wrapping date/time fields with %DateOut, %TimeOut. 17. What is an array in people code? What is maximum dimension of an array? Which function inserts values into an array? What is “pop”? An array is a collection of data storage locations, each of which holds the same type of data. The maximum depth of a PeopleCode array is 15 dimensions. Push and unshift are the functions of the array used to add the elements into the array one from the end of the array and one from the beginning. Pop is a function of array used to select and delete an element from the end of the array. 18. What is difference between Getrowset and Createrowset in people code? Getrowset –is used to get rowset for a record in the component buffer. Createrowset—is used to create rowset for a record which in database, and is also called a Standalone rowset 19. Can you save the component programmatically? Using Dosave and Dosavenow functions. 20. What is differed processing and its advantages? Postpones some user actions to reduce the number of trips to the database so that increases the performance (in system edits, field edit, and field change). Advantages: 1) Reduces the network traffic. 2) Increases the performance. 33. Write the syntax to access third level record field using object oriented peoplecode? &fld=Getlevel0 ()(1).GetRowset(Record..GetRow(1), GetRowset (Record.).GetRow(1), GetRowset (Record.).GetRow(1), GetRecord (Record.).GetFieild(Field.)) 21. What are the built-functions used to control translate values dynamically? Adddropdownitem () Deletedropdownitem () 22. How to populate data into grid in online? &Rs.Select or Scrollselect (). SECURITY Before accessing a people soft application what levels of security must be passed through. a) Field level security b) Row level security c) Maintain security d) Definition security e) Portal security. 23.What is the use of primary permission list in user profile? Primary permission list is used for mass change and definition security purposes. How to authorize the user to run a process or report? To authorize a user to run a process, the process group, which contains the process or report, should be added to the permission

list of that user. 24.How to give access to the records that are to be used in a query? To give access to the records that are to be used in query, we have create a new query security tree and add the records which we want to give the access and then assign a access group to the tree. After that we have to add that query tree and query access group to the permission list. 25.What are the rules used by the system to determine whether a user is authorized to update an object? The user should have the permission to update the object. This is given by the Definition security. The group, which holds the object, should be added to the permission list of the user in update mode. What are the different ways we can set up the portal security to access component in portal? 1) Structure & content 2) Menu import 3) Register component 1. What is Application Engine? It is the tool, which performs, background SQL processing against our application data tables. It is an alternative for COBOL, SQL or SQR Programs. Other tools such as query tool and mass change generate SQL. 2. What are the parts of Application Engine? Application Engine consists of 4 parts. 1. Application: It is a set of SQL statements. 2. Steps: It is the smallest unit of work committed in an application. 3. Sections: Comprises of 1 or more steps 4. Statements: SQL statements like update, insert, delete or select are issued. 3. What is the advantage of using Application Engine? The following are the advantages of using Application Engine. Encapsulation Unlike applications developed using COBOL or SQR, Application Engine applications reside completely within your database. With Application Engine, there are the programs to compile, no statements to store, and no need to directly interact with the operating environment in use. You can build, run and debug your applications without existing People Tools. Effective Dating Application sections are effective dated-meaning you can activate/deactivate a section as of a particular date. This enables you to archive sections as you modify them, instead of destroying them. In the future if you decide to revert to a previous incarnation of a section you can simply reactivate it. SQL / Meta-SQL Support In addition to writing your SQL within Application Engine, you can also copy SQL statements into Application Engine from SQL talk or any other SQL utility with few – if any changes. RDBMS platforms have many differing syntax rules – especially in regard to date, time and other numeric calculations. For the most part you can work around this problem using Meta-SQL which Application Engine supports. This language was created to handle different RDBMS SQL syntax’s by replacing them with a standard syntax, called Meta-strings. With in Platform specific sections You can also have the ability to call generic portions of SQL statements by using the & CLAUSE function. This means you can write your generic SQL portions just once, and reference them from your different platform versions. Set Processing Support Set processing is a SQL technique used to process groups (or sets) of rows of one time rather than one at a time. Application Engine is particularly effective of processing these types of applications. Object Orientation Unless designed to anticipate changes in field attributes. COBOL applications may need to be modified when things change. If a developer increases a field’s length, then it may need to be changed in every instance where the COBOL program uses this field as a bind or select variable. This can require a good bit of effort. And, if not handled properly, a change like this can cause confusing errors. For example, if the length of a field in the COBOL is wrong, it may work fine, or you may get an error, or the field may get truncated. One of the corner stones of People soft functionality is Application Designer. Because of the way it works, most field attributes (type, length and scale) can be specified once, globally. If the field is used on more than one record, it has the same attributes in each of these records. PORTABILITY You can use Data Mover to import/export your applications. This means that you can export an application(s) into a file, and attach it to an e-mail message. Then, the recipient can simply use the IMPORT feature of Data Mover, and the application is ready

to run. 4. What is a Cache Record? The Cache record (or cache) is a physical People soft record, keyed by process instance that must be created and maintained by the Application Engine developer. This record defines the fields that an application uses to pas values from one SQL statements to another. You retrieve cache field values by the Application Engine and BIND function; you assign cache values using & SELECT. 5. What is unique about panels, which refer to view as opposed to physical tables? Panels that refer to views in People soft are not used for insert, update or delete. All fields on these panels are display only. 6. How search records are used? Search records are used to search, retrieve and filter data. Search records also define the structure of the dialog box. 7. Where are the search records assigned? Search records are assigned to a panel group in a menu. 8. Does the search record for a panel has to be the same as the record being Accessed on the panel? Why or Why not? The search record for the panel does not have to be the same as the record being Accessed on the panel because the search record is used to search for and or Filter the search key. 9. How can a search record dialog box be suppressed? A search record dialog box can be suppressed by assigning a search record that does not have search key. 10. What do search views delivered by People soft do besides displaying the dialog Box? Search views delivered by People soft are used to implement row level security as well as display a dialog box. 11. What do you need to do to modify the search views? To modify a search view, we need to change the record definition and recreate the underlying SQL view. 12. When would you have to alter the tables and modify the panels, in the process of modifying search records? You need to alter tables and modify panels, when you modify a search record to include a new field. 13. When will there be two occurs level records in a panel group? If you are referring to two different record definitions that share a same high-level key then two-level one-scroll bar can be displayed as stacked scroll bars. 14. In what order does the application processor fill buffer for the panel group? The application processor uses occurs level in the panel group to fill the buffer. 15.Differentiate Error V/s Warning statements in People code? The error statement issues a message and the condition causing the error must Be corrected before proceeding. The warning statement issues a message and The user can proceed without changing any values. 16. Where can you run Jobs? The process scheduler can run jobs on the client or a server machine. 17. What restrictions are placed on multi-process jobs? A multi process jobs can only be scheduled to run on a server. 18. List the three output destinations available through the Process Scheduler? You can direct the output to a printer file and windows screen. 19. Where do you set up default operator / class options for Process Monitor? In operator security, using change, process profile. 20. What are the advantages of incorporating Table set ids into People soft applications?

Table set Ids allow you to share sets of values (codes) in the same prompt table. 21. What fields should be at the tope of every search record definition that use table set Ids? SET ID is the field that should be at the top of every record definition that uses table set Ids. 22. What is a Record Group ID? A Record group ID is a group of record definitions that are Sharing the same set control field. 23. What do you determine using Table set Ids control information? Table set ID control information determines how the information should be shared. The Table set ID control panel defines which Table set Ids set control filed code will use for each record group. 24. What are the three types of Maps used by the navigator? The 3 types of Maps used by the navigator are.. 1. Business Process Map 2. Activity Map 3. Step Map 25. What are the types of layers in Crystal reports? There are 4 types of layers in Crystal Reports. They are.. 1. Report Header - In this, we will write title, date, and logos of the company. 2. Page Header – Used to write column headings. 3. Detail – Contains database column values. 4. Page Footer – Used to write page numbers and address. PS Interview Questions 1) What is the difference between Access ID, Connect ID and Operator ID in PeopleSoft? 2) What is the advantage of writing the peoplecode at component record level? 3) When should a sub-page be used? How is it different from a page? 4) What is 'Change Control Locking'? How is it accomplished in PeopleSoft? 5) How can you set dependency between the process that are running in the process scheduler? 6) What is the difference between SQLEXEC and CreateSQL? 7) What is the advantage of writing peoplecode inside an application class? 8) What is a Rowset Cache class? 9) What are the different ways to send email from PeopleSoft? 10) What are the objects that 'people' user will access? How does an authentication take place in PeopleSoft GUI? Objective PeopleSoft HRMS / HCM Interview Multiple Choice Questions and Answers.The answers of the MCQs are highlighted with a (*) You are setting up a new medical plan that requires employee deductions from pay. Where do you set up the sequencing of the deductions so that this deduction is taken before all others? A.Medical Plan Table B.Benefit Plan Table C.Deduction Table (*) D.Calculation Rules Table E.Benefit Program Table Which statement is true about an Effective-dated row? A.It can be modified only using Correct History.

B.It copies all data to the new inserted row, including the effective date. C.It copies all data to the new inserted row, except the effective date. (*) An existing row can be modified using Update/Display if the effective date is equal to system date.Despite advice from various consulting firms, a local company wants to pay its employees 13 times a year. They currently pay their employees monthly. What can the company do to pay its employees 13 times a year? A.set up a pay frequency with an annualization factor of 12 and a pay frequency with an annualization of 1 and combine them in Payroll B.set up a pay frequency with an annualization factor of 13 (*) C.It is not possible to set up a pay frequency greater than 12. D.run the last payroll of the year twice E.set up the annualization frequency with a pay factor of 13 Which components of Multiple Components of Pay comprise the Comprate field on the Job record? A.Shift components, Supplemental Pay components, and components with the Base Pay checkbox selected B.U.S. Dollar Base components only C.components with the Base Pay checkbox selected (*) D.components with the Base Pay checkbox selected and the Shift checkbox selected E.all components You have just added a new department to the Department Table. It is active and its effective date is less than today's date. When you try to transfer an employee to that department on an inserted row with today's date, the new department is NOT showing up. How can you resolve this issue? A.add the department to the active Department Security Tree (*) B.run the Update Department Security Tree Processed C.change the effective date of the record to match the effective date of the new department D.manually type in the department in the Department field and select Save from the icon menu E.run the Refresh Employees Table Process Which table is NOT set up within the Workforce Administration module? A.Competency Table (*) B.Volunteer Organizations Table C.Action/Reason Table D.Visa Permit Table E.Title Table Many businesses are moving valuable, high-profile employees with sought-after skills across borders to where they are needed most. What is the official name for these employees? A.foreign assignees B.foreign country nationals C.expatriates (*) D.remote workers E.multinational employees F.global workers Which delivered table is a consolidation of employee information from different transaction tables? A.Person Table B.Employment Table C.Consolidated Employee List Table D.Employees Table (*) E.Job Table In the PeopleSoft 8.8 Internet Architecture, what is the static information at the top of the page called? A.Favorites B.Breadcrumbs C.Universal Navigation Header (*) D.Menu Bar E.Components Which three HCM product modules are included in the PeopleSoft HRMS Release Notes? (Choose three.) A.HRMS Portal Pack (*) B.Resource Management

C.Global Payroll (*) D.Recruiting and Admissions E.Human Resources (*) Operator A has only update/display access to the Job Data component. Operator A needs to correct the Job Code on EMPLID 10500 job row dated March 12, 2002. Operator A asks the supervisor why he is NOT allowed to make this change. Why can't Operator A perform this correction? A.The supervisor needs to add Operator A to a different permission list. B.The effective sequence on the row is equal to one. C.The row with effective date March 12, 2002 is the current row for EMPLID 10500 (*) D.Operator A can correct history only Your client is upgrading from HRMS 7.5 to HRMS 8.8 and is not happy about the removal of the Personal_Data Table. They want to retain this table for use and remove it when they upgrade to HRMS Release 9. What is PeopleSoft's recommended approach? A.engage PGS to customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table B.customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table C.have the client apply the PERSONAL_DATA_RECALL project (*) D.stay on HRMS 7.5 until HRMS 9 is released Which common reporting table is used by many PeopleSoft delivered reports, such as PER002-Employee Birthdays and PER005-Employees on Leave of Absence? A.Pers Data Effdt Table B.Employees Table (*) C.Employment Table D.Personal Data Table What are three security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft? (Choose three.) A.Fast Security 3 (*) B.Location Security C.Department Security (*) D.Company Security E.Fast Security 2 (*) Which five tables store the data from the hire process? (Choose five.) A.Name (*) B.Department C.Business Unit D.Employment (*) E.Benefits Program Participation (*) F.Competencies F.Job (*) G.Person (*) Operator A has only update/display access to the Job Data component. Operator A needs to correct the Job Code on EMPLID 10500 job row dated March 12, 2002. Operator A asks the supervisor why he is NOT allowed to make this change. Why can't Operator A perform this correction? A.The supervisor needs to add Operator A to a different permission list. B.The effective sequence on the row is equal to one. C.The row with effective date March 12, 2002 is the current row for EMPLID 10500 (*) D.Operator A can correct history only Your client is upgrading from HRMS 7.5 to HRMS 8.8 and is not happy about the removal of the Personal_Data Table. They want to retain this table for use and remove it when they upgrade to HRMS Release 9. What is PeopleSoft's recommended approach? A.engage PGS to customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table B.customize the upgrade scripts to retain the table C.have the client apply the PERSONAL_DATA_RECALL project (*) D.stay on HRMS 7.5 until HRMS 9 is released What isEffective Date? Information Component /Record linked to the data EFFDT. Information changes based on the EFFDT.

What is Effective Sequence? Identifier to find the order of multiple transactions occurring on a same EFFDT. What is the effective sequence’s default number? 0 What’s the difference between a position number and a job code? Position number is the unique identification number for driven by business unit , department ,location , job code and other parameters What is the purpose of update/display mode? To add the new information current and future as well view the current data. What is the purpose of correct history mode? To correct the past and current information based on the EFFDT. What is the purpose of include history mode? To view the past information based on the EFFDT. What is Employee Record Number? Number to identify an employee’s different organizational relationships. What are all the mandatory fields need to key in while add a person on the system? 1) Name 2) Organizational relationship National ID , Address, Birthdate gives us warning message. What is employment instance? Employee relationship with organization. Where employee can have multiple relationship (instances) with the organization. What is the difference between Set Id and a Business Unit? Where a Business Unit organizes your company or your organization, SetIDs help you organize your data within the system. The HRMS system uses tables (Control Tables or Prompt Tables) that use a high-level key that enables you to identify and retrieve data from the system. A secondary high-level key,referred to as a SetID, has also been added on various tables. SetIDs are simply the labels used to identify a TableSet. Business Unit and SetID functionality in PeopleSoft also provides you with a higher business level for reporting purposes and other business data roll-up. What is HCCPALL? Delivered primary permission list with access to all the components and pages What is HCDPALL? Delivered row level security permission list with full access. What is the default tree name need to give while creating the new tree? Dept_Security followed by any name as per your requirement. What would be the default effective date for creating the new tree? 1/1/1900 or 1/1/1901 What are all the tree manager definitions? • Level • Node • Parent • Sibiling • Child What are all the various types of SJT? • SJT_CLASS • SJT_CLASS_ALL

• SJT_PERSON • SJT_DEPARTMENT What are all the organisational instance components? • Add Employment Instance (Job_Data_Emp) • Add Contingent Worker Instance (Job_Data_CWR) • Add Person of Interest Job (Jon_Data_POI) What are all the job instances used for POIs? • COBRA qualified beneficiaries • Stock employees not administered in Human Resources • Global Payroll Employees • Pension Payees • Stock board members What are all the purpose of the Job Earnings Distribution Information Page? We can distribute the worker’s compensation on the basis of the following: • Department • Job Code • Earnings Code • Business Unit • Shift • Position Number • General Ledger Pay type What are all the job level defaults? • Work • Job Information • Job Labor • Payroll • Salary Plan • Compensation • Employment Information • Benefit Program Participation • Earnings Distribution What are all the main components for setting the hire template? • Template Record/Field • Template Section • Template Category Table • Template Creation What are all the statuses used to define templates? • Test (Default Value) • Active • Inactive What are all the statuses available on the template hire status page? • Pending Hires • Cancelled Hires • Processed Hires What are the methods available to update worker’s compensation packages? • Seniority Pay increases • Grade Advance increases • Automated step increases • Step increases using review bands • Amount increases • Percentage increases what are all the components available under Setup HRMS? • Install

• Security • Upgrade • Foundation Tables • Common Definitions • Product Related • System Administration Which pay component comprises the Compensation Rate on the Job Table? A. Annual Benefits Base Rate B. Non-Base Pay C. Rate Code Group D. Non-Base Supplemental Pay E. Base Pay (*) Where do you define user related defaults? A.Department Security Tree B.Org Defaults By Permissions Table (*) C.Row Security Table D.Roles Table Business Unit Options Defaults Table You have been asked to set up the Job Code Table. Which two foundation tables should you set up initially? (Choose two.) A.Pay Group Table B.SetID Table (*) C.Salary Plan Table (*) D.Career Plan Table E.Job Description Table An employee has been promoted and you are adding the new Job row to his record. When you try to enter the Job Code, it does not show up in the prompt table search results. What are three possible causes of this problem? (Choose three.) A.The effective date on the Job Code is greater than the effective date on the Job row. (*) B.The Job Code has no salary plan or grade associated with it. C.Your security does not include access to the Job Code's SetID. (*) D.The SetID of the Job Code is different from the SetID assigned to the employee's Business Unit on the TableSet Control Table (*) Which PeopleSoft-delivered benefit plan types are assigned to 30 through 39? A.life insurance plans B.health plans C.disability plans (*) D.pension plans E.leave plans Which PeopleSoft-delivered benefit plan types are assigned to 20 through 29? A .life insurance plans (*) B. health plans C. disability plans D. leave plans E. pension plans The dependent age limit is 19 for all benefits. Which table should you use to exclude disabled dependents from the age limit? A. Benefit Program Table (*) B. Calculation Rules Table C. Dependent/Beneficiary Table D. Benefit Plan Table What three elements of a benefit deduction are specified on either the benefit plan or plan specific tables? (Choose three) A .a calculation routine for the deduction (*) B. vendor information for payment of the deduction C. the deduction code (*)

D. the priority of the deduction E. how to handle arrears for the deduction You are going to set up a long term disability plan. Which plan type group should you use? A.5X B.9X C.LTD D.3X (*) A company has a maximum coverage of $1,000,000 over all life insurance plans. The maximum coverage for each plan is: Life - $600,000 Supplemental Life - $300,000 AD/D - $300,000 If an employee selects the maximum coverages for each life insurance plan, what will be the saved coverages for each plan type? A.Life - $600,000; Supplemental Life - $300,000; AD/D - $300,000 B.Life - $600,000; Supplemental Life - $300,000; AD/D - $100,000 (*) C.Life - $333,333; Supplemental Life - $333,333; AD/D - $333,333 D.Life - $400,000; Supplemental Life - $300,000; AD/D - $300,000 E.Life - $600,000; Supplemental Life - $100,000; AD/D - $300,000 The PeopleSoft system is configured to allow partial deductions and deduction arrears. An employee has net pay of $300 and deductions totaling $500. Which partial deduction is taken? A.$400 B.$0 C.$300 (*) D.$200 E.$500 On which benefits setup table do you associate health plans and providers? A. Benefit Plan Table (*) B. Deduction Table C. Health Plan Table D. Benefit Program Table E. Provider/Vendor Table What are all the components will have data permission security control access? • Departments • Employee, Contingent Worker, and POI with Jobs. • POI without jobs. • Recruiting Federal People with jobs. • Template based hires. What are all the organisational relationships available while hiring an employee? • Employee • Contingent Worker • Person of Interest (POI) List down the people part of the POI? • COBRA Participants • Pension Payees • Global Payroll Payees • Stock non-HR Person • Stock board members • External Instructor • Payroll Employees • External Trainers what are all the People Tools Security? • Permission List • Roles • User Profiles what are all the default programs you need to run after the creating the user profile?

• Refresh SJT CLASS ALL • Refresh Trans. SJT tables • Refresh SJT OPR CLS What are all the default Permission List used while creating the User ID? • Navigator Homepage Permission List • Process Profile Permission List • Primary Permission List What are all the methods for assigning Data Permission Access to Permission List? • Tree based data permission security • Role based data permission security What are all the Access types for Department security sets? • Departments by Tree • Departments by non – tree • Departments by set id What are all the Access types for People with jobs security sets? • Job department tree • Job location • Jon business unit • Job Company • Job regulatory region • Job salary grade • Person organisation • Department ID – non tree • Company – Pay group What are all the Access types for People without jobs security sets? • POI Business Unit • POI Location • POI Institution • Person of Interest what are all the Access types for Recruiting Job Opening security sets? • RS Company • RS Business Unit • RS Department ID • RS Location • Recruiting Team What are all the Access types for Template Based Hire security sets? • Template ID • Template Category • Person Organisation • Country How many types of payrolls are there? How do you declare bonus of an employee in PeopleSoft HRMS Payroll? What is the most important Record in PS HRMS A Customer wants to use a new Image in HRMS, where it is stored? what are the important tables in PeopleSoft HRMS What is the purpose of update/display mode?

What is difference between Person ID and Employee ID? What are four security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft What are all the two statuses will be available on the top of the job data? What are all the different types of action/reasons available on the system? Which table has SetID as a high-level key? Where do you define user related defaults? What are three security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft? What is the default tree name need to give while creating the new tree? Which deduction classification is used to set up a savings plan employer before-tax match? Which table is considered an Implementation Processing Rules and Default Table? What do you mean by budget and incumbents? What is Effective Sequence? What is the difference between Set Id and a Business Unit? How should you inactivate an Effective-dated row in a foundation table? You are going to set up a long term disability plan. Which plan type group should you use? Which table is used to add additional plan types to the database? A.Benefit Program Table B.Benefit Plan Table C.Plan Specific Table D.Translate Table (*) E.Plan Type Table When building a Benefit Program, which four fields are in the Option section? (Choose four.) A.Option Type (*) B.Benefit Plan (*) C.Self-Service Configuration D.Deduction Code (*) E.Calc Table ID F.Coverage Code (*) An employee has a current row with the action of Promotion with an effective date of June 6, 2002. The human resources administrator then receives a personnel change form that states the employee should have received a merit increase as of March 1, 2002. What action type does the administrator use to A. insert the Merit Increase row? B. Update/Display All C. Correct History (*) D. Update/Display E. Add F. Include History Which table has SetID as a high-level key? A. Comp Rate Code Table B. Job Profile Table C. Company Table D. Job Code Table (*)

Which table is considered an Implementation Processing Rules and Default Table? A. Establishment Table B. Business Unit Table C. Set ID Table D. TableSet Control Table E. Installation Table (*) How can the Location Table impact an employee's compensation? A. Salary grades are defaulted from the Location Table B. Salary plans are defaulted from the Location Table. (*) C. Compensation is not affected by the Location Table. D. Comp rate codes are set up on the Location Table. You have been asked to participate in a fit/gap analysis for the Payroll module. You have never participated in a fit/gap before. Which three questions are part of a fit/gap analysis for Payroll? (Choose three.) A.What are the names and addresses of the company's benefit providers? B.Does the company currently offer savings plans? (*) C.How do you collect time information for your employees? (*) D.How many Job Codes does your company currently have? E.How many earnings types does your organization have? (*) A data entry clerk is processing a new hire. He is about to enter data into the Supervisor ID field and finds it has already been populated. On which table was this default set? A.Department Table (*) B.Location Table C.Paygroup Table D.Org Defaults by Permission List Table E.Job Code Table A company has a maximum coverage of $1,000,000 over all life insurance plans. The maximum coverages for the company are: Life - $500,000 Supplemental Life - $400,000 AD/D - $300,000 If an employee selects the maximum coverages for each life insurance plan, what will be the saved coverages for each plan type? A.Life - $500,000; Supplemental Life - $400,000; AD/D - $300,000 B.Life - $500,000; Supplemental Life - $400,000; AD/D - $100,000 (*) C.Life - $333,333; Supplemental Life - $333,333; AD/D - $333,333 D.Life - $500,000; Supplemental Life - $200,000; AD/D - $300,000 E.Life - $300,000; Supplemental Life - $400,000; AD/D - $300,000 How should you inactivate an Effective-dated row in a foundation table? A.using Add, insert a new row with an effective date greater than Current row B.using Correct History, change the status to Inactive C.insert a new row and change the effective status to Inactive (*) D.verify that there are no references to the value in any other tables, then delete the row E.change the values on all records that use this row, then delete it Which employees appear on the BEN733 - Base Benefits Audit Report? A.all employees not enrolled in a benefits program B.employees with dependents signed up for benefits C.employees younger than 16 years old (*) D.employees with spouses signed up for benefits E.employees with multiple job records What are four security solutions that are delivered with PeopleSoft? (Choose four.) A.Fast Security 4 B.Fast Security 3 (*) C.Location Security D.Fast Security 2 (*) E.Company Security F.Department Security (*) G.Fast Security 1 (*) For the action of Short Term Disability, what is the resulting employee status?

A.Active B.Termination C.Leave of Absence (*) D.Leave with Pay E.Suspension When working on a conversion, what does PeopleSoft recommend you use as the initial effective dates on the Job Code Table? A.use 01/01/1900 use the date of your conversion B.accommodate your longest active tenured employee C.accommodate your longest tenured employee (*) You have just added a new department to the Department Table. It is active and its effective date is less than today's date. When you try to transfer an employee to that department on an inserted row with today's date, the new department is NOT showing up. How can you resolve this issue? A.run the Refresh Employees Table Process B.add the department to the active Department Security Tree (*) C.run the Update Department Security Tree Process D.manually type in the department in the Department field and select Save from the Icon menu E.Change the effective date of the record to match the effective date of the new department You are helping the Compensation department set up the Job Code Table. Which three tables are associated with the Job Code Table and therefore should be set up prior to setting up the Job Code Table? (Choose three.) A.Salary Plan Table (*) B.Job Function Table (*) C.Job Description Table D.SetID Table (*) E.Job Hazard Table A company wants you to set the dependent age limit to 19 for all benefits. Which table should you use? A.Benefit Plan Table B.Calculation Rules Table C.Dependent/Beneficiary Table D.Benefit Program Table (*) Which table has SetID as a high-level key? A.Business Unit Table B.Location Table (*) C.Job Profile Table D.Comp Rate Code Table E.Company Table Which HRMS module does NOT use the Group Build functionality? A.Payroll (*) B.Training Administration C.Total Compensation Reporting D.Variable Compensation E.Salary Planning A customer asks you to set up a medical plan on the Benefit Plan Table. Which table must you set up first? A.Flat Rate Table B.Calculation Rules Table C.Health Plan Table D.Plan Specific Table E.Provider/Vendor Table (*) Which statement is true when processing benefits with multiple jobs? A.For each benefit record number, one job must be designated as the primary job. (*) B.Benefit deductions are taken from all paychecks associated with the same benefit record number C.Each benefit record number must be unique. D.Each job must be assigned a unique benefit record number.

Your client has seasonal workers and wants to base the annual compensation rate on 125 work days per year. On which table do you define this requirement? A.Comp Rate Table B.Frequency Table (*) C.Job Code Table D.Installation Table E.Default Frequency Table A company has many employees who have two jobs. They want their employees to enroll in their benefits programs only once, instead of once per job. To accomplish this, they must use the same _____ for both jobs. A.Employee Record Number B.Benefits Program C.Pay Run ID D.Pay Group E.Benefits Record Number (*) Where do you enter default values that are specific to a PeopleSoft user? A.Business Unit Options Defaults B.Location Table C.Installation Table D.Org Defaults by Permission List (*) E.User Profiles Component A customer wants to set up a vacation plan and have the ability to track the vacation balances. Which three tables must be set up before you can track the vacation balances? (Choose three.) A.Calculation Rules Table B.Provider/Vendor Table (*) C.Earnings Table (*) D.Deduction Table E.Benefit Program Table (*) On the Job Earnings Distribution Page, what are three ways you can distribute the employee's compensation? (Choose three.) A. to a different Company B. to a different Department (*) C. to a different Job Codes and/or Position (*) D. to a different Pay Group E. to a different General Ledger Type (*) Which deduction classification is used to set up a savings plan employer before-tax match? A. Before-Tax B. Nontaxable Before-Tax Benefit (*) C. Nontaxable Benefit D. After-Tax E. Taxable Benefit PeopleSoft Interview Questions and Answers– Application Engine 1) There are different types of variables in the Application Engine people code? Local variable – these are available for the duration of the program in which they are declared. Global / Component – These variables are available while the Application Engine program is running. They are saved at commits and checkpoints, So they can be used for restarts. Component variables are same as Global incase of the AE. 2) What are the Different ways pass data between the steps? 1) State records – One row can be passed and can have many state records. 2) Component/Global People code variables 3) Temporary records – Multiple rows of data can be passed. 3) What is Prerequisite for the State record? 1) Should be either Derived work record Or SQL Table. 2) Name of the record must end in AET; this is how the system identifies the record as a state record.

3) PROCESS_INSTANCE must be a key. 4) Any data types except character or numeric must not be required fields. Note: - No People code fires on an Application Engine state record. No Validation of translate values or Prompt tables are done. 4) How to read the runctrl parameters in AE 1) SQL: - %Select (EMPLID) Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL where PROCESS_INSTANCE = %PROCESS_INSTANCE and ORPID = %oprid 2) People code: - &SQL = “Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL Where PROCESS_INSTACNE =” PS_TEST_AET.PROCESS_INSTANCE “and OPRID =” %oprid. %PROCESS_INSTANCE or %Bind (PROCESS_INSTANCE) can be used. %PROCESS_INSTANCE is more efficient and faster. 5) How do you execute Application Engine through Push Button? 1) CreateProcessRequest (), Schedule () 2) CallAppEngine. 6) What is the syntax for CallAppEngine? CallAppEngine (applid [, state record]); 7) What are the 3 trace parameters you can pass to your psae.exe? - TRACE - TOOLSTRACESQL - TOOLSTRACEPC 8) Which Trace option is the best place to start for general performance information? - TRACE 384 – mostly used trace value. 9) What is the difference between a Trace value and Trace parameters? A Trace parameter determines which type of trace is turned on. A Trace parameter determines what type of data is recorded in your trace files (s). 10) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 11) What are the Different types of Application Engine? Standard: Standard entry-point program. Upgrade Only: Used by PeopleSoft Upgrade utilities only. Import Only: Used by PeopleSoft Import utilities only Daemon Only: Use for daemon type programs. Transform Only: Support for XSLT Transform programs. 12) How do you program AE program for the restarts? Program Level State Record One of the state record needs to SQL Table, Since All Derived work record will be re-initializing on commit. Program Properties On the Advanced tab in the program properties dialog box, make sure that disable restart is not checked. Configuration manager In the configuration manager, sure that Disable restart is not selected on the process scheduler tab. Section Level Section type The option for section type are prepare only and critical updates If the section is preparing data i.e. select data, Populating temporary tables, or updating temporary tables then the section should be prepare only. If the section is updating the permanent application tables in the database, you should select critical update. Step Level Add an order by clause %Select Field Select Field1 from PS_SOME_RECORD Where FIELD1 > %Bind (FIELD1) Order by FIELD1. Add a switch to the selected table Delete processed rows. The only restriction for batch runs occurs when you have restart enabled, and you are inside a Do Select that is of the Select/Fetch type (instead of "Re-select" or "Restartable"). with select/Fetch, all commits inside the loop are ignored, including the commit

frequency if it's set. 13) What is Set Processing? Set Processing uses SQL to process groups, or sets, of rows at one time rather than processing each row individually. With row by row processing you following a repetitive loop that selects a row, determines if it meets a given criteria, if so, apply rule x to row Update row, commit. With set processing, you only select those rows that meet the filtering criteria and then run the rule once again all the affected rows. 14) Advantages of Set Processing? Improved Performance: - Our internal testing has revealed that, in an overwhelming majority of cases, set processing performs significantly better than it is -by-row counterpart for “reasonable” batch processing volumes. Minimized SQL Overhead: - It tends to use fewer Application Engine SQL statements that each processed more data than the statements executed in row-by-row processing. Easy Maintenance: - if need to make a fix or add an enhancement to SQL, it’s just a matter of modifying the SQL or inserting the new “Chunk”. Leveraging the RDBMS: - With Set – based processing, you take advantage of the SQL processing engine on the database rather than placing the processing burden and overhead on the application executable. 15) Testing and debugging application engine? Application Engine Trace file-You can track the step execution of your application execution. Application Engine Interactive Debugger – First click on the trace tab and turn off the statement timings. Select Profile -> Edit Profile-> Process Scheduler Tab -> Application section Select Debug check box. (You can dynamically modify the state record run application engine step by step People Code Debugger for the Application Engine.) AE Trace files: - AE__.AET Without the process instance: - AE__.AET 1) Order and flow of action types 1) Do When 2) Do While 3) Do Select 4) Peoplecode 5) SQL 6) Call Section 7) Message Log 8) XSLT 9) Do until 2) What is Prerequisite for the Temporary record? 1) Should have process Instance as key 2) Name should end with _TAO 3) Different types of Temporary tables - Dedicated - Un Dedicated (Shared) 4) Why Parallel Processing required? Potential performance improvements by splitting the data to be processed into groups and simultaneously running multiple instance of your program to deal with different groups of data. If you have a one program that uses a temporary table and is invoked multiple times, that single temporary table could be used concurrently in multiple executions of the code. This could create unpredictable results since the different instances of the code would be issuing delete, Inserts and/or updates unsynchronized with each other. You could solve the problem by creating multiple temporary tables as a pool of tables. Each invocation of your program would have to allocate an unused temporary table, mark it as ‘in use’ , use it and release it back to the pool when you through with it (for each Application Engine program you write). 5) How running AE program as Batch differs from running it online? Application Engine programs are designed for two types of execution and each has its own pool of Temporary Tables Online:

Invoked by CallAppEngine from People code Run quickly, synchronously, and at random times. Potential for simultaneous executions Uses the online Temporary Table pool. Not restart able. Psae.exe randomly assigns an instance number from the number range on your online temp tables. If the instance number is in use psae.exe puts the program in Queue until the assigned instance becomes free. Unlock on completion, on Crash free from Manage Abends. Batch: Invoked through the Process Scheduler. Run for longer amounts of time, asynchronously, and at scheduled times. Can be designed for parallel execution for performance. Uses the Batch/Dedicated Temporary table. Restart able. It allocates instance number based on the availability on a record by record basis and psae.exe begins with the lowest instance numbers.If the properties are set continue - Base table is used with Process instance as key. If Re-starable – Locked across Restarts until completes successfully. If not Re-startable on Program completion. 6) What are the important steps for implementing the parallel processing? Define you Temporary Tables. Set the Temporary Tables Online pool. Assign Temporary Tables to your Application Engine program in it program. Set Temporary Table Batch Pool – Instance count in the AE. Build / Rebuild your Temporary Table record. Code %Table Meta – SQL as reference to Temporary Tables in your Application Engine program, so that Application Engine can table references to the assigned Temporary Table instance dynamically at runtime. 7) What happens when all the instance of the temporary table are in use? It behavior can control by AE developer. If the runtime options are set to continue “People Tools will insert rows into the base table using the PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key”. If temp table doesn’t contain PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key field in a Temporary table, you should change the Temp table runtime options to “Abort” in the appropriate Application Engine programs. 8) How can you divide the data to be processed by different instance of the program to perform parallel program? Run control parameters passed to each instance of the AE program enable it to identify which input rows “belong” to it, and each program instance inserts the rows from the source table into its assigned temporary table instance using %Table. 9) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 10) What is the main purpose of the Access property in the Section? Basically they have two options, public and private if section declared as public then it be access from other program. Private we cannot call from other program. 11) Which actions are mutually exclusive and why they are mutually exclusive? Sql and callsection. 12) Error handling or Exception handling in Application Engine ? Step properties:On Error:Abort – Write message to message log and terminate. Ignore - Write message to message log and continue. uppress – No message will be written, but program will continue. People code Action: - On return options can used to handle run time errors. Abort: - Exits immediately – Not recommended. Break:- Exits the current step and section and control returns to the calling step. Skip Step:- The program exits the current step, and continues processing at the next step in the section. If this is the last step in the section, the calling step resumes control of the processing. SQL Action properties:No Rows:- When the Sql doesn’t return any rows, you can tell what application engine program should do. Abort: - Program terminates Section Break: - Application Engine exits the current section immediately, and control returns to the calling step.

Continue: - The program continues processing Skip Step: - Application Engine exits the current step immediately and moves on to the next step. When using skip step keep the following in mind: 1) Application Engine ignores the commit for the current step at runtime 2) If the current step contains only one Action, only use skip step at by-pass the commit. 13) What are different types Do Select? 1) Select/Fetch 2) Reselect 3) Restart able Select/Fetch: Opens the cursor only at the first time and retrieve rows one at loop. Commits inside the step (commits in the Called Section) are ignored if AE is Restart enabled. Reselect: It opens the cursor and closes the cursor on each iteration of the loop. It will reselect the same row of data. Logic in Actions of the step should be such that it will be changing the status of the rows in the table the do select is selecting. Commits are not ignored and will be committed in a reselect loop when the restart is enabled. Restart able: - similar to select/Fetch but it WILL COMMIT inside the loop thus allowing the checkpoint to the PS_AERUNCONTROL table. 14)What is the maximum limitation on temporary tabel instances in AE. 99 15) what is the difference between the %SELECT and %SELECTINIT meta sql functions. Ans %select : if any values have not selected then previous value will be there %selectinit : if any values have not selected then previous value will reinitilate to null 16) what is the difference between exit(0),exit(1) when we are using this functions in AE Exit (1) causes immediate termination of a PeopleCode program. Use this parameter to rollback database changes. Exit (0) caused immediate termination of a Peoplecode Program but don’t make rollback in the database. Peoplesoft Interview Questions - Component Interface Builder 1) What are the main elements in the component Interface ? Main elements of component Interface • Component interface name • Keys • Properties and collections • Methods 2) Difference between Get keys, find keys and Create Keys ? Get keys: - These are mapped to the fields marked as scrh in the component’s search record. Automatically “Search key” fields in search record become Get keys. We cannot change it. Find keys: - These are mapped to fields marked as Alt or Srch in the component search record. You may remove Find keys that you do not wish to make available for searching. Create Keys: - It is generated from the key fields for the search record. If Add search record is present then its key fields are taken. We cannot change it. 3) How do you provide security for the component interface? • Open the Permission list • On the Component Interface tab • Add row and select the newly created Component Interface • Edit the permissions to give permission for the standard methods • Get, Create, Save, cancel, find.

4) What the steps that you need to do in people code to invoke Component Interface? • Establish a user section • Get the component interface definition • Populate the create keys • Create an instance of the component interface • Populate the required fields • Save the component Interface. &Session = GetSession(); &CI = &Session.GetcompIntfc(CompIntfc.INTERFACE_NAME) &CI.KEY_FILED_NAME = ‘NEW’ If not &CI.Create () Then Else Populate other fields End-if; Populate the other fields If not &CI.Save () Then Else End-if; 5) How do you test Component Interface? • Using the Component Interface tester • Give values in the tester for options • Get Existing, Create new, Find and perform the operation from the CI Tester 6) Catching error message in the component Interface? Or Use of PSMessages in the CI ? This function needs to be called when ever methods like Find, Save, Create methods return false. Error text and Error type can be printed in the log message for any other action in to the log messge. Function CheckErrorCodes() &PSMessages = &Session.PSMessages; &ErrorCount = &PSMessages.Count; For &i = 1 To &ErrorCount &ErrorText = &PSMessages.Item(&i).Text; &ErrorType = &PSMessages.Item(&i).Type; End-For; End-Function; 7) What is method? What are the different types of method? Methods: - A method is an object that performs a very specific function on a component interface at run-time. Standard methods and user-defined methods. Standard methods: - Automatically generated upon the creation of a new component Interface in Application. Apart from the Standard methods there are Standard methods available for the use with any collection. User-Defined methods: - User-defined methods are those that you can create to meet the requirements of an individual component interface. 8) What are properties? The Fields in the level 0 in the component are the properties of the component. Standard properties User-Defined properties Createkeyinfocollection Developer can further control the exposed Getkeyinfocollection field properties. Findkeyinfocollection Property Info collection GetHistoryItems (Update/Display mode or Correction mode) EditHistory Items

InteractiveMode. 9) Traversing the Collections in the Component Interface? COLL_JOB – Collection Coll_JOBItm – Row in the collection. &COLL_JOBCol = &CI_JOB_DATA.COLL_JOB; For &i = 1 to &COLL_JOBCol.Count &COLL_JOBItm = &COLL_JOBCol.Item (&i); &COLL_JOB_JRCol = &COLL_JOBItm.COLL_JOB_JR; For &J = 1 to &COLL_JOB_JRCol.Count &COLL_JOB_JRItm = &COLL_JOB_JRCol.Item (&j); &COLL_JOB_JRItm.KEYPROP_EFFDT =; 10) How do you login in correction mode in the Component Interface? Get History Items and Edit History items property to should be set to true. Get History Items alone: - Update display all - modes will be used. Peoplesoft Interview questions and answers- SQR 1. What are the sections and paragraphs available? There are five sections and three paragraphs available in SQR programming. The sections include a. Begin-setup End-setup. b. Begin-program End-program. c. Begin-procedure End-procedure. d. Begin-heading End-heading. e. Begin-footing End-footing And the paragraphs include Begin-select paragraph. Begin-SQL paragraph. Begin-document paragraph 2. Is it possible to increase the array size once defined? No, it is not possible to increase the Array size once defined 3. What is Load-lookup? Give the Syntax for Load-Lookup? The LOAD-LOOKUP command defines an array containing a set of keys and values and loads it into memory. With LOADLOOKUP, you can reduce the number of tables that are joined in one SELECT. Use this command in conjunction with one or more LOOKUP commands. Syntax: begin-setup load-lookup name=prods table=products key=product_code return_value=description end-setup 4. Can you Call a SQR from another SQR? How? We can call one SQR program from another SQR program using Call.callsystem. But this is possible only in UNIX Operating system. 5. Briefly explain Most commonly used SQC’s in SQR programs? : Some of the most commonly used SQC’s are 1.STDAPI.sqc : This Is Process Scheduler Interface which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 2.SETENV.sqc : This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size,Date formats Etc…. 3.NUMBER.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format numbers. 4.DATETIME.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format dates and times. 6.RESET.sqc : This is an important Footing SQc. 6. What are the commands used in filehandling of sqr? Using File Handling we can Import. Steps are

1. Opening a File Using ‘OPEN FOR-READING’ command. 1. Reading Data From File Using ‘READ’ command. Writing Data into Table Using ‘BEGIN-SQL’ paragraph & ‘INSERT’ command 7. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes. The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 8. How can you Debug SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 2. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 9. What is the difference between sqr and sqc? SQR SQC 1.This is nothing but the Actual 1.This is like a function in SQR. Source program. 2.This consists of Program Section. 2.This does not consists of program Section. 3.This can be Compiled & Executed. 3.This cannot be Compiled and Executed. 4.We cannot call one SQR from 4.We can call one SQC from another SQC or another SQR or SQC. SQR program. 10. What are different types of variables in sqr? Types of variables in SQR are 1. Column Variables. 2. List Variables. 3. System Variables. 4. Document Variables. 5. Substitution Variables. User Defined Variables 11. Is there any read-only variable in sqr? Column Variables & System Variables are Read-Only Variables. 12. How to pass Inputs for sqr program while running from windows? Using ASK & INPUT Commands. 13. How to pass Inputs to the SQR while running through the Process Scheduler? Using Procedures & SQC’s to access data on Run Control Page (Run Control Fields). 14. What is the purpose of Stdapi.sqc This is a Process Scheduler Interface sqc which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 15. What is the SQT file? What are the advantages of SQT files? SQT’ file is nothing but resultant file after the compilation (i.e.) Runtime File. By using this SQT file for Execution we can increase the Performance of the program by reduciong the Compilation Time. 16. What is the SQC used to read data from translate table? ‘READXLAT.sqc’ is the SQC used to read data from Translate Table. 17. Which section is mandatory in an SQR program? ‘BEGIN-PROGRAM’ Section is Mandatory for an SQR program. 18. How will you display an image in SQR? Using ‘DECLARE-IMAGE , END-DECLARE’ command. 19. What is use of SETENV.SQC? This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size, Date formats Etc….

20. How will you perform ERROR handling in SQR? We can do Error handling in SQR using some command line flags such as –O, -L,-ZMF,-XMB and using Error handling commands such as ON-ERROR = Skip/Warn/Stop (for Compile time errors) ON-ERROR = Procedure Name (for execution stage errors). 21. How many ways of performance tuning are there in SQR? 1. Using LOADF-LOOKUP & LOOKUP. 2. Using ARRAYS. 3. Using MULTIPE REPORTS. 4. Using SQT Files. 5. Using –Bnn Command line Flag. 6. Running on BATCH SERVER. 7. Using Proper Programming Logic in SQR such as Using BREAK statement in EVALUATE Command. 8. Proper SQL tuning such as using Sub queries instead of Joins. 22. Can you call procedure in oracle from Sqr? How? To call a database procedure using Begin-select paragraph, the syntax is as follows: Begin-select [(report arguments)] from Dual End-select To call from Begin-sql, the syntax will be Begin-SQL ;; End-SQL 23. Can you connect more than one database using one Sqr? How? Yes. 24. What are the differences between Load lookup and Array ARRAYS LOAD-LOOKUP 1. Arrays can be declared in any section. 1. Load-Lookup is declared in only in SETUP section only. 2. Number of rows are not automatically 2. Numbers of rows are automatically added. gives a error if the number of added. Exceeds the specified number. 3. We should insert data in to Array by 3. Rows are automatically inserted in to programming. Load-Lookup. 4.We can retrive any number of fields. 4.We can retrive only Two fields from from a table. a table. 5.We have Length & Data type. 5.We don’t have Length & Data type. 6.We cannot directly print from Array. 6.We can directly print from Load-Lookup. 25. What are the steps required to run the SQR from peoplesoft environment? Three steps we have to fallow to run the SQR program from the peoplesoft environment (Process Scheduler). These steps include a. Making the SQR program API aware by calling two procedures (stdapi-init, stdapi-term) from the Begin-program section and including the Stdapi.sqc in the bottom of the program. b. Create new run control table or using existing run control table and creating run control page, component and register the component. Creating new run control SQC if we create a new run control table. c. Giving the permission to the user by giving process groups. 26. How to pass command line flags to a sqr report running through process scheduler? Using override options in the process definition in the Process Scheduler in the People Tools. 27. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes . The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 28 .How does peoplesoft Process monitor knows that the process (Say sqr report) is at what stage such as initiated, in process, completed etc From the Field Value of ‘RUNSTATUSDESCR’field from ‘PS_PMN_PRCSLIST’ table.

29. How can u Debugging SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 3. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 30. How to refer a global variable in local procedure? After special character (ex.#,&) we use underscore(_) after that variable name. 31. What is -Bnn flag? This is used to specify the number of rows that are to be taken from Dbase to the Buffer because default the system takes 10 rows at a time. 32. What is -Tnn flag? This is mainly used for testing purpose. We can restrict the system to generate only a specific number of pages instead of generating all pages for testing. This is used in Windows Environment. 33. What is -RS & -RT Flags? RS is used to generate SPF file ie; stopping the program after the comilation. _RT is used to run the SPF file .This is also one kind of Performance increasing technique by saving the compilation time. 34. What are the sections in Sqr? Which one is necessary? Setup, Heading, Footing, Program & Procedure Sections. Program section is the Mandatory section. 35. What is -debug command line flag? This is used for Debugging in SQR. 36. How to place an corporate logo in sqr? Using “Declare Image” command 37. what are the debugging commands in sqr? Show & Display are debugging commands 38. what is the difference between them? Show is used to display more than one variable at a time. Display is used to display only one variable at a time.

PeopleSoft SQR Interview Questions,SQR Interview Questions asked in MNCs given below What are the Important SQC are need to be attached? How do you do Performance tuning of SQR? Did you worked with functions, procedures in SQR? Can we call two Procedures in On-Break? If yes Then How? How can you send emails using SQR What are the compulsory SQC's that should be used in SQR Program? How do you generate two output files from one SQR. What is hierarchy in Arrays in SQR? What is the difference in using inner join and outer joins? Did you worked with functions, procedures in SQR? Can we include SETENV.SQC at the end of the SQR program? If "NO" then why? How do you include SQCs in middle of the program? Is it possible ?

We wish to print the EMPLID in the BARCODE Format. What are the commands we have to be used in SQR? What are the compulsary SQC's that should be used in SQR Program? What is Calculated,Dependent and Conditional Marter Inspection Characteristic? Explain Normalization in oracle? What is difference between Load Look up and Array What is search Record? What is the program flow of SQR? What are the validation is done in SQR program before loading in to the database? How to create SQC? How to connect other application in component interface? What is the main difference between SQR and APP ENGINE? How do you decide between appeng/Ci and SQR while conversion? What is Outer join, inner join in sql? Explain the difference between Translate & Prompt tables. What are the occasions when to use Translate values instead of Prompt table? What is the advantage of one over the other? What is the difference between BI,CI and IB? Tell me your experience with CI?

IBM Realtime Interview Questions on Peoplesoft 1. Advantages of People Code? 2. Why SQR is used and advantages of SQR? 3. How are you running your HRMS systems either by JOBCODE or by POSITION_NBR? 4. What is the challenging and complicated People code you have written? Why do you think it is complicated? 5. What is the challenging and complicated SQR you have written why do you think it is complicated? 6. Steps involved in Data Conversion? Extract data from the legacy system Reconcile the extracted data Identify the tables to be leaded with the new system Data Mapping Identify the tools (SQR or Import Manager or SQL Loader etc) Write programs to perform conversion Test the programs using test data Check the data outline Reconcile concerted data. 7. Why SQR is used? Data conversion

Reports Interface programs. 8. SQR Runtime flags? 9. Import SQC files? 10. How do you link SQR reports to process scheduler? Create/modify/add run control table if you have any new fields Create/modify/add run control panel if you have any program inputs Create a menu definition (Note Menu group name: XYZ) Give operator security Create Process scheduler definition Use-Process definition – process definition add Give report name and report type Give menu group name (XYZ) 11. How do you create operator classes / users? 12. What are variable types in SQR? & Data base reference fields – Read only $ Character (Same for Date) # Numeric { } Variable in ASK or # define [$ variable] Dynamic variable referencing 13. How do you format in PRINT (9,X, B, etc)? 14. How many types of display views are there in Data Designer? 15. What is a record definition? 16. What are the types of record definitions? SQL Tables SQL views Dynamic views Derived / Work Records Sub Records Query views 17. What is an Application Processor? 18. Types of People code? Search Field Row Save Workflow 19. Field Edit Vs Field change? 20. Save edit Vs save pre change Vs save post change? 21. Scroll select Vs scroll select new? 22. SQL EXEC Vs Scroll select? 23. Scroll select Vs Row Scroll select?

24. Row scroll select Vs Row scroll select new? 25. Table loading Sequence (installation)? Company table Installation Location Department Salary Plan Salary step Job code Pay group Benefit Programs 26. What are FUNCLIB* records? 1. What is a set ID or Table set? It is going share common control table values. 2. What is an object group? Collection of one or more objects that form a logical group for security purpose. 3. What is business Process Map? It is an alternative method for accessing panels or it is a graphical representation of a map. 4. What is an activity? It is a collection of logical steps. It represents specific transaction a user might need to perform. 5. What is a business Process? It is a collection of activities and it represents broad area functionality, categorizing the several activities. 6.What is a Process? A task involved by the system. 7. What is a process instance? It is a process number used to request process. 8. What is a process server agent? It is going to initialize, select and parse the program. 9. What is a command line parameter? The executable (.EXE) file is nothing but command line parameter. E.g. C:/SQLbin\SQL.exe. 10. What is Parameter List? It defines under what database, platform will the program. (Nothing but the meta-strings) 11. What is Application Upgrade? It is a migration of object from one database to another and updating other system components such as application software. 12. What is Mass change and explain the uses of Mass change? Mass change is a SQL generator you can use to develop and perform custom applications. Using mass change, a developer can set up a series of INSERT, UPDATE, OR DELETE SQL statements that the end user can execute to perform business functions. The overall structure of Mass change is similar to that of People soft Query Except that Query retrieves data from the database while mass change actually updates the database. The uses of Mass change are as follows. 1. It is used to perform high volume set oriented transactions. 2. Copy data from table or table 3. Archive table data (Archive means that the data does not have backup file and uses to update the values) 13. Why use Mass change and why not SQL execute to update a record, which is not attached to the panel? The reason why Mass change is preferred over SQL exec is….

1. Two- Three Mass change program can work at a single time. 2. Data / information need not be defined in Mass change 3. Mass change can be used for file download upload. 14. What are the steps involved in Mass change? The following are the order of steps involved in Mass change. `1. Define type 2. Assign to template 3. Operator security 4.Mass change definition 15. What is Mass change group? Adding all Mass change into a group. (i.e., Multiple Mass change definitions can be executed simultaneously). 16. What is workflow? To an extent all the business processes defined using the Application designer involve workflow. However we usually reserve the term to refer to processes that involve multiple users and the routing of data between the users. People soft workflow tools help you build the routings into your computer systems. You use them to tie together the individual steps so that the system can help coordinate the activities. 17. How Workflow is controlled? It is controlled by Decision Point (it is graphically denoted by a (?)). Where user has to choose which activity is appropriate towards the next step. 18. What are the key fields used in Key list? 7 key fields used in a key list. They are as follows.. 1. Busprocname- (Business Process Name) 2. Activity name 3. Event name 4. Work list name 5. Instance Id 6. Transaction Id 7. Emplid Note: While defining the above fields in the record definition, a key has to be assigned in the record field properties. 19. What is routing in workflow? Transfer of roles / users 20. Why workflow is used and explains the advantage of workflow in People soft application? Workflow typically eliminates the job tasks associated with controlling paper flow, and frees people the once performed clerical functions to do more meaningful work. • Tasks that don’t require user involvement • Tasks that involve non People soft users • Tasks that several users work on together. 21. Define the components of workflow? There are 3 underlying components of workflow i.e., Rules, Roles, Routing. Rules Rules are your company’s business practices captured in software. Rules determine what activities are required to process your business data. The rules are contained in policies and procedures documents. Roles Roles describe how people fit into the workflow. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as clerks or managers. Your business rules typically specify what user role needs to do an activity. Roles direct the work to types of people rather than to individuals. Identifying roes instead of individual users makes your workflow more flexible and easier to maintain. Roles remain stable even as people change jobs. Routings Routings connect the activities in the workflow. They are the systems means of moving information from one place to another, from one step to the next. Routings bring the flow into workflow. The network of routings creates a business process from what

used to be isolated activities. Routings make it possible to deploy applications throughout the enterprise. They work through the levels and departments of an enterprise to bring together the role that are necessary to complete complex tasks.

50 interview questions

1. Explain about the work you have one on People soft? 2. How do you use select data in People code (A) Fetch value (Record, recordname, field name, taeget_row ) OR Fetch value (record, record name, field name, current row number (123)? 3. What is a scroll select? 4. Limitations of SQLEXEC? 5. Work record Vs Derived Record? 6. What is the complicated code you have written in People code and why do you think it is complicated? 7. What is the complicated code you have written in SQR and why do you think it is complicated? 8. How do you Debug (Application Reviewer)? 9. Levels in Panel Designer? 10. How do you link crystal reports? 11. Ordinary record Vs Work record? 12. What is a record in PS? 13. Record Vs Table? 14. How many types of records are there in PS? 15. PS database management? 16. Arrays in SQR? 17. How do you arrange fields in SCROLL area? 18. How do you sort the data in SQR in being select (Using ORDER BY clause)? 19. Where do you write People code? 20. How do you modify table/record? 21. Limitations of Scroll select? 22. Nested select in SQR? 23. Inner join / outer join? 24. Show / display in sqr? 25. Ask / Input in sqr? 26. How do you audit in PS (In Menu designer)? 27. How do you rename panel / field / record and what are the consequences / effects?

28. What is ENCODE in oracle? 29. Explain about Operator and Object security and differentiate operator security is at min level Object security for object level? 30. Add / Update display / Update display all / correction with respect to EFFDT? 31. EFFDT Vs EFFSEQ? 32. Translate table Vs Prompt table? 33. Your strong and weak points? 34. What is your role in the project? 35. What are the modifications or customizations you have done in PS? 36. Project team size and your role? 37. What are the modifications or customizations you have done in existing SQR? 38. Batch process in HRMS? 39. Audit tables? 40. Import manager Vs SQR? 41. What are the important tables that you use in Personal Administration? 42. What are the important tables that you use in Benefits? 43. What are the important tables that you use in Pay roll? 44. Explain about your experience? 45. What are new developments you have done in PS? 46. What are the new reports you developed in SQR (Interface, Conversion, Formatted)? 47. Advantages of People Tools? 48. Advantages of People Code? 49. Why SQR is used and advantages of SQR? 50. How are you running your HRMS systems either by JOBCODE or by POSITION_NBR? Real Time 1. What is PIA and what are its components? It is n-tier architecture. We have client, web server, application server and Database server. We have jolt and tuxedo. We have WSL, WSH, JSL, JSH, QUEUES and services. In database server we have system tables, peopletools tables and application tables. 2. Differentiate Field edit and Save edit? In Field edit for each field change, a transition to the application server to the database is taken place. In Save edit for all the fields, only one transition to the application server to the Database is taken place. 3. What are think time functions? Think-time functions suspend processing either until the user has taken some action (such as clicking a button in a message box), or until an external process has run to completion.

4. In which events error & warning are used most extensively. Field edit, Save edit, Search save, row delete, row insert. 5. Is there any way by which you can find out whether the user is in Add mode or Update mode? %mode---returns A---for Add mode. Returns U –for Update mode 6. What is the purpose of the SQLEXEC function? What are its benefits and draw backs? SQLEXEC is used to execute the sql statements (select, insert,update,delete). We can get only one row at a time. 7. How is the searchinit event most often used by people soft application? A) Searchinit fires before the search dialogue page is displayed to the end user.For this reason searchinit is often used to enhance roll level security by inserting and graying out certain values to the search dialogue page. 8. What are the options for using SQL in people code? a) Sqlexec b) Record class methods (selectbykey, delete, insert, update) c) Using sql class, its properties and methods. 9. What is the difference between component buffer and data buffer? Component buffer contains all the data of the active component. Data buffer contains the data other than the data in the component buffer (Data of other records) 10. What databuffer classes are available in people code? Rowset, Row, Record, Field, Array, File, Sql, chart, grid and so on. 11. When we select a component what events will be fired? If default mode for component is search mode: only searchinit will fired .If default mode for component is new mode :field default, field formula, rowinit, searchinit. 12. What are different variables in people code and their Scope? System variables and User defined variables. Scope --- Global, Component, Local. 13. What is default processing? In default processing, any blank fields in the component are set to their default value. You can specify the default value either in the Record Field Properties, or in FieldDefault PeopleCode 14. What is difference between field default and Row init? Field default specifies only the default value for a field when we are in Add mode. Row init fires only when a row of data coming from database to component buffer. 15. What is difference between saveprechange and savepostchange? Which function directly interacts with the database? Saveprechange---last event that executes before updating the data from component buffer to the database. Savepostchange –fires after the updation of data in the database. SQLEXEC --- function directly interacts with the database. 16. What is Getlevel 0()? What is the use of %subrec and %selectall functions? Getlevel0 ()---used the get the rowset of the level0. %subrec--is used only in Dynamic View SQL where it expands to the columns of a subrecord: %selectall--%SelectAll is shorthand for selecting all fields in the specified record, wrapping date/time fields with %DateOut, %TimeOut. 17. What is an array in people code? What is maximum dimension of an array? Which function inserts values into an array? What is “pop”? An array is a collection of data storage locations, each of which holds the same type of data. The maximum depth of a PeopleCode array is 15 dimensions. Push and unshift are the functions of the array used to add the elements into the array one from the end of the array and one from the beginning. Pop is a function of array used to select and delete an element from the end of the array.

18. What is difference between Getrowset and Createrowset in people code? Getrowset –is used to get rowset for a record in the component buffer. Createrowset—is used to create rowset for a record which in database, and is also called a Standalone rowset 19. Can you save the component programmatically? Using Dosave and Dosavenow functions. 20. What is differed processing and its advantages? Postpones some user actions to reduce the number of trips to the database so that increases the performance (in system edits, field edit, and field change). Advantages: 1) Reduces the network traffic. 2) Increases the performance. 33. Write the syntax to access third level record field using object oriented peoplecode? &fld=Getlevel0 ()(1).GetRowset(Record..GetRow(1), GetRowset (Record.).GetRow(1), GetRowset (Record.).GetRow(1), GetRecord (Record.).GetFieild(Field.)) 21. What are the built-functions used to control translate values dynamically? Adddropdownitem () Deletedropdownitem () 22. How to populate data into grid in online? &Rs.Select or Scrollselect (). SECURITY Before accessing a people soft application what levels of security must be passed through. a) Field level security b) Row level security c) Maintain security d) Definition security e) Portal security. 23.What is the use of primary permission list in user profile? Primary permission list is used for mass change and definition security purposes. How to authorize the user to run a process or report? To authorize a user to run a process, the process group, which contains the process or report, should be added to the permission list of that user. 24.How to give access to the records that are to be used in a query? To give access to the records that are to be used in query, we have create a new query security tree and add the records which we want to give the access and then assign a access group to the tree. After that we have to add that query tree and query access group to the permission list. 25.What are the rules used by the system to determine whether a user is authorized to update an object? The user should have the permission to update the object. This is given by the Definition security. The group, which holds the object, should be added to the permission list of the user in update mode. What are the different ways we can set up the portal security to access component in portal? 1) Structure & content 2) Menu import 3) Register component

1. What is Application Engine?
It is the tool, which performs, background SQL processing against our application data tables. It is an alternative for COBOL, SQL or SQR Programs. Other tools such as query tool and mass change generate SQL. 2. What are the parts of Application Engine? Application Engine consists of 4 parts. 1. Application: It is a set of SQL statements. 2. Steps: It is the smallest unit of work committed in an application. 3. Sections: Comprises of 1 or more steps

4. Statements: SQL statements like update, insert, delete or select are issued. 3. What is the advantage of using Application Engine? The following are the advantages of using Application Engine. Encapsulation Unlike applications developed using COBOL or SQR, Application Engine applications reside completely within your database. With Application Engine, there are the programs to compile, no statements to store, and no need to directly interact with the operating environment in use. You can build, run and debug your applications without existing People Tools. Effective Dating Application sections are effective dated-meaning you can activate/deactivate a section as of a particular date. This enables you to archive sections as you modify them, instead of destroying them. In the future if you decide to revert to a previous incarnation of a section you can simply reactivate it. SQL / Meta-SQL Support In addition to writing your SQL within Application Engine, you can also copy SQL statements into Application Engine from SQL talk or any other SQL utility with few – if any changes. RDBMS platforms have many differing syntax rules – especially in regard to date, time and other numeric calculations. For the most part you can work around this problem using Meta-SQL which Application Engine supports. This language was created to handle different RDBMS SQL syntax’s by replacing them with a standard syntax, called Meta-strings. With in Platform specific sections You can also have the ability to call generic portions of SQL statements by using the & CLAUSE function. This means you can write your generic SQL portions just once, and reference them from your different platform versions. Set Processing Support Set processing is a SQL technique used to process groups (or sets) of rows of one time rather than one at a time. Application Engine is particularly effective of processing these types of applications. Object Orientation Unless designed to anticipate changes in field attributes. COBOL applications may need to be modified when things change. If a developer increases a field’s length, then it may need to be changed in every instance where the COBOL program uses this field as a bind or select variable. This can require a good bit of effort. And, if not handled properly, a change like this can cause confusing errors. For example, if the length of a field in the COBOL is wrong, it may work fine, or you may get an error, or the field may get truncated. One of the corner stones of People soft functionality is Application Designer. Because of the way it works, most field attributes (type, length and scale) can be specified once, globally. If the field is used on more than one record, it has the same attributes in each of these records. PORTABILITY You can use Data Mover to import/export your applications. This means that you can export an application(s) into a file, and attach it to an e-mail message. Then, the recipient can simply use the IMPORT feature of Data Mover, and the application is ready to run. 4. What is a Cache Record? The Cache record (or cache) is a physical People soft record, keyed by process instance that must be created and maintained by the Application Engine developer. This record defines the fields that an application uses to pas values from one SQL statements to another. You retrieve cache field values by the Application Engine and BIND function; you assign cache values using & SELECT. 5. What is unique about panels, which refer to view as opposed to physical tables? Panels that refer to views in People soft are not used for insert, update or delete. All fields on these panels are display only. 6. How search records are used? Search records are used to search, retrieve and filter data. Search records also define the structure of the dialog box. 7. Where are the search records assigned? Search records are assigned to a panel group in a menu. 8. Does the search record for a panel has to be the same as the record being Accessed on the panel? Why or Why not? The search record for the panel does not have to be the same as the record being Accessed on the panel because the search record is used to search for and or Filter the search key. 9. How can a search record dialog box be suppressed? A search record dialog box can be suppressed by assigning a search record that does not have search key.

10. What do search views delivered by People soft do besides displaying the dialog Box? Search views delivered by People soft are used to implement row level security as well as display a dialog box. 11. What do you need to do to modify the search views? To modify a search view, we need to change the record definition and recreate the underlying SQL view. 12. When would you have to alter the tables and modify the panels, in the process of modifying search records? You need to alter tables and modify panels, when you modify a search record to include a new field. 13. When will there be two occurs level records in a panel group? If you are referring to two different record definitions that share a same high-level key then two-level one-scroll bar can be displayed as stacked scroll bars. 14. In what order does the application processor fill buffer for the panel group? The application processor uses occurs level in the panel group to fill the buffer. 15.Differentiate Error V/s Warning statements in People code? The error statement issues a message and the condition causing the error must Be corrected before proceeding. The warning statement issues a message and The user can proceed without changing any values. 16. Where can you run Jobs? The process scheduler can run jobs on the client or a server machine. 17. What restrictions are placed on multi-process jobs? A multi process jobs can only be scheduled to run on a server. 18. List the three output destinations available through the Process Scheduler? You can direct the output to a printer file and windows screen. 19. Where do you set up default operator / class options for Process Monitor? In operator security, using change, process profile. 20. What are the advantages of incorporating Table set ids into People soft applications? Table set Ids allow you to share sets of values (codes) in the same prompt table. 21. What fields should be at the tope of every search record definition that use table set Ids? SET ID is the field that should be at the top of every record definition that uses table set Ids. 22. What is a Record Group ID? A Record group ID is a group of record definitions that are Sharing the same set control field. 23. What do you determine using Table set Ids control information? Table set ID control information determines how the information should be shared. The Table set ID control panel defines which Table set Ids set control filed code will use for each record group. 24. What are the three types of Maps used by the navigator? The 3 types of Maps used by the navigator are.. 1. Business Process Map 2. Activity Map 3. Step Map 25. What are the types of layers in Crystal reports? There are 4 types of layers in Crystal Reports. They are.. 1. Report Header - In this, we will write title, date, and logos of the company. 2. Page Header – Used to write column headings. 3. Detail – Contains database column values. 4. Page Footer – Used to write page numbers and address.

3. How to define parent-child relations in people soft? Some times while creating records, you'll have a field within a table for which you want to allow multiple occurrences, in which case you create a subordinate or child table. For ex. For employee reviews, an employee can be reviewed for performance in multiple categories organization skills, interpersonal skills etc.,. These categories and ratings are stored in a separate child table, EE_REVIEW_RT, which is related to REVIEW_DT, the parent table which stores data about employee reviews. The keys you set on parent record will determine which keys are required on any child records. The child must have the same keys as the parent, plus one or more keys that uniquely identify each row. 4.Can we assign default value for a field in Data Designer? Yes, we can assign a default value to a field. Record field properties - Use - Default value 5.How do we create custom field format? Custom field format allows you to create your own format definitions using format notation, and apply them to fields. These formats are organized into Format Families, which can include one or more unique formats. 6.What are the keys available in People soft? Key - Search Key - Duplicate Order Key - Alternate Search Key - Descending Key 7.What is significance of 'Rs Dt' in Data Designer? Reasonable date specifies whether a reasonable date test will be performed on a date field. The reasonable date test warns if the date is outside a 30-day range before and after the current date. 8.What is a prompt table? If you want to provide prompt support for a field based on the data stored in a separate table, enter the name of the table you want to use as the Prompt Table at: Record field properties - Edits - Prompt table. This will enable users to position their cursor on the field and press F4 to prompt for a list of values stored on the table. For example, let's say that we want users to enter Employees IDs in the EMPLID field, which is stored in PERSONAL_DATA. By entering PERSONAL_DATA as the Prompt Table, users simply press F4 on EMPLID to select from a list of Employee ID values for this field. 9.What is Translate/xlatt field? The translate table is a table that stores values for fields that need to be validated but don't need individual tables of their own. 10.What is the maximum field length for an xlatt field and what data types does it support? Max field length – 4, ‘CHAR’ Datatype. 11.What is the significance of 'No Edit ' in edits section in Data Designer? If you don't want to establish any special edits for a record field click 'No Edit' option button in Record field properties - Edits 12.What is Set control field, where can it be utilized? When you enter a name in Prompt Table (Record field properties - edits) and tab off the field, Set Control Field is activated. This enables you to select a Set Control Field that overrides the Set Control Field of the record definition specified in Prompt table. If you don't

specify a name in this field, it defaults to the Set Control Field of the table specified in prompt table. 13. What is Cache how does it useful for clients? The Cache or Cache record is a PS record, keyed by process instance that must be created and maintained by the Application Engine Developer. This record defines the fields that an application uses to pass values from one SQL statement to another. When an application is started, a row in the cache record is created for the assigned process instance. It is then updated by application engine whenever a COMMIT is performed. The cache row is deleted upon successful completion of the application. 14. What is Query Security Record? Query Security Record is to secure access to a particular record using a security view. 15. What is a Dynamic view record? Record def that can be used like a view in panels and People code, but is actually not stored as a SQL View in the database. Instead, Application Processor uses the text as a base for the SQL SELECT that is executed at runtime. Dynamic views some times provide superior performance such as search records. 16.What is the use of Derived/work record? A temporary work space to be used during online panel processing. A derived or work record is not stored on the database, so you don't build it. 17.What is Query view, how to define it? A view constructed using People soft Query tool. 18. What is the use of Search key and list box item? When you turn on Search Key, the system will include this field in the search dialog for a panel. And it automatically turns on the List Box item. Turn on the List Box Item if you want the field to appear in F4 prompt lists and in the list box preceding a panel. 19.Can we rename a field/record, How does it effect front-end and database? When you rename a record definition, the system automatically renames all references to it in Peoplecode except in the text portion of the SQL Functions, such as SQLExec and Scroll Select. If you have already SQL Created the underlying tables for the record definition you renamed, you'll need to recreate the table. If you have data in this table you want to preserve, you should use the SQL Alter function to rename the data base tables. When you rename a field, the system automatically renames all references to it in Peoplecode, except in the text portion of the SQL functions such as SQLExec and Scroll Select. 20.Can we delete a field in the record structure? You cannot delete a field if it is currently used on any records. Before you delete a field, you must first remove it from any records where it resides. 21.How exactly index are built in application designer? Using Application Designer, you create several kinds of object definitions that represent database components. Record definitions represent tables, indexes and views. The Build process is the centerpiece of Application Designer, which uses DDL to construct a database component (index is one such component) based on the associated records and fields. Some indexes are defined automatically, based on the search key, list box items and alternate search keys you set in your records. However it is sometimes necessary to define additional indexes to improve the performance.

22.What are system tables, application tools table, User tables in peoplesoft? System Catalog Tables Ptools Tables Application Tables Sysobjects PSRECDEFN JOB_DATA Syscolumns PSPNLDEFN PERSONAL_DATA 23.What is audit? How many types of audits available in peoplesoft? For some field values, you may want to keep a history of who adds, changes, or deletes data. When you set the options for tracking that info it is called auditing. When you turn on the Audit field options (Record field properties - Use) Psoft track the info into PSAUDIT table. Three types of audits are available in peoplesoft? Field Add: Audits the field whenever a new row of data is added. Field Change: Audits the field whenever the contents are changed. Field Delete: Audits the field whenever a row of data is deleted. 24.What is the System Maintain field in Record field properties - Use? The System maintained option is for system documentation purposes only and doesn't affect processing. Check this if you want to document that the field value is system-generated. 25.What is a Subrecord? A SubRecord by definition allows you to add a group of fields that are commonly used in multiple record definitions. A SubRecord must be defined before it can be entered into a record definition. Insert - SubRecord 26.What are Sub panels? If you have groups of controls, such as address controls, that you use on multiple panel definitions, you can save it as a subpanel. And insert this sub panel wherever you want. 27.What are Secondary panels? Secondary panels are used to gather or display information related to the objects that appear in a primary panel. A secondary panel can be called from the primary panel and used to enter or display additional data without cluttering your primary panel. 29. What is a Related Display field and Display Control field? A related display field is for display purposes only - it always references a row that's not being updated from the current panel. The display control when you select Related Display field, you need to relate it to the appropriate control. A list of all the controls on the panel marked as display control fields in the Related control field box. Select the control field to which this particular related display is related. 30.How many scroll levels are available in peoplesoft? –3. 31.Can we define Child table fields in '0' level? No, Parent tables only can be associated at '0' level. 32.What is a Command Push button? Command Push buttons are associated with a record.field, so when the user presses the push buttons, the Application Processor executes any field change Peoplecode associated with that panel control. 33.What is a menu item and bar name? There are four types of menu items:Panel group: defined only in standard menus

Transfer menu items: defined only in pop-up menus. Peoplecode and Separator menu items: Available for both pop-up and standard menus. 34.What is a panel group? A panel group represents a complete business transaction. It can be composed of either a single panel or a set of panels that should be processed as if it were one panel. Think of it as paging through several pages of a single display. Panel group control : The grouping of panels and their associated labels on a cascading menu - The search record used to retrieve data into the panel - Associated user actions. 35.What is standard / panel group search record ? The panel group search record is the record used to populate the panel group's level-zero search key fields; this enables the system to identify a unique row of data for the level-zero primary records in the panel group's panels, build a panel buffer for the panel group, and display the panel. 36.What is add mode search record? When a different search record (other than standard search record) is specified for Add actions to create special security views that limit the rows operators can add based on specific search criteria or to specify a different search record for add actions. 37.What are the allowed actions in menu? Add, Update/Display, Update / Display All, Data Entry and Correction. 38.What is the main difference between 'update/display' and 'update/display all'? Update / Display - Used to update existing rows only. Update / Display All - Used to update current and future rows in an effective dated record. Only used with effective dated records. 39.How exactly allowed actions work with 'Effdt' panels? Action Type View Change Insert New Rows Update / display Current , Future Future only Eff dt > the current row Update / Display all History, Current Future only , , Future Correction History , Current All existing rows Add new rows with no Future Eff dt restrictions 40.What is a menu group? Menu groups are groups of standard menus that can be accessed from the PeopleSoft Go menu bar. If the menu group contains two or more standard menus, the standard menu labels appear in a cascade menu to the right of the menu group on the Go menu bar. 41.What is an operator and operator class? Operator definitions - commonly referred to as operator Ids, or just operators - have associated pass words. Operator definitions are for each user in your system. An operator can be defined with its own set of system permissions and restrictions, or it can inherit this info from one or more class definitions to which it is linked. Class def have no user passwords associated with them; you can't use a class def to sign on to the system. Instead, u use classes to organize your users into groups with common access rights. Instead of setting up access rights for every operator, you can define just a few classes and link your users to them. 42.What is the purpose of access_id? When you create an operator ID you must assign it an access profile, which specifies an access ID and password. Access ID connects Peoplesoft application(s) with RDBMS, once their password is validated. 43.What is Operator security and Object security?

Object Security is to control access and update to the people tools objects - record def, menu def, proj def, panel and panel group def, tree structures, trees, import def, translate tables and queries. Operator Security is to control when each Peoplesoft user can sign on, which People Tools and application menu items they can access, what processes they can run and more. 44.What is SetID? SetIDs are simply the lables used to identify a TableSet. SetId is an additional primary key in control tables, that enables sharing of control table information across business units. All rows of data in your control tables keyed by the same SetID make up a TableSet. 45.What are the tablesets? A TableSet is a group of rows across your control tables identified by the same SetID. In other words, all rows of data in your control tables keyed by the same SetID make up a TableSet. Tablesets or group of tables enables sharing of control table information and processing options among business units. For ex., using Tablesets you can define a group of Job Codes that can be shared by different business units. 46.What is Application processor? The Application Processor does all the behind scenes (panels) work. Application Processsor the People Tools online processor, manages the flow of data processing as users enter informatiion on panels - builds SQL statements based on the actions performed on panels issues INSERT, DELETE and UPDATE statements to maintain data on the database and SELECT statements to retrieve data. 47.What is the significance of PER099.SQR program? Refresh Employee Data - When you run this report, the system will update the table with data valid before or on the 'As of Date' you specify. 48.What are the paragraphs available in SQR? - SELECT - SQL - DOCUMENT 49.How many kinds of trees are available in tree manager? 53.What function is used for invoking a secondary panel? – DoModal. 54.What is a message agent? The Message Agent is an automated user workstation. Rather then taking input from the keyboard, it receives messages from third-party applications. The messages tell the Message Agent to do some of the same things a user would: navigate a panel group, enter data into the panel fields and save panel. For ex. It could accept a form from an electronic forms package, read its contents and transfer the data to a panel. It acts as an electronic clerk to process requests according to rules defined in workflow. Using the Message Agent API, you can write programs that add data to the PeopleSoft database. 55.What is a role and how to define a role? Roles describes how people fit into the workflow. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as clerks or managers. Business rules specify what user role needs to do an activity. For ex., department managers ( a role) must approve external course requests. 56.What is Work list? A work list is a list of the items awaiting an activity. Users select items from the list, and the system automatically displays the panels they need in order to work on the items. Work lists are automatically created as you route items to them. To define a worklist, you just need to

create a worklist record definition and define worklist routings. 58.What is Global variable and local variable, how to declare them? A global variable, once declared in any Peoplecode program, will remain in scope throughout the PeopleSoft session. The Global statement allows you to declare PeopleCode global variables. The variable must be declared with the Global statement in any PeopleCode program in which it is used. A local variable remains in scope for the life of a PeopleCode program. They cannot be declared inside of function declarations; that is, there are no function-level local variables. 59.What is the purpose of CreatObject function in peoplecode? CreateObject return an instance of an OLE Automation object as a variable of type object. CreateObject (str_class_name) Where str_class_name identifies a class of OLE Automation object, in the form: App_name.object_name Ex., local object &WORKSHEET &WORKSHEET = CreateObject ( "Excel.Sheet"); 62.What is Tuxedo? The application server, the centerpiece of PeopleSoft's three-tier architecture, utilizes Tuxedo, BEASystems' transaction monitor, to manage and monitor client transactions. When a client work station requests sends requests to the application server where Tuxedo then schedules a PeopleSoft service, such as Panel Group Build or Save. BEA tuxedo software for thewindows and web client comes bundled with Peopletools - embedded in PeopleSoft's binary directory. 65. Which PeopleTool is used to input peoplecode? - Application Designer. 67. When is PeopleCode case sensitive? PeopleCode is only case sensitive within a quoted literal. 68. What are the most commonly used PeopleCode events? FieldChange, RowInit, SaveEdit, FieldEdit, FieldDefault, and SavePreChange in that order. 69. In which PeopleCode would you code errors and warnings? SearchSave, FieldEdit, SaveEdit and RowDelete primarily. You may also code errors and warnings in RowSelect. 70. What is the biggest draw back to Fieldformula? Since FieldFormula is performed every time the panel is displayed on every row of data, its biggest drawback is the performance overhead it adds. 71. What other PeopleCode event might you expect to find with RowInit? FieldChange. Since RowInit initializes the data before it is displayed, usually it is used along with FieldChange to accommodate any of the changes that are performed by the operator once the panel is displayed. 72. How do FieldEdit and FieldChange differ? The main difference between FieldEdit and FieldChange is how Error and Warning statements are handled. In FieldEdit, Error and Warning statements will cause the panel to be displayed with a

message informing the operator of a possible problem. In FieldChange, Error and Warnings statements cancel the panel group. 73. How does SaveEdit differ from FieldEdit? SaveEdit and FieldEdit are both used for validation, but each one is performed at a different time. SaveEdit performed when the operator saves, FieldEdit is performed when the operator changes a field. SaveEdit is also performed on every row of data; FieldEdit is only performed on one row of data. When an error is received in FieldEdit, the field turns red; in SaveEdit field do not turn red. 74. How does SavePostChg differ from all other Peoplecode events? SavePostChg is different from all other Peoplecode events since it is performed after the updates are made on the database. 75.What built-in function will you probably see in SavePostChg programs? Since SavePostChg usually updates tables that are not contained in the buffers, the built-in function SQLExec is often used to perform these updates on the database. 76. Can calculated fields be stored on SQLTables ? Should they? Calculated fields usually are not stored on SQLtables. However, they might be if the calculated field is being passed to an interface that does not have access to the fields needed to calculate the field again. 77. Why would a derived/work field be used? A derived / work field may be used to store and display a calculated value on a panel or to pass a value from one PeopleCode program to another.

78. How is a record definition indicated as a derived / work record? A record definition is indicated as a derived / work record by selecting the "Derived/Work" radio button under the Type tab in the record properties. 79. What major difference is there between derived/work fields and other fields on panel definitions? Derived / Work fields can be on any occurs level and do not need to come from the primary record definition for the level. 80. What types of variables can you define in PeopleCode? Local an Global variables. 81. What happens if you don't declare a variable? If a variable is not declared PeopleCode will assume it is a local variable. 82. How long do local variables last? Local variables are retained in memory only until the PeopleCode program ends. 83. Why are application specific people-code functions used? PeopleCode functions are used to perform the same logic in multiple programs while only having to maintain it in one place. 84. How is an external PeopleCode function declared?

An external PeopleCode function is declared at the top of the program where the function will be used with a Declare function statement. The only PeopleCode that can be above a Declare Function statement is Comments. 85. How is a PeopleCode function called? A PeopleCode function is called by referencing the function name and then passing the function the appropriate number of parameters in parentheses. 86. How must a PeopleCode function be defined so that it can be used as a variable in the calling program? In order for a PeopleCode function to be used as a variable, it must be defined using a "Returns" in the Function statement. Also, at least one "Return" statement must be used in the function code. 87.Why is the Message Catalog used? The Message Catalog is used to store the text of error and warning messages that will be used in PeopleSoft applications. This allows the same message to be used in more than one PeopleCode program while only maintaining it in one place. It also prevents the text of messages from being hard-coded into Peoplecode programs. 88.How is a message added to the Message Catalog? To add a new message to the Message Catalog, the correct message set should first be retrieved. A new message can be added to the set by performing a row insert (F7). The new message number will automatically be assigned. 89. Which message sets does PeopleSoft reserve as its own? Message sets 1 through 19,999 are reserved for use by PeopleSoft applications. Message sets 20,000 through 29,000 can be used by PS users. 90. How is a message retrieved from the Message Catalog in PeopleCode? To retrieve a message from the Message catalog in PeopleCode, the MsgGet built in function is used. The required parameters of the function are message set, number and a default message. 91. When should WinMessage be used? The WinMessage built-in function is used to display an information message to the operator without performing normal error and warning processing. It also can be very helpful when used for debugging. 92. What is the purpose of Gray, UnGray, Hide, and UnHide? These built-in functions change the display characteristics of fields on a panel. The Gray built-in function will make the field display-only. The Hide will make the field invisible. This is helpful when enforcing field level security. 93.What does SetDefault do? The SetDefault built -in function will clear out the contents of the field. The record default or FieldDefault PeopleCode can than be applied if appropriate. 94. Why are All and None used? The All and None built-in functions check for the presence or absence of a value that the operator has entered. This can be helpful since a different value may be stored on the

database if a value is not entered into a field based on its type. 95. When would FieldChanged, RecordChanged, RecordDeleted, RecordNew, and PanelGroupChanged be used? These built-in functions can be used in SaveEdit, SavePreChg, or SavePostChg programs to filter down the processing to occur only when necessary. 96. Why is PriorValue used? The PriorValue built-in function is used to determine the value of a field before it was changed. 97.What is the CurrentRowNumber? It is the number of the row of data the application processor is performing PeopleCode on in the buffers on the client workstation. 98.How does AddToDate work? This function is passed a date field and then the number of years, months and days to add. Leap years are automatically taken into consideration, and negative numbers may be passed as parameters to subtract from the date. 99. Which two cross reference reports are best for PeopleCode? How do they present their data? XRFFLPC reports for one field all of the PeopleCode programs where it is referenced. XRFPCFL does the opposite. It reports for one PeopleCode program all of the fields it uses. 100. What does Find in PeopleCode do? The Find in PeopleCode utility will scan through all of the PeopleCode on a database looking for a specific character - string. 101.When is it useful to select the Export to File option in Find in PeopleCode? An Export report produces an unformatted copy of all of the source code where the character string was found. This can be very helpful in an upgrade. 102. How can you use WinMessage as part of the debugging process? A WinMessage can be used to set break points and display the current value of fields and variables in the PeopleCode debugging process. 104. What is the name of the file created by the trace? DBGI.TMP which is stored in TEMP directory. 105. How do you turn off the PeopleCode trace? The PeopleCode trace can be stopped by turning off all of the check boxes on the PeopleCode trace control panel and selecting the set push button. It can also be turned off within PeopleCode by passing the parameter zero to the SetTracePC built-in function. Once the PeopleSoft session is closed, the PeopleCode trace will also automatically be turned off. 106. How many rows of data can there be at occurs level 0? There can only be one row of data for each record definition at occurs level 0. Scroll bars are not allowed at this level.

107. How many rows of data can be there at occurs level 1? There can be multiple rows of data for each record definition at occurs level 1 since a scroll bar can be used to navigate between them. 108. What must exist at occurs levels 1,2,and 3 but not occurs level 0? - A scroll bar. 109. How does the application processor allocate buffers to hold data? The application processor starts allocating buffers at occurs level 0 and then works its way down. It uses the panel and record definitions to determine the data it needs. From a panel definition, fields are allocated in TAB order. Generally, if there is one field from record definition on the panel, the entire row will be brought into the buffers. The exceptions are fields that are in the search dialog box, derived work fields and related display fields. 110. What record definitions will perform PeopleCode in a panel group? Any record definition that is not used as a related display record will perform PeopleCode in a panel group. 111. In what order will PeopleCode be performed on the buffers in a panel group? PeopleCode starts at the top of the buffers in a panel group and works its way down to the bottom. The PeopleCode programs on a given row will be performed in the same order as the fields on the record definition. 112. What do ActiveRowCount and FetchValue do? Why are they generally used together? The ActiveRowCount function returns the number of rows at a specific occurs level. The FetchValue built-in function is used to retrieve the value of a field when using a looping statement. The two are usually found together in most For Looping statements. 113. When is UpdateValue necessary? The UpdateValue built - in function must be used when updating the value of a field within a PeopleCode looping statement. 114. How will the syntax of built - in functions change if they are used in a multiple occurs level applications? When built- in functions are used in multiple occurs level applications, the record name and row number of the parent always must be specified. 115. Why are command push buttons used ? What are the advantages? Command push buttons can be used to trigger PeopleCode programs. The advantage of using one is that the operator determines when the program should be performed. 116. What PeopleCode events will a command push button perform? Any FieldEdit and Fieldchange PeopleCode programs on the field where the push button is attached. 117. What are the two different ways to retrieve a bitmap to display on the command push button? Bitmaps can be retrieved from a file using the Browse push button or from the clipboard using the Paste push button. 118. How do you attach a field to a command push button?

A field is attached to a command push button in the panel definition. Select Edit, panel Field properties and modify the field entries under the Record tab. 119.Why should the SortScroll function be used? The SortScroll built-in function can be used to dynamically sort the rows of data within a scroll bar. 120.What are the parameters of the SortScroll function? The occurs level and primary record definition to be sorted, followed by the field to use for the sort with "A" for ascending or "D" for descending. Multiple sort fields can be referenced. 121. Why is the ScrollSelect function used? To control the process of allocating buffers in a panel group using peoplecode, instead of the application processor. 122. What are the parameters of a ScrollSelect function? First the occurs level number and primary record definition of the scroll bar the data will be selected into. These are followed by the select record, and the When Clause within quotes. Bind variables are then passed if necessary. 123. When is the ScrollFlush function used? Is used to remove the rows of data from within a scroll bar without deleting them from the database. 124.What are the parameters of a ScrollFlush function? Name of the primary record definition for the scroll bar where the rows of data will be removed. 125.How and where can a user invoke a popup menu? User can invoke a standard popup menu by right-clicking in an edit box or long edit box. If a developer-defined popup menu is attached to a panel field or to the panel back ground in the panel definition, it can be accessed when the user right - click on the panel field or on the back ground, respectively. 126.What type of actions can a popup menu item perform? A menu item in a developer-defined pop up menu can perform a Transfer, which invokes the panel specified in similar way to if the user selected the panel via menus. It can also run a PeopleCode program attached to the ItemSelected event. 127. How do u associate a popup menu with a panel field? With the panel background? To associate a popup menu with a panel field, select the panel field in the panel definition and access the Panel Field properties. Click the use tab and specify a popup menu. To associate a popup menu with the panel back ground, access the Panel Properties using File, object Properties (or the Properties icon). Click the use tab and specify a popup menu. 128.What PeopleCode event is fired before a popup menu is displayed? PrePopup. It allows you to alter the appearance of the popup menu. 129.What functions may be used to alter the appearance of a menu item? DisableMenuItem, EnableMenuItem, HideMenuItem, CheckMenuItem and

UnCheckMenuItem. 130. What PeopleCode event is fired when the user selects a menu item? ItemSelected. Remember, this is associated with menu PeopleCode rather than record PeopleCode. 131. What are the major uses for SQLExec? The SQLExec built-in function is mainly used to perform SQL Select, Insert, Update and delete statements from within PeopleCode. 132.How can SQLExec aid performance? It can aid performance by only retrieving from the database the data required, instead of an entire row. 133. What PeopleCode event should be used to update other tables with SQLExec? In order to update other tables that are not contained in the buffers on the client workstation with a SQLExec, SavePostChg PeopleCode should be used. This is because SavePostChg is the only PeopleCode event that is performed after the updates have been made to the database. 134. What parameters are passed to the built-in function SQLExec? The SQLExec built-in function is passed the SQL statement to perform within quotes, followed by any bind variables or output variables if necessary. 135. What are Inline variables? How are they used? Inline variables are used to reference the value of fields stored in the buffers in SQL statements. An inline variable consists of a colon followed by the appropriate record and field name to be referenced. 136. How are dates converted within SQLExec statements? Dates are converted within SQLExec built-in function by using the system variables %DateIn and %DateOut. 137. What are the drawbacks of using a SQLExec built in function? Since the SQL statement is contained within quotes, it is a black box to PeopleSoft. Means the programmer is responsible for the syntax, efficiency and maintenance of the SQL. Also, if a SQL Select is being performed within the function, only one row of data can be returned. 138. When should the SQLExec function be used instead of the scroll buffer functions? Dates are converted within SQLExec built-in function by using the system variables %DateIn and %DateOut. 139. Describe the 'modal' aspect of a modal panel group? You may only interact with the objects in the modal panel group dialog box. You cannot interact with the originating panel group nor the menus on the originating window. 141. Compare secondary panels and modal panel groups. Secondary Panels Modal Panel Groups Modal Single panel group Usually only accessed from originating panel Via standard menu Buffer is relating to originating panel Independent buffers Keys must be related to originating panel Keys may optionally relate Can read fields on originating panel Reads only shared fields from o.p. Cannot modify fields on originating panel Can modify shared fields on originating panel Secondary panel push button or Do Modal () Do Modal Panel Group ()

142. How is data synchronized between the originating and modal panel groups? You must add fields from a derived / work record that are shared between the two. You must also add PeopleCode to pass and return values in the derived fields. 143.What are the differences among the OK, Cancel and Apply buttons in a modal panel group? OK and Apply both save the data within the modal panel group. OK also dismisses the dialog box, Apply doesn't. Cancel dismisses the dialog box without saving any changes to the modal panel group. 144. What questions should you ask yourself before starting to implement a modal panel group? Should the originating panel group provide search key values for the modal panel group? If so, what are the search keys? 1.Can we insert sub record into another subrecord? Ans:Yes,we can insert a Sub-record into another Sub-record. When a Sub-record definition is opened goto Insert and Sub-record. 2.Difference between Save Prechange & Save Post change? Ans: In Save Prechange we can get the data from Component Buffer for that particular Component where as in Save Post change Component Buffer is cleared we have to get data from Database and this is used to update values outside the database. 3.What is naming convention of SQR program? Ans:The program must End with ‘.SQR’ extension and the length of name must be <=8 characters. 4.Can we run SQR program through a push button from a page? Ans: Yes we can run using properties of Push Button. That are Specifying Destination = Process Process Type = SQR Report and Name = SQR report name. 5.Order of Execution of Deferred processing? Ans: This is similar to Interactive Processing where as in this Field Change, Field Edit Peoplecode events & System edits will be differed until we press the Save Button. 6.What are Data Buffer Classes in Peoplesoft? Ans: There are totally 4 Data Buffer Classes in Peoplesoft. They are 1.Row Class 3.Field Class 2.Rowset Class 4.Record Class. 7.Define Signon Process? 8.What are Different Functions in PeopleCode? Ans: There Are Totally 4 types of Functions in Peoplecode. They are 1.Builtin Functions 2.Internal Peoplecode Functions 3.External Peoplecode Functions & 4.External Non-Peoplecode functions 9.Does Save Edit & Save Prechange Are in Component Level or Component Record Level? Ans: These are available in Component Level. 10.What are Heading And Footing SQC’s? Ans: These SQC’s are useful for Heading & Footing Sections of an Report. One of the important Footing SQC is ‘RESET.SQC’ . Some of Heading SQC’s are some “PATxxHDG.SQC’. 11.What is Application Messaging?

Ans: This is mainly used to publish or subscribe Messages to other Systems . This is kind of communication as per my knowledge. 12.Where and when do we use SQR? Ans: 1.Where the Programming logic is more. 2. If We need to generate different kinds of reports. 3. Background SQL processing. 4. File Interfacing. Etc… 13. People Code Event sequence Execution Ans: 1.Search Init 2. Search Save 3. Row Select 4. Prebuild 5. Field Default 6. Field Formula 7. Row Init 8. Postbuild 9. Activate 10. Field Edit 11. Field Change 12. Row Insert 13. Row Delete 14. Save Edit 15. SavePrechange 16. Work Flow 17. SavePostchange 14.Steps for Running SQR in PeopleSoft Environment? Ans: There are mainly 3 steps for running SQR in PeopleSoft Environment. 1. Making our SQR program API aware. 2. Creating Run Control Table and Run Control Page (Using PRCSRUNCNTL_SBP sub page). 3. Scheduling our program in Process Scheduler. (PATH: People tools -> Process Scheduler -> Processes). 15. How to change the prompt table Dynamically? Ans: Using People Code function “%Edit Table”. 16. How do you perform People Code Debugging? Ans: 1.First we have to set the Debugger mode by selecting “Enter Debugger Mode” in “Debug” menu in the Application Designer. 2. Next we have find which variables we need to Debug, this we can do by selecting local, component or Global variables from the “Debug” menu. 3.Next we have to set the Breakpoints using “Toggle Break at Cursor” or “Break Point at Start” from the menu items of the “Debug” menu 17.How do you connect to Client Database? Ans: Using VPN (Virtual Protocol Network) Protocol. In our company we use ‘Cytrix’ or ‘Terminal Software’ Software’s. 18. What is PS Enterprise Portal? 19. What is Effective Date? Ans: This is an important Concept for an ERP using this we can enter more than one values to row for the same key fields depending on date. Here we can maintain History, Current & future rows. We can also maintain more number of rows for same effective date using Effective Sequence. This concept is mainly used in most of the Control Tables. 20.What is SETID & BUSINESSUNIT? Ans: These are two high level key fields for Control tables & Transaction Tables respectively.

These fields play a vital role in People soft. 21.How to build customer indexes? Ans; By using Key fields & Alternate search key we can create system indexes. Where as we can create User defined indexes using App. Designer. Path is: In menus Tools -> Data Administration -> create indexes. 22.What are types of instances in which you are working? Ans: In our company we have Development & Testing Instances of databases. I worked on Development Instance.

23.How do you interact with client and how do you deliver output to client? Ans: 24.Current Version working? Ans; I am presently working on Tools 8.42 & HRMS Application 8.8 . 25 Purpose of Upgrade Tab? Ans: This is mainly used for version up gradation.

26. How do you send project to client and How do you test the project? 27. How to Debug AE program and Ways of running AE Program? 28. Which Server do you use & what are the views purposes and different between Search Views & Fast Views? 29. How do you solve Bugs? Ans: Using Debugging Techniques and Messaging in that particular area. 30. Difference between Query Views & Dynamic Views? Ans: 1.Query Views are designed using Query Manager Tool where as we write SQL in Dynamic Views. 2. Query View is Built and Exists in the Database where as Dynamic View can’t be build so it doesn’t exists in Database. 31.How work will be assigned in Production Environment? Ans: Actually I don’t know because I am in Development Environment. 32.How do you assign Search Record to Component? Ans: By going to the component properties , Use Tab and Specifying the search record in that particular area ie; ‘Add Search Record’ Property. 33.How do you move data from legacy system to Peoplesoft? Ans: We can use some Integration Tools such as Component Interface, File Layout & Integration Broker and also using Flat files in SQR. We have some specific commands in Flat files handling in SQR such as OPEN, CLOSE, FOR WRITING, FOR READNG & FOR APPENDING, WRITE and Finally READ commands. 34. Interaction with client? 35. What is your Team size? 36. Say about your team? 37. What is your Role in the Current Project? 38. How will be the interaction with the Team Leader? 39. How do you open a file? Ans: In SQR the Syntax is OPEN ‘filepath’ AS number FOR READING/FOR-WRITING/FOR-

APPENDING… 40.Can we use multiple printers in SQR? Ans: Yes we can use. In SETUP section By Defining printers what we need . we have some SQC’s. 41.What are the variables used in people code? Ans: System Variables, User Defined Variables. & Derived Work record Fields 42.How can we Know whether we are in a particular mode? Ans: Using ‘%Mode’ Built in function. 45. Difference between Interface, Report & Process? Ans: Interface: This is used to interact with other system may be PS or Legacy System Report: This has an user interaction to execute or generate. Process: This is scheduled in Batch Server so there is no need for the user to especially run it. It Automatically Executes. 46. What is State Record? Ans: These are used in Application Engine Programs to pass values between Actions & Sections. 48.Difference between Do Select & Do When? Ans: Do Select is like FOR Loop in C. How many rows it retrieves that many times it performs the Do When & SQl actions below it. Where as Do When is like a condition operator such as IF statement in C. 49.Pupose of App. Engine? Ans: 1.Backgroung SQL processing. 2.To pass data between Modules. 3.To pass data between Databases. 4.To populate Reporting tables using data in Transaction Tables. 5.For integration purpose. 6.Validation of data 7.Data Manipulations. 8.For Version Up gradation. 9.Archive Data .Etc…. 50.Performance Tuning in SQR? Ans: 1.Using LOAD-LOOKUP & LOOKUP. 2.Using ARRAYS. 3.Multiple Reports. 4.Using –S & -Bnn. 5.Using SQT file. 6.Running on Batch Server. 7.Using Proper programming logic in sQR such as BREAK statement in Evaluate. 8.Using proper SQL Statements. 51.File types in SQR? Ans:1. “.SQR”=This is nothing but the SQR source file. 2. “.SQC”=This is a used as functional Libraries. 3. “.Lis”=This is Line Printer Output file. 4. “.SPF”=This is a Portable format file. 5. “.SQT”=This is Complied time file. 6. “.INI”=These files are used to set the default Environment for our SQR Report. 7. “.MAX”=These are used to increase the memory size. 8. “.ERR,.LOG,.DAT”=These are used for Error Handling purpose. 52.List Out some Command Line Flags in SQR? Ans:-S,-A,-KEEP,-ZIV,-XMB,-ZMF,-E,-O,-Debug,-RS,-RT etc…

53.Purpose of the Arguments in the LOAD-LOOKUP? Ans: To Create a Load-Lookup array as per requirement in the arguments. 55.Diff between ASK & INPUT Commands? Ans:”ASK” 1. This is used in the Setup section i.e. . Compile Time Variable. 2. This prompts for the values during the compilation time. 3. This does not have the data type and length. “INPUT” 1. This can be used in other than the Setup section i.e. Run time Variable 2. This prompts for the values during the Execution Time. 3. Here, we can specify the data type and the length. 57. Effdt and EffSeq Quries? Ans:Select * from Table1 A where A.EffDt= (Select Max (B.EffDt) from Table1 B where A.keys B.keys AND A.EffDt<= as of Date) Select * from Table1 A where A.EffDt= (Select Max (B.EffDt from Table1 B where A.keys B.keys AND A.EffDt<= as of Date AND B.EffSeq=(Select Max(C.EffSeq from Table1 C where B.keys=C.keys AND B.EffDt=C.EffDt AND B.EffSeq=C.EffSeq) 58.What is SQC , List out some of them? Ans: SQC is used as Functional Library mainly used to re-use code and get some predefined functionalities used for our SQR programs. Some of the Important SQC are STDAPI.SQC,SETENV.SQC,RESET.SQC,SETUPxx.SQC,NUMBER.SQC,STRING.SQC,DATETIME. SQC etc.. 59.What is Process Scheduler? Ans: This is a People tool used to Schedule and monitor the Execution of any Process or Report or Program in People soft Environment. 62.What is Scroll Area ? How many can we keep on a Page? Ans: Scroll Area is a Page Control which contains Child Records’-Fields which is used to maintain the Parent-Child Relationship between Tables. We can place any number of scroll areas on a page. 63.Duration of the Project? 64.What is Data Mover? Ans: Data Mover is a People tool which is used to move Data between different Databases. 65.Diff between Migration , Import and Export? 66.What are Upgrade Instances of Databases?. 67.To Whom you will Report ? Who Will give Specification to you? 68.Why you are Leaving Current Organization? 69.Where is the Location of the Current Organization? 70.Can we send SQR Output to Ms-Word or Crystal Reports? Ans: Yes. 71.How do we refer Component Buffer in the Object-Based or Procedural-Based People Code? Ans:In Procedural Based People code by using scroll path we can refer. In Object-Oriented People code by Instantiating Objects to Record, Row, Row Set, Field we can refer the Component Buffer. 72.Limitaion of SQL Exec function in People code? Ans:1.Used in only SavePrechange , Workflow , SavePostchange, and for DML commands

and for Select statements used other Event types. 2.Results only one Single row of data. 73.What is the State Record? Ans: State Record is used to pass values between Sections. 74.What are the Actions available in the AE Program? 75.How will you read Data from the CSV file or Excel file and Upload it into the Database using AE Program? Ans: Using File Layout Integration Tool. 76.Why are SQC files used in SQR? 77.Which SQC is used to read Data from the Translate table? Ans: ReadXlat.SQC 79. How will get the System Date in Oracle? 80. Effective Date Event in SQR? 81. What is a Sub-Query? Why it is used? 82.Why is Load-Lookup used in SQR? Ans: Used to increase the performance mainly in the case of Master Detail Reports. 83. Why are Field Edit and Field Change Events Used? 84.Why is Save Edit Event Used? 85.Why is SQLExec function is used and how many rows you can retrieve using it? Ans:This is mainly used to Directly access the Database by-passing the Component Buffer. 86.What is a Sub-Page? Why it is used? Ans:Sub-Page is a Page control which is mainly used to insert Sub-Records. 87.Why is Derived Work record used? Ans:DerivedWork record is mainly used for the Online page calculations and also used as Functional Libraries in People Code. 91.How will you delete the button [Add,Update/Display,Update/DisplayAll and Correction] from a Page on the Browser? Ans:By going to the Internet tab of the Component properties in the App. Designer and disabling the checkboxes as per our requirements. 93.Diff between the User-Profiles, Roles and the Permission Lists? 94.What is the Diff between the Prompt Table and the Translate Table? 95.What is the Purpose of the State-Record? 96.What is the diff between the Local and the Component Variables in the People Code? Ans:Local variable scope is upto that particular program where as the Component variable scope is upto the particular Component. 97.What are the Steps in the Implementation? 98.What are the types of the Table Joins? Ans:1.Self Join 2.Cartesian Join 3.EquiJoin 4.OuterJoin 5.Inner Join 99.How many Objects are there in the PeopleSoft 7.5, 8.1.2 & 8.4.2? 100.How many Events are there in the PeopleCode,When do they get Fired? 101.What is the Architecture of the PIA? What are its Components? 102. How will you read Data from the CSV file or Excel file and Upload it into the Database using SQR?

Ans:Using File-Handling and Unstring Commands. 103.Why is On-Break used? Ans:1.To reduce the Redundancy of Printing the data. 2.For Group-Footing and Group-Headings. 104.Why is the Process Definition in Process Scheduler used and What are the options available in it? 107.Diff between Update/Display,UpdateAll and the Correction modes? 108.How will you display an Image in SQR? Ans:Using Declare-Image Command. 109.Which Sql Commands can be used in the SQL-Paragraph? Ans:Except Select command We can use DDL,DMLand DCL. 110.In which section Select Paragraph Statement be used? Ans:In the Setup, Program and the Procedure sections we can use the Select Paragraphs. 111.What is Effdt and the EffSeq? 112.SQR Debugging? 113.How will perform Error-Handling in SQR? Ans:Using the command line flags –O,-L,-ZMF and –XMB Using SQR commands ON-ERROR=Skip/Warn/Stop, ON-ERROR=Procedure_name 114.How are Multiple-Reports Generated in SQR? 115.What are the ways of Performance Tuning in PeopleCode? Ans: Using Object-Oriented programming and Proper programming logic. 116.Why is ‘SETENV.SQC’ is used? Ans: To set the default Environment for the SQR Report. 117.Why is Process Monitor used and in What is that Which Updates the Status of the Process Monitor? 118.What are the Key-Fields in the PS_JOB and the PS_EMPLOYMENT? 119.In Which record is the Status of the Employee Stored? Ans: PS_JOB. 120.How will you draw a Line of Hyphens in SQR? Ans: Using Fill argument in the Print Command. 121.When an incorrect value is entered in a Field and the Field turned Red then what is the action to be taken? Ans: To Enter the Appropriate value which does not Violate the Field Edit & System Edits of that particular Fields. 122.Can u Declare Multiple Heading sections in one SQR Program? 123.What are the Compile-Time Variables ? How to refer them? 124.What are the Run-Time Variables? 125.What is Dynamic Query Variable ? How to refer? 126.What is SQC ? Purpose of the ‘STDAPI.SQC’? 127.What are the Debugging Commands in the SQR ? Diff between them? 128.What is Load-Lookup? In Which situation you use this Technique? 129.What are the File-Manipulation Commands in the SQR? 130.Is there any Limitations to Opening a File? Ans:To Open a file we have to specify the mode of file and the file must exists.

131.What are the Before and the After Procedures? How is the Execution Sequence? Ans: Before Procedure Level Execution is from 1 to n Level and the After Procedure Level Execution is from n to 1 level. 132.I want the Previous value of the On-Break ? Which is the Command Used? Ans: ‘SAVE=Variable’ 133.How to Identify the Document Variables? Ans: By @. 134.What is the SPF File? What are the Flags required to make a file to SPF? Ans: SPF is a Portable Format File and the command line flag used is –KEEP. 135.How to refer a Global Variables in the Local Procedures? Ans. By prefixing the “_” underscore for the Variable name. 136.How the Output variables denote in the Local Procedures? 137.What is –Bnn,--Tnn,--RS & --Rt Flags? Ans: --Bnn for specifying default number rows to retrieve from the database. --Tnn used for Testing Which specifies the number of pages we want to test. --RS is used to create an .SQT file. --RT is used to run .SQT file. 139.What is Debug Command Line Flag? Ans: -DEBUGxx. 140.How to Place and Appropriate Logo in SQR? Ans: Using ‘Declare Image’ Command. 141.Diff between SavePreChange and the SavePostChange? 142.How to get the Most Current EffDt Row and the EffSeq Row? 143.When the Work-Flow Events fires? Ans: After the successful Execution of the SavePrechange. 145.How to refer a Second Level Field value? 146.What is the Component Buffer? Ans: Tempory memory area to Store data related to ‘Current Active Component’. 147.Can you write Error-Messaging in the Field Change event? 148.What is the Field Formula and the Field Default events? 149. What is the Message Get Function? What is the diff between Message Get and the MessageGetText functions? 150. What are the Meta-Sql Commands? 151.How many SQR’s you modified Explain? 152.Why do we use SQR ? Explain them? Ans: 1.Where ever Programming Logic is more. 2.For Background SQL Processing. 3.For Interfacing. 4.Mainly it is a Powerful Reporting Tool. 153.What is the diff between Including the SQC’s at the Page-Header and the PageFooter? 154.How can we use DML and the DDL Commands in the SQR? Ans: Directly writing those commands in ‘Begin-SQL’ Paragraph. 155.How can you know the Status of the SQR Report? For that any SQC is needed or not? Ans: We can Know by verifying in Process Monitor the SQC needed for it is ‘STDAPI.SQC’.

156.How can you Export or Import the Data in the Flat File to PS Database? Ans: Using File Layout & Using File Handling Commands in SQR. 157.Diff between Load-Lookup and Arrays 158.Diff between ASK and the INPUT Command? 159.What is PIA? Explain each part? Functions of the AppServer? 160.Diff between Search-Record and the Add Search-Record? 161.What are the events associated with the other events? 162.How can you define Global variables and impact of it ? Sqr's 1. what is the purpose of multiple reports? In what situation u use this? Ans.Multiple reports are mainly used to increase the performance of sqr program.This is used when we are generating different reports for the same source i.e; for same tables. 2. can u declare multiple heading sections in one sqr program? Ans.Yes,we can declare multiple headings in the Multiple Reports. 3. what is the compile time variables?How to refer? Ans.Ask variables are compile time variables. 4.What is run time variables? Ans.Input variables are run time variables. 4. what is dynamic query variable?How to refer? Ans. 5. What is sqc?what is the purpose of stdapi.sqc? Ans.SQC’s are nothing but some functions in SQR.here, we have reusable code.by including those SQC’s and calling those functions in our SQR program we can get the functionality of that fu8nction.This is mainly used to make our SQR program API aware.ie; we can see the status of that SQR program in process monitor. 6. What are the steps to run an sqr program from people soft environment? Ans.1.Make the program API aware. 2.Create run control table to pass variables in runtime,create a page,and component. 3.Schedule the program in process Scheduler 7. what are the debugging commands in sqr? Ans.Show & Display are debugging commands 8. what is the difference between them? Ans.Show is used to display more than one variable at a time. Display is used to display only one variable at a time 9. what is load lookup?in what situations you use this technique? Ans.Load lookup is like an array in C Language.This is mainly used to increase the performance of our program.Mainly used in Master Detail Reports where the number of rows are more in the table. 11.what are the steps in performance tuning? Ans.Using Loadlookup & Arrays, Using Command line flags such as –bnn & -s, Using proper programming in our SQR program, Using Proper SQL in our SQR program, Using Multiple Reports, Using SQT files and Running on Batch Server. 12. What are the file manipulation commands in sqr? Ans.Open,Close,For-Reading,For-W riting,For-Appending,Read & Write.

13. Is there any limitations to opening an file? Ans.We can Open at a time a liited number of files that is 256 14. What are before and after procedures?How the execution sequence? Ans.For group headings before and for group footings we use after . 15. I want to get previous value of on-break? what is the command? Ans. Save command 16.How to identify document variables? Ans.By seeing the Document Marker Symbol ie;@. 17.What is spf file?what are the flags exists to make a file to an spf? Ans.The Output File after the compilation is SPF file.we can create it using ‘-Rs’ command line Flag and we can run it using ‘-RT’ command Line Flag. 18. How to refer a global variable in local procedure? Ans.after special character (ex.#,&) we use underscore(_) after that variable name 19.How the output variable denotes in a local procedure? 20.what is -Bnn flag? Ans.This is used to specift the number of rows that are to be taken from Dbase to the Buffer because defaultly the system takes 10 rows at a time. 21.What is -Tnn flag? Ans. This is mainly used for testing purpose. We can restrict the system to generate only a specific number of pages instead of generating all pages for testing. This is used in Windows Environment. 22. What is -RS & -RT Flags? Ans.-RS is used to generate SPF file ie; stopping the program after the comilation. _RT is used to run the SPF file .This is also one kind of Performance increasing technique by saving the compilation time. 23. What are the sections in Sqr?which one is necessary? Ans. Setup, Heading , Footing, Program & Procedure Sections. Program section is the Mandatory section. 24.What is -debug command line flag? Ans. This is used for Debugging in SQR. 25. How to place an corporate logo in sqr? Ans. Using “Declare Image” command 26. How to get most current effdt row & most effseq row? Ans. People code 1.what is the diff between Field edit& save edit? Ans.In save edit it checks for all the system edits & Field edits. 2.what is field change? what are the events fires when a field change? Ans. When a Tab is pressed or a field value is changed on the page then this occurs. Events that fire are Field Edit & Field Change. 3.what is the diff between save prechange & save postchange? Ans.Save Prechange is fired when the buffer is not cleared where as Save Post change fires when the Buffer is cleared and before the Commit is issued by the database. 4.when workflow event fires? Ans.After the Save Prechange fires then this Work Flow Event is fired.

6.what is sqlexec function? Ans.This is a functio which is used to write SQL commands in People code. This directly connects to database and execute. Mainly used for BackGround SQL processing.RetrivesOnly one row of data. 7. what are the save action events? Ans.Save Edit,Save Prechange, Work Flow & Save Post change 8. How to refer a second level Field value? Ans.”RECORD.level1recordname, &lvl_row, RECORD.level2recordname, &lvl2row, Record.fieldname ” I the Scroll Path 9.How to refer a low level row from higher level? Ans.By specifying the high level row first and then the low level record.ie;by Scroll path. Using object oriented Peoplecode And Creating Objects for the rowsets. 10.What is component buffer? Ans.It is a temporary memory area for the people code to access the data base columns and user defined variables in the people code. 11.can u write the error messages in field change event? Ans.no. 12. What is field default event? Ans.Which is used to assign default values and if o defaults exists for the field then it sets to the system defaults depending on the data type of the field. 13.What is field formala? Ans. This is an Event Type which is mainly used to do calculations and define functions in Derived work record which can be used as a function libraries. 14. what is message get function? what's the diff between message get& message get text functions? Ans: This is used to gwt the messages from the Message Catalog. App Engine 1.what are the components of appengine? 2.How many action available? Ans.Totally we have 8 Actions but two are mutually Exclusive so only we can use 7 actions in a step. 3.What is the execution sequence of actions? Ans. 4.What is state record? 5. what are the meta-sqls used in state record? 6.what type of records used in state record? 7.what are the steps in creating state record? 8.What are the Do select, Do while & Do until? 9.what is set processing? 10.what is restart facility? where do u set this? Application designer 1.what are the record types? Ans. This is used to specify the type of Record while crating a record. There are totally 7 record types SQL Table, SQL View, Dynamic View, Derived/Work Record, Query View, Temporary Tables & Sub Record.

2.what is Dynamic view & Derived/work record? Ans. This is mainly used to increase the performance in People Code programming. 3.What is effective dated concept? how it acts in different modes? Ans. This is used to maintain Different rows for the same key field value depending on he Date. 4. what is effective sequence? Ans. Which is used to maintain different row for the same key value & same Effective Date. 5.What is alternate search key? Ans. This is some thing like secondary key. This is Found in search dialog box to seach based on this value even though this is not a key field. & search key. 6.where do u set default value property? Ans. In the record field properties in the use tab we have ‘constant’ here we set the default value. This is used mainly for Speedy data entry and search procedure. We can set default value in people code also. Oracle 1. What is meant by outer join? Ans. In addition to rows which satisfy the condition in two table we can get the rows that are available in second table that are not in first table. Functional 1. What are the key fields in job table? 2. What is meant by empl_rcd? PeopleSoft Interview Questions – Application Engine. 1) There are different types of variables in the Application Engine people code? Local variable – these are available for the duration of the program in which they are declared. Global / Component – These variables are available while the Application Engine program is running. They are saved at commits and checkpoints, So they can be used for restarts. Component variables are same as Global incase of the AE. 2) What are the Different ways pass data between the steps? 1) State records – One row can be passed and can have many state records. 2) Component/Global People code variables 3) Temporary records – Multiple rows of data can be passed. 4) How to read the runctrl parameters in AE 1) SQL: - %Select (EMPLID) Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL where PROCESS_INSTANCE = %PROCESS_INSTANCE and ORPID = %oprid 2) People code: - &SQL = “Select EMPLID from PS_AERUNCONTROL Where PROCESS_INSTACNE =” | PS_TEST_AET.PROCESS_INSTANCE | “and OPRID =” | %oprid. %PROCESS_INSTANCE or %Bind (PROCESS_INSTANCE) can be used. %PROCESS_INSTANCE is more efficient and faster

1) CreateProcessRequest () , Schedule () 2) CallAppEngine. 6) What is the syntax for CallAppEngine? CallAppEngine (applid [, state record]); 9) What is the difference between a Trace value and Trace parameters? A Trace parameter determines which type of trace is turned on. A Trace parameter determines what type of data is recorded in your trace files (s). 10) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 11) What are the Different types of Application Engine? Standard: Standard entry-point program. Upgrade Only: Used by PeopleSoft Upgrade utilities only. Import Only: Used by PeopleSoft Import utilities only Daemon Only: Use for daemon type programs. Transform Only: Support for XSLT Transform programs. 13) What is Set Processing? Set Processing uses SQL to process groups, or sets, of rows at one time rather than processing each row individually. With row by row processing you following a repetitive loop that selects a row, determines if it meets a given criteria, if so, apply rule x to row Update row, commit. With set processing, you only select those rows that meet the filtering criteria and then run the rule once again all the affected rows. 14) Advantages of Set Processing? Improved Performance: - Our internal testing has revealed that, in an overwhelming majority of cases, set processing performs significantly better than it is -by-row counterpart for “reasonable” batch processing volumes. Minimized SQL Overhead: - It tends to use fewer Application Engine SQL statements that each processed more data than the statements executed in row-by-row processing. Easy Maintenance : - if need to make a fix or add an enhancement to SQL, it’s just a matter of modifying the SQL or inserting the new “Chunk”. Leveraging the RDBMS: - With Set – based processing, you take advantage of the SQL processing engine on the database rather than placing the processing burden and overhead on the application executable. 15) Testing and debugging application engine? Application Engine Trace file-You can track the step execution of your application execution. Application Engine Interactive Debugger – First click on the trace tab and turn off the statement timings. Select Profile -> Edit Profile-> Process Scheduler Tab -> Application section Select Debug check box.

(You can dynamically modify the state record run application engine step by step People Code Debugger for the Application Engine.) AE Trace files: - AE_<Program Name>_<Process Instance>.AET Without the process instance: - AE_<Date/Timestamp>_<OS_PID>.AET 16) Order and flow of action types 1) Do When 2) Do While 3) Do Select 4) Peoplecode 5) SQL 6) Call Section 7) Message Log 8) XSLT 9) Do until 17) What is Prerequisite for the Temporary record? 1) Should have process Instance as key 2) Name should end with _TAO 19) Why Parallel Processing required? Potential performance improvements by splitting the data to be processed into groups and simultaneously running multiple instance of your program to deal with different groups of data. If you have a one program that uses a temporary table and is invoked multiple times, that single temporary table could be used concurrently in multiple executions of the code. This could create unpredictable results since the different instances of the code would be issuing delete, Inserts and/or updates unsynchronized with each other. You could solve the problem by creating multiple temporary tables as a pool of tables. Each invocation of your program would have to allocate an unused temporary table, mark it as ‘in use’ , use it and release it back to the pool when you through with it (for each Application Engine program you write). 20) How running AE program as Batch differs from running it online? Application Engine programs are designed for two types of execution and each has its own pool of Temporary Tables Online: Invoked by CallAppEngine from People code Run quickly, synchronously, and at random times. Potential for simultaneous executions Uses the online Temporary Table pool. Not restart able.

Psae.exe randomly assigns an instance number from the number range on your online temp tables. If the instance number is in use psae.exe puts the program in Queue until the assigned instance becomes free. Unlock on completion, on Crash free from Manage Abends. Batch: Invoked through the Process Scheduler. Run for longer amounts of time, asynchronously, and at scheduled times. Can be designed for parallel execution for performance. Uses the Batch/Dedicated Temporary table. Restart able. It allocates instance number based on the availability on a record by record basis and psae.exe begins with the lowest instance numbers.If the properties are set continue - Base table is used with Process instance as key. If Re-starable – Locked across Restarts until completes successfully. If not Re-startable on Program completion. 22) What happens when all the instance of the temporary table are in use? It behavior can control by AE developer. If the runtime options are set to continue “People Tools will insert rows into the base table using the PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key”. If temp table doesn’t contain PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key field in a Temporary table, you should change the Temp table runtime options to “Abort” in the appropriate Application Engine programs. 23) How can you divide the data to be processed by different instance of the program to perform parallel program? Run control parameters passed to each instance of the AE program enable it to identify which input rows “belong” to it, and each program instance inserts the rows from the source table into its assigned temporary table instance using %Table. it be access from other program.Private we cannot call from other program. 26) Which actions are mutually exclusive and why they are mutually exclusive? Sql and callsection. 1) Application Engine ignores the commit for the current step at runtime 2) If the current step contains only one Action, only use skip step at by-pass the commit. 29)What is the maximum limitation on temporary tabel instances in AE. 99 30) what is the difference between the %SELECT and %SELECTINIT meta sql functions. Ans %select : if any values have not selected then previous value will be there %selectinit : if any values have not selected then previous value will reinitilate to null

31) what is the difference between exit(0),exit(1) when we are using this functions in AE Exit (1) causes immediate termination of a PeopleCode program. Use this parameter to rollback database changes. Exit (0) caused immediate termination of a Peoplecode Program but don’t make rollback in the database. 2) Difference between Get keys, find keys and Create Keys ? Get keys: - These are mapped to the fields marked as scrh in the component’s search record. Automatically “Search key” fields in search record become Get keys. We cannot change it. Find keys: - These are mapped to fields marked as Alt or Srch in the component search record. You may remove Find keys that you do not wish to make available for searching. Create Keys: - It is generated from the key fields for the search record. If Add search record is present then its key fields are taken. We cannot change it. 2. Which of the following two servers used by Process scheduler to run a process a. PSPRCSRV b. PSDSTSRV c. PSAESRV d. PSMSTPRCS e. None of the above f. All of the above 3. Which of the following data type accepts null value? a. Date b. Binary c. Number d. Long Char e. None of the above f. All of the above 4. Department Manager should approve the each Business activity before it goes to next step. How would u implement this in Work Flow? a. Rule b. Role c. Users d. None of the above e. All of the above 5. A Business manager logged in to the system. He is not able to see the specific menu name in that. What would be the reason? a. Permission is not granted b. Setting has to be done in Configuration Manager. c. Options has to be set in Application Designer d. None of the above e. All of the above 6. In which of the following code would be automatically generated when u drag the component? (multiple answers) a. File Layout b. Component Interface c. Application Engine d. None of the above e. All of the above

7. What is the default format of SQR Reports? a. Txt b. PDF c. HTML d. CSV e. None of the above f. All of the above 8. Which of the following is applicable for UPG Convert? Options like a. Conversion of Data, consists of Cobol programs b. Conversion of Data, consists of SQR programs c. Data conversion consists of AE programs. d. None of the above e. All of the above 9. Criteria in PS Query refers which of the following in SQL a. Where b. Select c. Insert d. Commit e. None of the above f. All of the above 10. Where report would be processed? a. Process Scheduler b. Application Server c. Client d. Workstation e. None of the above f. All of the above 11. Which of the following would be stored in to the database? (Choose 3) a. SQL Table b. SQL View c. Dynamic View d. Derived Work/Record e. Temporary Table f. None of the above g. All of the above 12. How many keys you can set for Dynamic View? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 0 f. None of the above g. All of the above 13. Which of the following are the ways to execute AE Program? (choose 4) a. Application Designer Run Button b. Process Scheduler c. People Code d. SQR e. Cobol f. Bat File g. None of the above h. All of the above

14. Which is correct SQR Comment Syntax? a. ! b. /* */ c. <* *> d. Remark e. None of the above f. All of the above 15. Which is correct People Code comment Syntax (choose 2) a. <* *> b. /* */ c. Comments d. None of the above e. All of the above 16. People Soft Partner wants to know the implementation information. Where he can get it? a. Partner Connection b. Partner Alliance c. People soft University d. None of the above e. All of the above f. Customer Connection 17. U downloaded some patches. What are all the things that might come with those patches? a. SQR b. People Code c. Upgrade template d. Some other options e. None of the above f. All of the above 18. Entity Relationship diagram means? a. Business process map b. Work flow process c. A flow chart that indicates each entity and its relationship d. None of the above e. All of the above 19. Which of the following is applicable for LDP? (Choose 2) a. Central security b. Streamline various people soft applications. c. some other options d. None of the above e. All of the above 20. Regarding Deferred processing which of the following is correct? a. u can easily find out the answer b. None of the above c. All of the above 21. Where the default style sheet should be stored if user wants it to reflect through out the portal? a. Application Designer b. Configuration manager c. Configuration. properties d. People Tools - Utilities - Options - Style Sheet e. None of the above f. All of the above 22. Where u would give the parameter values for Process to run?

a. Run control table b. State record c. Some other options d. None of the above e. All of the above 23. Simple SQL Select Question? 24. Simple SQL Delete Question? 25. Which is of the following are valid Variable scopes. a. component , Record ,Global b. Component, Local, Field c. Local, Global, Component d. None of the above e. All of the above 26. PeopleSoft reserves ALL Win Help context numbers (in Utilities, PeopleTools Options) up to which number? a. 10,000,000 b. 12,000,000 c. 14,000,000 d. 16,000,000 e. 18,000,000 f. None of the above g. All of the above 27. Which one of the following PeopleCode debugging tools automatically converts values of any data type other than object into string values for viewing during debugging? a. MsgGetText b. MsgGet c. MessageBox d. WinMessage e. ExpandBindVar 28. In which one of the following views would you see the fields, criteria, and other details associated with the current query? a. Object view b. Record view c. Component view d. Designer view e. Query view 29. In which PeopleCode event does ALL data validation take place? a. SavePostChange b. FieldFormula c. SavePreChange d. FieldEdit e. FieldChange 30. Which one of the following is NOT a valid PeopleSoft query type? a. Message agent queries b. Reporting queries c. Role queries d. Ad-hoc queries e. View queries 31. The following is an entry from the application reviewer LOG File: start Field=PERSONAL_DATA.EMPLID-RowInit Temps=1 Stack=4 Source=233 What does the Source=233 parameter in the above LOG file entry identify? a. The statement being executed is line 233 of the PeopleCode program. b. The number of references to the PERSONAL_DATA.EMPLID field c. The log file line number 233 d. The value contained in the PERSONAL_DATA.EMPLID field

e. The length of the PeopleCode program 32. Which one of the following is the primary purpose of the application designer's SQL Alter function? a. To update the database table to be in sync with the PeopleTools object definition of that table b. To alter the definition of a PeopleTools object without affecting the actual object within the database c. To drop and recreate a table that must be changed as the result of a customization d. To modify a table that needs changes as part of a customization e. To update the PeopleTools object definition to be in sync with the definition of that table in the database 33. Which one of the following PeopleSoft Objects CANNOT be locked by developers as part of Change Control Locking as displayed above? a. Process Definitions b. Business Process Maps c. Panel Groups d. Fields e. Records 34. How do you define the names of the application servers being used to access PeopleSoft? a. In Configuration Manager, under the Application Servers tab. b. In Application Designer, under the Tools menu. c. In Application Designer, using the Create New Object option. d. In Security Administrator, under the Define Profiles option. e. In the Application Servers parameters of the configuration file, PSAPPSRV.CFG. 35. PeopleSoft has its own naming convention for system and non-system (application) tables. In the list below, RECORDNAME refers to the name of any table or record. Referring to the above information, which one of the following identifies the naming convention PeopleSoft uses for non-system (application) tables? a. SYS_PSRECORDNAME b. PS_RECORDNAME c. SYSRECORDNAME d. PSRECORDNAME e. PS$RECORDNAME 36.PeopleSoft tracks object changes using a system table. Which PeopleTools System table is used to track object changes? a. SYSRELEASE b. SYSOBJECTS c. PSRELEASE d. PSOBJECTS e. PSVERSIONS 37. Suppose the CEO wants a list of the departments whose MINIMUM salary is greater than $100,000. Your manager asks you to determine the quickest method to deliver this data to the CEO. Since writing an SQR will take too much time, you decide to use PeopleSoft query. Referring to the above, what function would you use, in combination with the aggregate function "Minimum" to produce the result set required? a. JOIN b. SUB-SELECT c. UNION d. EXPRESSION e. HAVING CRITERIA 38. What is the minimum number of objects an object group can consist of? a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. 3 e. 4 39. Where do you create the process security groups? a. Application Designer b. Process Scheduler c. Define Business Rules, Define General Options d. Security Administrator

e. Process System 40. What effect would making a change to the EMPLID field in the above project have? a. No effect on the field itself, but only on the field's definition. b. Changes would occur globally; meaning the field is changed everywhere else in the database. c. Changes to the field cannot be made unless you rename the field. d. Changes to the field do not take effect until you build or rebuild the entire project. e. Changes to the field are only reflected within the current project. 41. Which security administrator profile provides the necessary IDs and passwords for the behind-the-scenes database logon that occurs when an operator signs on to PeopleSoft? a. Class b. Operator c. Access d. Tree e. Object 42. You are asked to perform some security-related tasks. You determine the quickest method to do this is using the Data Mover utility and the GRANT_USER and ENCRYPT_PASSWORD commands. However, to perform these commands you must login to Data Mover in bootstrap mode. Referring to the above, how do you launch Data Mover in bootstrap mode? a. Login using the SYSADM user ID and password. b. Login using the database access ID and password. c. Login using your regular user ID without a password. d. Login using your regular user ID and password, and execute SET BOOTSTRAP. e. Login using your regular user ID and password.

43. UPDATE PSLOCK SET SECURITY_OPTION = ''; what function does the above SQL statement perform? a. Disables the PSLOCK security option for ALL users. b. Enables the PSLOCK security option for the current user ONLY. c. Suspends the PSLOCK security option for the current transaction. d. Enables the PSLOCK security option. e. Disables the PSLOCK security option for the current user ONLY. 44. &OPRID = %OperatorId; Where would the above PeopleCode event be found on a Run Control Record? a. SearchInit b. RowDelete c. RowSelect d. RowInsert e. RowInit 45. The example below demonstrates the use of SQR flags in the configuration manager directories folder: -F C:\PSHrms\Sqr\ what do the above SQR flags signify to the SQR Report Writer upon execution? a. Directs log messages to the specified file b. Specifies the output path c. Specifies the path to SQC include files d. Specifies the path to the ALLMAXES.MAX file e. Sets full path to and name of the SQR initialization file 46. What application server service initiates a COBOL program to run a transaction? a. Jolt Internet relay b. Remote call c. Database agent d. Jolt relay e. Message agent 47. After going live with your new application, you realize that one of the values being used for computing Employee Leave Accruals is not correct. You've narrowed the problem down to a section of PeopleCode within the application. You now need to execute the process and display the values of the variables being used to determine where the problem is occurring. Referring to the above information, how would you display the in-question value of the LeaveRate variable contained in the PeopleCode? a. WinMessage("The value is: ", &LeaveRate, 64);

b. WinMessage("The value is: ", ShowVar &LeaveRate, 64); c. WinMessage("The value is: ", Show &LeaveRate, 64); d. WinMessage("The value is: ", DisplayVar LeaveRate, 64); e. WinMessage(DisplayText "The value is: ", DisplayVar LeaveRate, 64); 48. Which one of the following is NOT a standard enforced by Data Mover? a. With the exception of double-dash (--) comment statements, statements may span multiple lines. b. With the exception of double-dash (--) comment statements, every command statement must be followed by a delimiter. c. Statement text is case-sensitive. d. Command statements may contain any amount of white space between items. e. You must add a space after the double-dash (--) before you start your comments. 49. Which one of the following files are NOT stored in the process scheduler logging directory? a. Application server logs b. COBOL trace logs c. Process scheduler logs d. Application engine trace logs e. Process request logs 50. Which process requests will run through the process scheduler server? a. All processes submitted on the server b. All SQR and COBOL processes ONLY c. All processes submitted on the client d. Application related processes ONLY (no PeopleTools processes) e. All processes submitted on the client or server 51. The major types of Trees that can be created using the Tree Manager? a. Position, Succession, Department, Access Group b. Detail Trees, Summary Trees, Node Oriented Trees, Query Access Trees c. Detail Trees, Summary Trees, Node Oriented Trees, Reporting Trees d. Reporting, Succession, Department, Access Group e. Summary Trees, Node Oriented Trees, Dimensional Trees, Query Access Trees 52. 1.View 2. SQL Table 3.Derived / Work Record 4. Sub Record 5. Query View Which of the above record definitions is NOT stored on the database and is therefore NOT required to be built? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 53. You created a new menu with three new data entry panels. The panels were created by another member of the development team. You must now add these panels to the new menu so users can key data into the system. Referring to the above information, which one of the following objects would you add to a menu to include the series of new panels? a. Panel b. Business process map c. Project d. Business process e. Panel group 54. Which one of the following PeopleCode events should NOT contain the WinMessage function? a. SearchInit b. SavePreChange c. FieldChange d. SaveEdit e. RowInit 55. The Process Scheduler Logging detail can be manipulated using the TraceSQL feature. Following is a sample use of this

feature: TraceSQL=4 What items will be included in the Process Scheduler log, given the above value of the TraceSQL parameter? a. COBOL statement timings and SQL statements b. Set select buffers c. SQL statements d. SQL connect, disconnect, commit, and rollback e. SQL statements and variables 56. The Application Reviewer is not working correctly, and you are in a hurry to find the problem with a piece of PeopleCode that's been causing problems. You need a quick method to find all the fields being referenced by the PeopleCode program without having to read through the entire program. Referring to the above, how do you determine ALL the fields referenced by the PeopleCode program without having to read every line of code? a. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFMNPC. b. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFPNPC. c. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFPCFL. d. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFPCMN. e. Run the delivered PeopleSoft report, XRFFLPC. 57. Before performing an upgrade, it is a good idea to validate the consistency of the database in which the upgrade will occur. This helps ensure a "clean" starting point for the upgrade process. Referring to the above information, which Utility program would you run to ensure the underlying database is consistent with the data structures defined in PeopleTools? a. Stamp the PeopleSoft Database b. Upgrade Compare & Report c. Perform a PeopleSoft System Audit d. Validate PeopleSoft Project e. Run a PeopleSoft Database Audit 58. Which one of the following is NOT a task performed by Data Mover? a. Transfer application data between PeopleSoft databases. b. Rename record and field names within PS Database. c. Re encrypt passwords globally for a single operator. d. Move Object definitions contained in the PeopleTools tables. e. Imports into an existing PS Database. 59. As a last resort, query will write the default Crystal Report to which directory? a. CRWRPTPATH directory b. Root directory of the PeopleSoft application server c. Server %TEMP% directory d. Windows %TEMP% directory e. User's language directory beneath the CRWRPTPATH directory 60. The Security Administrator is not available. You are in a hurry to grant a user the ability to start an application server, and you decide to make the change in the actual application server configuration file, rather than using the Security Administrator. Referring to the above information, how would you grant a user the ability to start an application server using the application server configuration file, PSAPPSRV.CFG? a. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV.CFG file, and update the STARTAPPSVR column of the PSOPRDEFN table to a value of 1. b. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV table, and update the STARTAPPSVR column of the PSOPRDEFN table to a value of 1. c. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSOPRDEFN table, and update the STARTAPPSVR parameter in the PSAPPSRV.CFG file to a value of 1. d. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV.CFG file, and update the STARTAPPSVR parameter in the PSAPPSRV.CFG file to a value of 1. e. Add the OPERATOR ID to the PSAPPSRV table, and update the STARTAPPSVR parameter in the PSAPPSRV.CFG file to a value of 1. 61. 2. print " " 3 BLANKLINE = 1 4. .B 5 display " " Which of above SQR statements allows you to print a blank line within a document when creating a letter within SQR? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4

e. 5 62. Which one of the following PeopleCode events can run in both two-tier and three-tier environments on either the client or application server? a. SavePostChange b. SavePreChange c. FieldEdit d. RowInit e. FieldChange 63. How many security administrator profiles does PeopleSoft Security Administrator use? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 64. How do you set up table-sharing in PeopleTools applications? a. Add the field, SETID, as a key field to each table you want to share, and then define the set control field. b. Add the field, BUSINESS_UNIT, as a key field to each table you want to share, and then define the set control field. c. Add the field, SETID, as a key field to each table you want to share. d. Add the fields, BUSINESS_UNIT and SETID, as key fields to each table you want to share. e. Add the field, BUSINESS_UNIT, as a key field to each table you want to share. 65. When running PS Query to output to Excel as demonstrated above, how would you prevent the space between Excel columns being printed? a. Set Space between Query Columns to " " within the nVision tab of the Configuration Mgr. b. Set Space between Query Columns to 999 within the nVision tab of the Configuration Mgr. c. The default setting is no spaces. d. Write a macro within Excel to delete all columns with no data. e. Set Space between Query Columns to 0 within the nVision tab of the Configuration Mgr. 66. Select max(effdt) from ps_car_alloc where emplid = &EMPLID and effdt <= %currentdate and end_dt is null; What problem exists in the above PeopleCode statement? a. Use of the "null" keyword is not permitted in PeopleCode. b. No alias used for the ps_car_alloc table. c. The &EMPLID variable should not contain an "&". d. The %currentdate variable is not a valid META-SQL function. e. The "is" keyword is invalid and should be "=" instead. 67. What are the steps involved in joining PS_JOB and PS_POSITION_DATA forcing a row to be returned even when there is NOT a match between the records while still maintaining PS Query security? a. Create a view and include the outer join as required as part of the view. Add View to Query Tree. Select View as part of Query. b. Create a view and include the outer join as required as part of the view. Select View as part of Query. c. Write an SQR to perform the outer join. Write the data to a temp table. Query the temp table using PS Query. d. Create a new record and include the outer join as required. Add Record to Query Tree. Select Record as part of Query. e. Create an expression within PS Query joining the two records and including the outer join on the correct field. 68. \PTPUPRCS_ProcessServerName_MMDD.log Which one of the following log files does the above log file naming syntax and path location identify? a. Process server SQR trace b. Process monitor log c. Process server agent log d. Process server COBOL trace e. Process server SQL trace 69. PeopleSoft reserves ALL Message Sets (in Utilities, Message Catalog) up to which number? a. 10,000 b. 19,999 c. 30,000 d. 40,000 e. 50,000

70. In which one of the following views would you see the fields, criteria, and other details associated with the current query? a. Component view b. Object view c. Query view d. Designer view e. Record view 71. Why is the record description displayed above important when creating a new record? a. It is used for Upgrade processes. b. PS Query and Tree Manager use it to identify the record. c. It is a required description. d. Record Description is not used. e. To help search for records within the Application Designer. 72. Which one of the following Data Types is NOT supported by the PeopleCode programming environment? a. OBJECT b. NUMBER c. TIMESTAMP d. DATE e. STRING 73. As a member of the development team, you are asked to create a new record definition to be used in an existing PeopleSoft application. Referring to the above information, in which one of the following workspaces would you create a new Record definition? a. Project workspace b. Project workspace, upgrade view c. Object workspace d. New object workspace e. Project workspace, development view 74. What is the default Crystal Report that PeopleSoft Query tool creates? a. DEFAULT.RPT b. ACTQRY.RPT c. CRYQRY.RPT d. QRYCRY.RPT e. QUERY.RPT 75. Which one of the following steps is NOT part of performing an upgrade? a. Apply all outstanding patches, prior to upgrade. b. Perform a comparison of objects between the source and target databases. c. Populate a project to be used for the upgrade. d. Stamp the target database. e. Copy the project to the database being upgraded. 76. Application engines are comprised of one or more steps and are quite similar, in construct, to other programming language constructs. Referring to the above information, which one of the following has the equivalent construction of an application engine? a. A SQL script b. A database agent c. A message agent d. A SQR program e. A COBOL paragraph 77. \ProcessName_ProcessInstance.log Which one of the following log files does the above log file naming syntax and path location identify? a. Process server message agent log b. Process server agent log c. Process server COBOL or SQR trace d. Process server SQL trace e. Process monitor log

78. PeopleSoft uses which one of the following tables to automate the process of creating large volumes of users on tables? a. PSOPRCLASS b. PSOPRLOAD c. PSOPRDEFN_INTFC d. PSOPRDEFN e. PSOPRCLASS_INTFC 79. Your UNIX system administrator have just informed you that they are reorganizing some directory structures on the UNIX machine. They want you to determine if the PeopleSoft architecture will be affected. You quickly realize that your CAB and JAR files locations will be changed. Referring to the above, how do you ensure the Web client will perform correctly once these directory structures have changed? a. Modify the ARCHIVE parameter to point to the new directory. b. Modify the JAR parameter to point to the new directory. c. Modify the LOCALE parameter to point to the new directory. d. Modify the CAB parameter to point to the new directory. e. Modify the CODEBASE parameter to point to the new directory. 80. How would you run SQL Alter to alert you to discrepancies between your record definitions and underlying SQL tables, without actually performing changes to the object in the database? a. Run as a user with AUDIT permissions to the underlying database. b. Run as a user with SELECT ONLY permissions to the underlying database. c. Run as a user that has NO permissions to modify the underlying database. d. Run the SQL Alter in Report Mode. e. Run the SQL Alter in Audit Only Mode. 81. When do configuration changes made using the configuration manager take effect? a. Immediately upon saving the changes. b. After exiting PeopleSoft and rebooting your workstation. c. Once you save the changes and exit the Configuration Manager. d. Once you exit PeopleSoft and log back in. e. After you shutdown the database and application servers and then reboot. 82. Which command is valid in both bootstrap and regular mode when operating the data mover? a. REPLACE b. RENAME c. EXPORT d. REPLACE_VIEW e. GRANT_USER 83. How many security layers are involved in the PeopleSoft environment? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 84. How are PeopleCode programs saved within the database? a. Saved as ASCII text, and stored in the field definition. b. Saved as binary, and stored in the field definition. c. Saved as ASCII text, and stored in the field definition with a copy ALSO saved as binary and stored in a separate PeopleTools table. d. Saved as binary, and stored in a separate PeopleTools table. e. Saved as ASCII text, and stored in a separate PeopleTools table. 85. What is PeopleSoft's recommended way to access panel groups and the business logic associated with them outside of PeopleSoft online panels? a. Component Interface b. Application engine c. Database agent d. Application designer e. Web client

86. Which events occur when an error or warning is issued during a FieldDefault PeopleCode event? a. Displays the Error or Warning message, and continues processing. b. Causes a runtime error, and forces cancellation of the PeopleCode program ONLY. c. Causes a runtime error, and forces cancellation of the entire panel group. d. Displays the Error or Warning message, and prompts the user for a default value to be used. e. Displays the Error or Warning message, and discontinues processing of the PeopleCode program. 87. Your manager requests that you modify the label of the Leave Accrual menu item from Leave Accrual to Monthly Leave Accrual. Your manager does not tell you the name of the menu on which the Leave Accrual menu item exists. To make the change, you must know on which menu the item is located. Referring to the above information, which step(s) will help you find the menu that must be updated? a. Open Security Administrator. Open Menu Items. Choose Find Menu. b. Choose Open. Select Object Type of Menu, and choose Menu Name Search. c. Open the panel within the Application Designer. Choose Edit, Find Object References. Open Panel Group. Choose Edit, Find Object References. d. Choose Edit, Find in PeopleCode, and choose Find Menu. e. Open the panel. Choose Edit, Find Menu. 88. Which one of the following database management systems requires that you key the SERVER NAME in lower case in the configuration manager signon defaults? a. Microsoft SQL Server b. Informix c. Oracle d. Sybase e. DB2 89. Which one of the following is NOT a component of the Process Scheduler? a. Process scheduler server shutdown b. Process monitor c. Process scheduler server agent d. Process scheduler PeopleTools e. Process scheduler request dialog 90. Your application users are experiencing problems with one of the customizations your development team has recently worked on. The customization involved changes to a PeopleCode object within the database. You decide to use Application Reviewer to debug the PeopleCode. When you try to start the Application Reviewer you receive an error that the Reviewer cannot be started. Referring to the above, why is the Application Reviewer unable to start in your normal three-tier client configuration? a. The three-tier database server is not configured to allow Application Reviewer access. b. The database connectivity software has not been installed on the workstation you are currently using. c. The database server software has been disabled not allowing it to accept incoming requests from the workstation you are currently using. d. Access to the Application Reviewer has not been granted through the Security Administrator. e. The PeopleCode object you are trying to debug is currently being modified by another member of the development team. 91. You created a new menu with three new data entry panels. The panels were created by another member of the development team. You must now add these panels to the new menu so users can key data into the system. Referring to the above information, which one of the following objects would you add to a menu to include the series of new panels? a. Project b. Panel c. Panel group d. Business process map e. Business process 92. Your delivered PeopleSoft reports do not contain enough information in the headings. Your users want more detailed information in the headings. Referring to the above information, which one of the following utilities allows you to customize the headings in your SQR Reports? a. Message catalog b. Language settings c. Control tables d. Strings table e. General options

93. When naming system (non-application) tables in PeopleSoft, there is one exception of which you need to be aware. Referring to the above information, which one of the following records is the aforementioned exception for PeopleSoft System tables? a. XLATTABLE b. SYS_LOCKS c. SYS$VIEWS d. SYSXLATTABLE e. SYSVIEWS 94. How would you track ongoing changes to PeopleTools objects within your database? a. Use change control administrator's Lock All Objects option. b. Use change control administrator's Use Change Control Locking option. c. Use change control administrator's Use Change Control history option. d. Perform PeopleCode trace. e. Run online SQL traces. 95. The example below demonstrates the use of SQR flags in the configuration manager directories folder: -F C:\PSHrms\Sqr\ .What do the above SQR flags signify to the SQR Report Writer upon execution? a. Specifies the path to the ALLMAXES.MAX file b. Directs log messages to the specified file c. Sets full path to and name of the SQR initialization file d. Specifies the output path e. Specifies the path to SQC include files 96. A user requests a new field to be added to the data entry application used by the company. This new field will capture large amounts of text, up to 2000 characters long. As a developer, you must decide what type of field to use to store this data. Referring to the above information, which one of the following field types would you create to store this amount of data? a. Long character b. Long text c. Variable character d. Text e. Character 97. Which of the tools below would you use to view the business process map display? a. Tree manager b. Security administrator c. Utilities d. Application designer e. Navigator 98. Where do you define the properties for Process Scheduler process security groups? a. Define Business Rules, Define General Options b. Security Administrator c. Process System d. Process Scheduler e. Application Designer 99. In the above workspace, which one of the following folders would you choose to display the results of a search through PeopleCode? a. Find in PeopleCode folder b. Validate folder c. Results folder d. Find Object References folder e. Upgrade folder 100. PeopleSoft Query is split into which of the following two views? a. Query view and data view b. Record view and field view c. Component view and designer view d. Object view and field view e. Object view and results view 101. The TUXEDO Connect String is designed for advanced configuration to support dynamic load balancing. The following

example illustrates a sample TUXEDO Connect String: //ip1:port1|//ip2:port2|//ipn:portn where ip = IP Address and port = port number. Which one of the following identifies the purpose of the above example? a. Specifies multiple application servers to which the client will arbitrarily connect. b. Specifies multiple application servers to which the client will connect in sequential order. c. Specifies a single web server, and allows Web clients to connect to a common URL. d. Specifies multiple application servers to which the client will always connect. e. Specifies multiple web servers, and allows Web clients to connect to a common URL. 102. Which one of the following situations requires the installation of database connectivity software on the client workstation in a three-tier environment? a. If you run application designer b. If you wish to run a process on the server c. If you run a SQL statement trace d. If you wish to change an object in the database e. If you need to perform an application upgrade 103. If an object is removed from the database, it will NOT automatically be removed from the project(s) to which it was added. How do you determine if a project contains valid objects without checking every object manually? a. Open Project. Choose Edit, Find Object References. b. Open Project. Choose Edit, Find in PeopleCode. c. Open Project. Choose Tools, Validate Project. d. Open Project. Choose Build, Build Project. e. Open Project. Choose Tools, Upgrade, Compare & Report. 104. Which query type requires the use of aggregate functions on the columns being selected in the query? a. Reporting query b. PS/nVision matrix query c. Ad-hoc query d. Search query e. Search dialog box query 105. Which option best describes the term, upgrading, in PeopleSoft? a. Migrating PeopleSoft objects from one database to another. b. Installing new executables that increase the current software version to a higher version. c. Migrating PeopleSoft objects and transactional data from one database to another. d. Migrating objects from one database to another, and updating system components such as software. e. Obtaining up-to-date skills on more recent versions of the products. 106. Following is an example of a command line used to login to a database in three-tier mode. However, something is wrong with this command. PSTOOLS -CTAPPSERVER -CDRVDB -CODVB -CPDVB Why will the above command line fail? a. The database type parameter value is incorrect. b. The operator ID parameter's value is not specified. c. The operator password parameter's value is not specified. d. The database name parameter is incorrect. e. The database type parameter is not specified. 107. Which one of the following is NOT a component of the various tree types in the PeopleSoft tree manager? a. Root b. Setid/Effective date c. Record definition d. Tree structure e. Category 108. You have a situation where a field value changes, and you don't know how it changed. There are two ways to find all references to a field. Referring to the above information, which of the following two tools will help you find ALL references to a field? a. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Find Object References (in Application Designer) b. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports c. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query d. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query e. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports

109. Which one of the following situations requires the installation of database connectivity software on the client workstation in a three-tier environment? a. If you need to perform an application upgrade b. If you run a SQL statement trace c. If you run application designer d. If you wish to change an object in the database e. If you wish to run a process on the server 110. Which one of the following tasks CANNOT be performed using PeopleSoft's Process Scheduler? a. Schedule a process to run monthly, daily, hourly, and even by the minute. b. Schedule recurring processes. c. Schedule the startup and shutdown of the application server. d. Create jobs (groups of processes). e. Schedule a job to run several processes, each dependent on the prior. 111. Which one of the following security administrator profiles does NOT have a password associated with it? a. Tree b. Access c. Operator d. Object 112. Which one of the following components is NOT part of the PeopleSoft three-tier architecture? a. Application server b. Batch server c. Web server d. Client workstation e. Database server 113. What does the ACCEPT operation of the application reviewer LOG file do? a. Causes control to transfer to the next level-1 statement. b. Duplicates the value of the top element or the stack. c. Passes control to the specified instruction location. d. Adds the contents of the top two items on the stack, and pushes the result onto the stack. e. Retrieves the value of record.field and pushes it onto the stack. 114. Which one of the following database management systems requires the use of the Connect ID and Connect Password in the configuration manager signon defaults section? a. DB2 b. Microsoft SQL Server c. SQLBase d. Oracle e. Sybase 115. A system user wants a new report added to the Reports menu of the Administer Human Resources (US) menu. As a developer, you need to add this new report to the menu and provide the user access to use the new item. Referring to the above information, which of the following tools would you use to add the new item to the Reports menu and grant access to the item? a. Utilities and Object Security b. Security Administrator and Query Security c. Application Designer and Security Administrator d. Query Security and Utilities e. Object Security and Security Administrator PART !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!2222222222222222222 116. You have a situation where a field value changes, and you don't know how it changed. There are two ways to find all references to a field. Referring to the above information, which of the following two tools will help you find ALL references to a field? a. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports b. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and Cross Reference Reports c. Find Object References (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query d. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and Find Object References (in Application Designer) e. Find in PeopleCode (in Application Designer) and PeopleSoft Query

117. Which query type requires the use of aggregate functions on the columns being selected in the query? a. Reporting query b. Search dialog box query c. Search query d. PS/nVision matrix query e. Ad-hoc query 118.1) REM This is an example of commenting PeopleCode;2) /* ----- Logic for Compensation Change ----- */ 3) /*Recalculate compensation for next row. Next row is based on*/ 4) prior value of EFFDT 5) calc_next_compchg(&OLDDT, EFFSEQ, 0); Which line of code in the above statement contains an error? a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 5 119. Message definitions are created using which one of the following tools? a. EDI manager b. Application engine c. Application designer d. PeopleTools utilities e. PeopleSoft query 120. Which one of the following programming languages does PeopleCode most closely resemble? a. COBOL b. Fortran c. C d. C++ e. Pascal 121. How does granting a user authority to start an application server affect other authorizations granted to that same user? a. None of the user's current authorizations are affected by the change. b. All other authorizations are disabled until the user starts an application server. c. Only authorizations granted to PeopleTools objects are disabled. d. The user is no longer allowed to start a process scheduler service. e. The user is granted full System Administrator access to the database in the three-tier mode. 122. Which one of the following is true about PIA? 123. What BEA product is used for DB transaction in PS 124. How do you login into BS mode? 125. What commands are valid in BS mode? 126. What event gets fired after DB Update? 127. PeopleCode events pertaining to Record Field: 128. Changing Prompt Table with NO Edit to Prompt Table with Edit? 129. Find which not part of AE Program is. a. Action, b. Section c. Step d. Event 130. Which RDBMS uses Tablespace? a. Oracle b. DB2 c. SQL Server

d. Informix e. Sybase 131.Database Connectivity Drivers should be installed in the following System a. Client Workstation in two tier mode (Yes) b. App Server (Yes) c. Batch Server (Yes) d. File Server e. Data Mover (Yes) f. Web Server 132. Customization done in Dev DB, Which tool i will use to move it to Prod DB? Use App Designer -> Copy DB Simple Select Statement and Find the Results 133. What are the People Tools available for Integration Broker? a. Application Messaging b. Component Interface c. File Layout d. Message Agent (Not an Integration Broker tool) 134. In which platform does Crystal and Psnvision works? a. Windows b. Unix c. All of the Above d. None of the Above 135. What are the Search Keys you use to find Patches and Fixes a. Release b. Updated date time c. Platform d. Report Id 136. When a business requirement in Fit/Gap Analysis does not meet by PeopleSoft then a. Customize PS application (Yes) b. Buy third party software (Yes) c. Change policies and procedures to meet the requirement d. Call PS Development Center for Enhancement (Yes) 137. A Customer wants to use a new Image in HRMS, where it is stored? a. File Server b. Web Server c. Batch Server d. DB Server 138. Where will you configure for failover of Application Server (Scenario) a. Configuration Manager b. PSAPPSRV.cfg c. Configuration.properties d. None of the Above 139. What are Menu types available? a. Component b. PeopleCode c. Separator d. All of the above 140. What is added as new option in Build apart from Create Tables, Indexes, Views? 141. What views available in Application Designer project workspace? 142. I have created a Menu and a Page and given user access to that page, which of the tables gets affected on this (Scenario)

143. What hyperlinks available in PeopleBooks? Some options with different hyperlinks not available in peoplebooks, select the correct one Study all hyperlinks in the first page of people books. 144. What Record Changes does not affect Database? a. Change in List box in Record Field properties (correct) b. Deleting a field c. Removing the search key and alternate search key 145. In PeopleCode Debugger what are the valid values (Just Check) a. Go b. Commit c. Step Over d. View Variable Value 146. Which Web Services is only used as a Proxy Server (Just Check) a. MS IIS b. Apache c. Web Logic d. Web Sphere 147. Which of the following are not parts of an AE program? a. Section b. Procedure c. Step d. Function e. Action 148. Where is workflow work items found? a. Email b. Worklist c. Forms d. File server 149. Where do you need to install connectivity software? (choose 3) a. file server b. web server c. batch server d. App server e. two tier client 150. Which process is used for running AE programs which are to be run at a frequency of less than a day? a. PSAppsrv b. PSAESRV c. PSDAEMON d. PSQCKSRV 151. In the following url http://localhost/Peoplesoft/EMPLOYEE/PSFT_HR/c/PROCESS_SCHEDULER.PRCSTYPEDEFN.GBL which one is the component definition? a. EMPLOYEE b. PSFT_HR c. PROCESS_SCHEDULER d. PRCSTYPEDEFN.GBL 152. Which of the following are Record field events ? (choose 3) a. FieldChange b. SearchSave c. ScrollEdit d. RowSave e. SavePreChange

153. Which of the following fires after the database is updated? a. SavePreChange b. SavePostChange c. SaveEdit d. RowDelete 154. If you want to log into DataMover in Bootstrap mode, you would login as.. a. Database superuser b. Peoplesoft superuser c. Data Mover Superuser d. Security Administrator 155. Which of the following shortcuts would you install on a developer's workstation to allow quick access to the PeopleSoft applications while also allowing them to change the database to which they access? a. Configuration Manager and PSADMIN Utility b. Security Administrator and Import Manager c. PeopleTools and Configuration Manager d. Security Administrator and PSADMIN Utility e. PeopleTools and Application Server 156. Which of the following commands can be run in Bootstrap mode? a. EXPORT b. RENAME_VIEW c. ENCRYPT_PASSWORD d. None of the above 157. Your Onsite DBA has called you up and told you that one of the tables PS_ABC_TAO has grown very big in size. Based on the standard naming convention, you have determined that the record is a temporary record since it ends with _TAO. You look into the database and decide that that the data is not required any more. You ask the DBA to delete the data in the table. Next day you get a call from an irritated user who says that a daily process that took only 1 minute to run is taking about 2 hours today. You look into his process and find that it uses PS_ABC_TAO as a temporary table. What would you suggest the DBA to do? a. Drop table b. Re-create table c. Update statistics on the table d. Refresh the table with yesterday’s data 158. You want to update your password and enter a hint for forgotten password. What would you access? a. Access Profile b. Permission Lists c. User Profile d. Primary Permission List 159. For downloading patches and fixes , you have gone to the customer connection and looking under 8 april, 2000 and see Report IDS like R-CCHEN-VP14JM. What does R stand for ? a. Tools b. Released c. Required d. Application e. Resolved 160. After logging into customer connection, you wish to search for fixes/patches. What are the search criterias available ? (choose 3) a. Report ID b. Date / time c. Platform d. Release e. Developer ID 161. You are a PeopleSoft Partner and wish to get information on database performance benchmark (or something like this).Where would you look for the info? a. Partner Alliance

b. Alliance Partner c. PeopleSoft Knowledge base d. Partner knowledge base 162. You have downloaded an Application fix as a project from the customer connection. Whrere would you upgrade it to ? a. Demo b. Production db c. development db d. Application upgrade 163. Which one of the following is a trasaction control statement .. a. insert b. delete c. create d. Commit 164. Given a SQL Statement, we have been asked to check the right syntax .. Select the components which form the part of Integration Broker a. Msg. Agent b. File Layout c. CI d. app. Messaging 165. How many Message nodes are possible for a database. a. 1 b. 10 c. 100 d. Unlimited 166. Question based on changing prompt table, what happens when changing from NO EDIT TO EDIT option a. user can type own values b. user can type only prompt table values c. user can type only prompt table values and the default values gets populated from the database. 167. How will you get a single ouptut by combining two or more queries... a. UNION b. Outer join c. Inner Join d. Sub query 168. What are the views available in App. Designer project workspace(multiple answer) a. Development b. Upgrade c. Results d. Validate e. Reference 169. In which one of the following views would you see the fields, criteria, and other details associated with the current query? a. Component view b. Object view c. Query view d. Designer view e. Record view 170. Which one of the following Data Types is NOT supported by the PeopleCode programming environment? a. OBJECT b. NUMBER c. TIMESTAMP d. DATE e. STRING 171. What is the default Crystal Report that PeopleSoft Query tool creates?

a. DEFAULT.RPT b. ACTQRY.RPT c. CRYQRY.RPT d. QRYCRY.RPT e. QUERY.RPT 172. Which one of the following steps is NOT part of performing an upgrade? a. Apply all outstanding patches, prior to upgrade. b. Perform a comparison of objects between the source and target databases. c. Populate a project to be used for the upgrade. d. Stamp the target database. e. Copy the project to the database being upgraded. 173. Which command is valid in both bootstrap and regular mode when operating the data mover? a. REPLACE b. RENAME c. EXPORT d. REPLACE_VIEW e. GRANT_USER 174. What are the Tabs that you see in a Application Engine’s Program Properties? 1. General 2. State Records 3. Advanced 4. Section Filtering 5. Temp Tables a. 1, 2, 4, 5 & 3 b. 1, 5, 2 & 4 c. 1, 2, 5 & 3 d. 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 e. 1, 2, 5 & 3 175. You have modified some values on a page and then accidentally clicked the navigation headings in the breadcrumbs. Which of the following is true in that situation? a. The system will prompt you to save before the navigation takes place. b. The system will exit the page without prompting you to save any changes. c. The system will display a warning message before exiting the page. d. The system will exit the page but the changes are saved automatically. e. The system will exit the page without prompting you to save any changes. 176. What is the max length a record definition can have? a. 13 b. 15 c. 17 d. 14 177. The Section Filtering menu options allow you to filter the current view so that you only see Sections and Steps based on specified criteria. This feature will typically be used in situations where you are developing Application Engine programs intended to run: a. in Multiple Markets b. on Multiple Platforms c. with effective dated sections d. All of the above 178. Why shouldn’t you run the scripts (generated by the build process) through Data Mover? a. The scripts may contain syntax specific to your database platform that Data b. Mover is not designed to process. c. The scripts generated may not include all the fields in the record definition. d. Data Mover can run any kind of scripts. e. None of the above 179. You can select deferred mode processing at the field level, page level and component level. Which level will override the

other two? a. Page level b. Field level c. Component level d. In order for a field on the component to run in deferred mode, deferred mode must be selected at each of those levels. 180. Pressing the Refresh button on a Page will force: a. Processing on the application server to determine which fields have changed since the last transmission; and to execute any processing logic associated with those changes. b. Processing on the Database server to determine which fields have changed since the last transmission; and to execute any processing logic associated with those changes. c. Processing on the web server to determine which fields have not changed since the last transmission changes. d. None of the above 181. While creating a Query (Public or Private) involving two tables using PSQUERY, what happens as soon as you select a second record. a. Query will detect the second record and warns the user by displaying a warning message. b. Query executes the query displaying results. c. Query will detect the join and display the Join Criteria dialog box. d. Query includes only common key fields and will delete other fields in the fields tab. e. Query will detect the join and display the Join Criteria dialog box. 182. Which of the following is not provided by PSQUERY for formatting QUERY output? a. Change the column headings b. Specify a sort order for the result rows c. Display Translate Table values in place of codes. d. Display Prompt Table Values in place of codes. e. Display Prompt Table Values in place of codes. 183. Which of the following is correct in regards to the usage of ReUse statement in App.Engine Programs: (1). Don't use ReUse if you use %BIND variables to build parts of the SQL statement (2). If you use STATIC option on the %BIND you can use ReUse. (3). Don't use ReUse if you have %BIND variables in the field list of a SELECT statement unless the value is constant. (4). You can have Application Engine recompile a reused statement by using the %ClearCursor function. a. 1, 3 only b. 2 & 4 only c. 1, 2 & 3 only d. 2, 3 & 4 only e. All 1, 2, 3 & 4 184. Which of the following is not true: a. Application Engine Definition is an Application Designer Object b. Application Engine Developers can take advantage of all the interface benefits that Application Designer offers. c. Multiple window support, which allows a developer to have multiple Application Engine programs open simultaneously. d. Change control support allows you to manage access to Application Engine objects by locking records. e. You can easily launch the PeopleCode Editor and the SQL Editor from within the Application Engine Designer interface, as needed. f. None of the above. 185. What is the order of the standard boolean operators in people code? a. OR, AND, NOT b. NOT, AND, OR c. AND, NOT, OR d. NOT, OR, AND e. NOT, AND, OR

186. If the Component Processor encounters an Error in one of these events, the user can't fix it. The user has no control over processing that occurs in these events: 1) FieldDefault

2)FieldFormula 3)RowInit 4)FieldChange 5)Prepopup 6)RowDelete 7)SavePreChange a. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6 only b. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 7 only c. 2, 4, & 7 only d. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 7 only e. 1, 2, 3 & 6 only f. 3, 4, 5, 6 & 7 only. 187. What does the PeopleCode Built-in function Exact do? a. Compares two Date Variables b. Compares two text strings c. Compares two string variables d. Compares two numeric variables. 188. When you add or subtract 2 date values or 2 time values, the result is given in a. DATE b. TIME c. DATETIME d. NUMBER 189. There are ___________ PeopleCode events that act as exit points from the Component Processor Flow. a. 20 b. 15 c. 17 d. 19 190. Which one of the following is incorrect in case of System Variables: a. Provide access to system information. b. Prefixed with the ‘&’ character. c. can be used wherever you can use a constant d. can assign their values to temp variables. 191. Usually RowInit is paired with a. FieldDefault b. SaveEdit c. FieldChange d. RowDelete e. FieldChange 192. Which of the following are true with SQR Server 6.0? a. Expanded DDO functionality b. Multi-byte encoding c. Color-printing support d. All of the above e. None of the above 193. Which SQR do you have to run to setup/create a sample database. a. aurefrsh b. cretaedb c. loadall d. setupdb e. None of the above 194. Page numbers can be printed in a __________format with the PAGE-NUMBER and LAST-PAGE commands. a. “Page n of m” b. “n of m” c. “Page# n”

d. “n/m” 195. What happens if SQR commands in a SELECT paragraph are not indented at least by one space. a. Nothing happens b. While compiling SQR automatically indents all SQR commands c. They will be treated as COLUMN names and the SQR will abend. d. SQR treats them as Database columns but will not abend the SQR program. 196. What will be the output in #loc? LET $code = ‘abcdefgh’ find ’cde’ in $code 0 #loc a. 2 b. 1 c. 4 d. 3 197. When a business event is triggered, the system follows these 3 steps to decide to whom to route the work item. Find out which does not. a. It binds the query's bind variables using data from the page that's triggering the event. b. It runs the query, checking each user's route control profile to determine whether the user meets the selection criteria. c. It routes the work item to the appropriate role users. d. Assigns one of the roles provided for use with route controls. 198. Which function is used in every Workflow PeopleCode Program? a. TriggerWorkFlowEvent b. OnRouteSubscriptionEvent c. TriggerBusinessEvent d. None of the above e. TriggerBusinessEvent 199. Which of the following has Workflow as one of their events? (1) Record Field (2) Component Record Field (3) Menu (4). Component a. 2 & 4 b. 1 & 3 c. 1 & 4 d. 2 & 3 200. When using COM API bindings to access a component interface from a local client machine or web server, you need three of the following. Find one which is not. a. Third party application (non-PeopleSoft) b. External API installation c. PeopleSoft_PeopleSoft.tlb d. The Microsoft JDK 201. How are the fields that appear on a search dialog box determined? a. All fields on the search record that have the search key, alternate search key and the list box item checked on. b. All fields on the search record that have the search key or alternate search key. c. All fields on the search record that have the alternate search key. d. All fields on the search record that have the search key and the list box item checked on. 202. List out the actions that can be performed using a PeopleSoft Page that is not Effective-dated? a. Add & Update/Display Only. b. Add, Update/Display, Update/Display All & Correction only. c. Add, Update/Display All & Correction only. d. Update/Display, Update/Display All & Correction only. 203. Is Translate Table Effective Dated? a. No. b. If we include historical rows then it is Effective-dated.

c. Yes d. None of the above. 204. When can more than one record be referenced under a scroll area? a. If you want to Add key values to a search record and if you specify Add Search Record option in Component properties. b. If the search record is a SQL view and built at the database level. c. If it is a related Display field it can be used from another record. d. If Level zero keys are available in the scroll area we can refer to more than one record in a scroll area. 205. What is the significance of Reasonable Date record field property? a. When the date entered is 45 days more than or 45 days less than the system date, a error is displayed. b. When the date entered is 30 days more than or 30 days less than the system date, a warning is displayed. c. It does the field validation using PeopleCode if date is not entered in the correct format. d. It correctly formats the date no matter in which format it was entered 206. What happens if you do not make a check box required? a. You will get warning message “Check Box is not marked as required” when you tab out of that field. b. You will be able to save the Page, but the Check Box will have the default value of “NO”. c. The property is automatically set when the Record Definition is Built. d. You will get an error message “Invalid On/Off Checkbox Value” when you save the Page. 207. What is the purpose of Inquiry Pages? a. To view the data and make changes if necessary in correction mode. b. To view the data without making any changes. c. To update and view the data using Update/Display mode. d. To be able to Add an Inquiry using Add action. 208. Name a few Predefined formats for Character Field Type? a. Uppercase, Mixedcase b. Name, Number and SSN c. Both (a) & (b) d. Uppercase, Mixedcase, Name & Number only. 209. What is the difference between the development view and upgrade view? Limit your answer to one sentence. 210. What PeopleCode events are invoked before a Page is displayed? a. RowSelect, FieldDefault, FieldFormula, and RowInit. b. RowSelect, FieldChange, FieldFormula, and RowInit. c. RowSelect, FieldDefault, FieldChange, and RowInit. d. RowSelect, FieldDefault, FieldFormula, and RowDelete. 211. What PeopleCode events are invoked when a Component is saved? a. Pre-popup, SavePreChg, Workflow, and SavePostChg. b. SaveEdit, SavePreChg, Workflow, and SavePostChg. c. SavePreChg, Workflow, Activate and SavePostChg. d. SaveEdit, SavePostChg, Activate and Workflow 212. What major difference is there between derived/work fields and other fields on panel definitions? a. Derived/Work fields can be only on occurs level 0 and need to come from the primary record definition for the level. b. Derived/Work fields can be only on occurs level 3 and do not need to come from the primary record definition for the level. c. Derived/Work fields can be on any occurs level and need to come from the primary record definition for the level. d. Derived/Work fields can be on any occurs level and do not need to come from the primary record definition for the level. 213. In which sections , the Begin-Select paragraph is allowed. a. Begin-Program b. Begin-Procedure c. Both (a) & (b)

d. None of the above 214. What will be the output in #loc? LET $code = ‘abcdefgh’ find ’cde’ in $code 0 #loc a. 2 b. 1 c. 4 d. 3

215. In which section can you create an array? a. You can use it in Begin-SETUP and End-SETUP. b. You can use it in Begin-PROCEDURE and End-PROCEDURE. c. You can use it in Begin-Program and End-Program. d. All of the above. 216. For downloading patches and fixes , you have gone to the customer connection and looking under 8 april, 2000 and see Report IDS like R-CCHEN-VP14JM. What does R stand for? a. Tools b. Released c. Required d. Application e. Resolved 217. After logging into customer connection, you wish to search for fixes/patches. What are the search criteria available ? (choose 3) a. Report ID b. Date / time c. Platform d. Release e. Developer ID 218. Which one of the following is a trasaction control statement .. a. insert b. delete c. create d. Commit 219. Identify the below script? (d) 1. (e) (f) 1. (g) a. HTML b. Java Script c. Java d. People code e. XML 220. Client has a batch process that was running for one hour. Now it is taking four hours to execute the same process without a considerable change in data. What would you suggest to rectify this problem? a. Delete client cache - Correct b. Restart the Process scheduler server c. Tune Database d. Re write the program

221. Which one is not part of PIA a. Web Server b. Web Browser c. Windows Client d. App Server e. Batch Server 222. Where is the default system style sheet defined for the entire system? a. Web Server b. App Server c. Configuration Manager d. File Server 223. When a SQL table is dropped or recreated in RDBMS, which of the below are restored by People Soft? a. Only the Views b. Only the tables indexes c. Only the grants d. Views & Indexes 224. How many settings can be done for a check box that appears in a search dialog box? a. One - Correct b. Two c. Three d. None of the above 225. What does a system catalog table store? a. Application Data b. Record definitions c. Database related information d. Objects information 226. Which of the following became obsolete with PS Ver8 ? a. User Profiles b. Permission Lists c. Roles d. Operator Class

227. Which of the following menu options allows you to modify the Last Process Instance Number used within the system? a. Process Scheduler, Use, Job Definitions b. Process Scheduler, Use, Process Servers c. Process Scheduler, Use, Process System d. Process Scheduler, Use, Administration e. Process Scheduler, Use, Process Definitions f. None of the above 228. You just finished customization work that involved the creation of many new objects. You must now migrate these objects from your development database (source) to a testing database (target) to conduct more elaborate testing. Referring to the above information, why would adding your objects to a Project streamline the migration to a new database? a. Projects do not copy the actual objects, but only the Project Definition. You should still migrate the objects individually. b. Projects automatically overwrite the same objects in the target database and, thus, reduce the need for consistency checks. c. Migrating projects automatically produces a comparison report of the objects in the Project and those same objects in the target database. d. Projects enable migration of individual objects only which ensures you do not overwrite objects in the target database unknowingly. e. Projects provide the ability to migrate all objects at once or each object type individually.

229. PeopleSoft has its own naming convention for system and non-system (application) tables. In the list below, RECORDNAME refers to the name of any table or record. Referring to the above information, which one of the following

identifies the naming convention PeopleSoft uses for system tables? a. PS_RECORDNAME b. SYSRECORDNAME c. PS$RECORDNAME d. PSRECORDNAME e. SYS_PSRECORDNAME 230. Your company obtained the newest Application Release of PeopleSoft, and you need to prepare for the upgrade. Upon reading the new Release Notes, you notice that changes were made to two COBOL modules (batch programs). 231. You need to decide how to compare the current versions of these COBOL programs with the versions delivered with the new PeopleSoft application release. Which would be the fastest method of comparing these different versions? a. Find Object References. b. Application Designer, Compare Batch Programs.c. Application Designer, Upgrade View.d. Use nonPeopleSoft comparison tools.e. Application Designer, Tools, Upgrade, Compare & Report.Ans.25. Which one of the following tree types is NOT supported in the PeopleSoft tree manager?a. Node-Oriented trees b. Query trees c. Detail trees d. Summary trees e. Combination treesf. None of the aboveg. All of the above Ans. e 232. Why would the File, New and File, Delete menu items be disabled in the security administrator interface? a. You have not been granted access to the menu items within security administrator. b. You have not been granted access to department security. c. You have not been granted object security access. d. You do not have access to the tree manager. e. You have not been granted access for creating and deleting operator and class definitions.

233. In SQL query, how do you use dynamic where clause? a. You should enclose it in forward slashes. Like /$dynamic_query/ b. You should enclose it in backward slashes. Like \dynamic_queryc. You should enclose it in square brackets. Like [$dynamic_query] d. None of the above

234. Where can you use the other SQL DDL statements like Create, Drop, Alter , Grant, Revoke? a. You can use it in Begin-SELECT and End-SELECT paragraph. b. You can use it in Begin-SQL and End-Sql paragraph. c. You can use it in Begin-Program and End-Program paragraph. d. You can use it in Begin-SQC End-SQC paragraph. Peoplesoft Interview Questions and Answers listed below. 1. What is an ERP? It is a process of integrated flow of Information, which binds on the organization together. 2. What is an ERP system? It is an integrated application software module providing operational, managerial and strategic Information for improving productivity, quality and quantity to improve competence. 3. Describe the Life Cycle of a Project (ERP Implementation)? The Project passes through the following stages. 1. Analysis 2. Designing 3. Coding 4. Testing 5. Implementation 6. Maintenance. 4. Define People Tools? A Collection of software programs, utility scripts and (reports, messages, Cobol SQL statements, database tables and data that provide the frame work for creating, using and modifying people soft applications. People tools provide built in business functionally and maintains the capability

that directly increase productivity and simplify system design. 5. What does Application Designer mean? It is an integrated development environment that is used to develop People soft applications. 6. Functionality of Application Designer? The following are the uses of Application Designer. 1. Design and create database tables. 2. Design on-line panels 3. Controlling on-line processing flow. 4. Create application windows and menus 5. Providing security for the database. 7. Difference between Two-tier and Three-tier architecture? Incase of three-tier architecture an application server is connected between the database server (Back end) and the client (front end). Incase of two-tier architecture the server is directly connected to the client. 8. Advantages of three-tier architecture? The advantages of three-tier configuration are… 1. Reduce the LAN traffic. 2. Built-in functionality 3. Increase the productivity. 4. No SQL at the client level. 5. Improved performance over WAN. 6. Increased Scalability. (regardless of the number of users connected you can maintain constant performance level) 9. What is a project? User defined collection of related definitions (fields, records, panels, panelgroups and menus). 1. What is PIA and what are its components? It is n-tier architecture. We have client, web server, application server and Database server. We have jolt and tuxedo. We have WSL, WSH, JSL, JSH, QUEUES and services. In database server we have system tables, peopletools tables and application tables. 2. Differentiate Field edit and Save edit? In Field edit for each field change, a transition to the application server to the database is taken place. In Save edit for all the fields, only one transition to the application server to the Database is taken place. 3. What are think time functions? Think-time functions suspend processing either until the user has taken some action (such as clicking a button in a message box), or until an external process has run to completion. 4. In which events error & warning are used most extensively. Field edit, Save edit, Search save, row delete, row insert. 5. Is there any way by which you can find out whether the user is in Add mode or Update mode? %mode---returns A---for Add mode. Returns U –for Update mode 6. What is the purpose of the SQLEXEC function? What are its benefits and draw backs? SQLEXEC is used to execute the sql statements (select, insert,update,delete). We can get only one row at a time. 7. How is the searchinit event most often used by people soft application? A) Searchinit fires before the search dialogue page is displayed to the end user.For this reason searchinit is often used to enhance roll level security by inserting and graying out certain values to the search dialogue page.

10. What databuffer classes are available in people code? Rowset, Row, Record, Field, Array, File, Sql, chart, grid and so on. 11. When we select a component what events will be fired? If default mode for component is search mode: only searchinit will fired .If default mode for component is new mode :field default, field formula, rowinit, searchinit. 12. What are different variables in people code and their Scope? System variables and User defined variables. Scope --- Global, Component, Local. 13. What is default processing? In default processing, any blank fields in the component are set to their default value. You can specify the default value either in the Record Field Properties, or in FieldDefault PeopleCode 14. What is difference between field default and Row init? Field default specifies only the default value for a field when we are in Add mode. Row init fires only when a row of data coming from database to component buffer. 15. What is difference between saveprechange and savepostchange? Which function directly interacts with the database? Saveprechange---last event that executes before updating the data from component buffer to the database. Savepostchange –fires after the updation of data in the database. SQLEXEC --- function directly interacts with the database. 16. What is Getlevel 0()? What is the use of %subrec and %selectall functions? Getlevel0 ()---used the get the rowset of the level0. %subrec--is used only in Dynamic View SQL where it expands to the columns of a subrecord: %selectall--%SelectAll is shorthand for selecting all fields in the specified record, wrapping date/time fields with %DateOut, %TimeOut. 17. What is an array in people code? What is maximum dimension of an array? Which function inserts values into an array? What is “pop”? An array is a collection of data storage locations, each of which holds the same type of data. The maximum depth of a PeopleCode array is 15 dimensions. Push and unshift are the functions of the array used to add the elements into the array one from the end of the array and one from the beginning. Pop is a function of array used to select and delete an element from the end of the array. 18. What is difference between Getrowset and Createrowset in people code? Getrowset –is used to get rowset for a record in the component buffer. Createrowset—is used to create rowset for a record which in database, and is also called a Standalone rowset 20. What is differed processing and its advantages? Postpones some user actions to reduce the number of trips to the database so that increases the performance (in system edits, field edit, and field change). Advantages: 1) Reduces the network traffic. 2) Increases the performance. 33. Write the syntax to access third level record field using object oriented peoplecode? &fld=Getlevel0 ()(1).GetRowset(Record..GetRow(1), GetRowset (Record.).GetRow(1), GetRowset (Record.).GetRow(1), GetRecord (Record.).GetFieild(Field.)) 21. What are the built-functions used to control translate values dynamically? Adddropdownitem () Deletedropdownitem ()

22. How to populate data into grid in online? &Rs.Select or Scrollselect (). SECURITY Before accessing a people soft application what levels of security must be passed through. a) Field level security b) Row level security c) Maintain security d) Definition security e) Portal security. 23.What is the use of primary permission list in user profile? Primary permission list is used for mass change and definition security purposes. How to authorize the user to run a process or report? To authorize a user to run a process, the process group, which contains the process or report, should be added to the permission list of that user. 24.How to give access to the records that are to be used in a query? To give access to the records that are to be used in query, we have create a new query security tree and add the records which we want to give the access and then assign a access group to the tree. After that we have to add that query tree and query access group to the permission list. 25.What are the rules used by the system to determine whether a user is authorized to update an object? The user should have the permission to update the object. This is given by the Definition security. The group, which holds the object, should be added to the permission list of the user in update mode. What are the different ways we can set up the portal security to access component in portal? 1) Structure & content 2) Menu import 3) Register component 1. What is Application Engine? It is the tool, which performs, background SQL processing against our application data tables. It is an alternative for COBOL, SQL or SQR Programs. Other tools such as query tool and mass change generate SQL. 2. What are the parts of Application Engine? Application Engine consists of 4 parts. 1. Application: It is a set of SQL statements. 2. Steps: It is the smallest unit of work committed in an application. 3. Sections: Comprises of 1 or more steps 4. Statements: SQL statements like update, insert, delete or select are issued. 3. What is the advantage of using Application Engine? The following are the advantages of using Application Engine. Encapsulation Unlike applications developed using COBOL or SQR, Application Engine applications reside completely within your database. With Application Engine, there are the programs to compile, no statements to store, and no need to directly interact with the operating environment in use. You can build, run and debug your applications without existing People Tools. Effective Dating Application sections are effective dated-meaning you can activate/deactivate a section as of a particular date. This enables you to archive sections as you modify them, instead of destroying them. In the future if you decide to revert to a previous incarnation of a section you can simply reactivate it. SQL / Meta-SQL Support In addition to writing your SQL within Application Engine, you can also copy SQL statements into Application Engine from SQL talk or any other SQL utility with few – if any changes. RDBMS platforms have many differing syntax rules – especially in regard to date, time and other numeric calculations. For the most part you can work around this problem using Meta-SQL which Application Engine supports. This language was created to handle different RDBMS SQL

syntax’s by replacing them with a standard syntax, called Meta-strings. With in Platform specific sections You can also have the ability to call generic portions of SQL statements by using the & CLAUSE function. This means you can write your generic SQL portions just once, and reference them from your different platform versions. Set Processing Support Set processing is a SQL technique used to process groups (or sets) of rows of one time rather than one at a time. Application Engine is particularly effective of processing these types of applications. Object Orientation Unless designed to anticipate changes in field attributes. COBOL applications may need to be modified when things change. If a developer increases a field’s length, then it may need to be changed in every instance where the COBOL program uses this field as a bind or select variable. This can require a good bit of effort. And, if not handled properly, a change like this can cause confusing errors. For example, if the length of a field in the COBOL is wrong, it may work fine, or you may get an error, or the field may get truncated. PORTABILITY You can use Data Mover to import/export your applications. This means that you can export an application(s) into a file, and attach it to an e-mail message. Then, the recipient can simply use the IMPORT feature of Data Mover, and the application is ready to run. 4. What is a Cache Record? The Cache record (or cache) is a physical People soft record, keyed by process instance that must be created and maintained by the Application Engine developer. This record defines the fields that an application uses to pas values from one SQL statements to another. You retrieve cache field values by the Application Engine and BIND function; you assign cache values using & SELECT. 5. What is unique about panels, which refer to view as opposed to physical tables? Panels that refer to views in People soft are not used for insert, update or delete. All fields on these panels are display only. 6. How search records are used? Search records are used to search, retrieve and filter data. Search records also define the structure of the dialog box. 7. Where are the search records assigned? Search records are assigned to a panel group in a menu. 8. Does the search record for a panel has to be the same as the record being Accessed on the panel? Why or Why not? The search record for the panel does not have to be the same as the record being Accessed on the panel because the search record is used to search for and or Filter the search key. 9. How can a search record dialog box be suppressed? A search record dialog box can be suppressed by assigning a search record that does not have search key. 10. What do search views delivered by People soft do besides displaying the dialog Box? Search views delivered by People soft are used to implement row level security as well as display a dialog box. 11. What do you need to do to modify the search views? To modify a search view, we need to change the record definition and recreate the underlying SQL view.

13. When will there be two occurs level records in a panel group? If you are referring to two different record definitions that share a same high-level key then twolevel one-scroll bar can be displayed as stacked scroll bars. 14. In what order does the application processor fill buffer for the panel group? The application processor uses occurs level in the panel group to fill the buffer. 15.Differentiate Error V/s Warning statements in People code? The error statement issues a message and the condition causing the error must Be corrected before proceeding. The warning statement issues a message and The user can proceed without changing any values. 16. Where can you run Jobs? The process scheduler can run jobs on the client or a server machine. 17. What restrictions are placed on multi-process jobs? A multi process jobs can only be scheduled to run on a server. 18. List the three output destinations available through the Process Scheduler? You can direct the output to a printer file and windows screen. 19. Where do you set up default operator / class options for Process Monitor? In operator security, using change, process profile. 20. What are the advantages of incorporating Table set ids into People soft applications? Table set Ids allow you to share sets of values (codes) in the same prompt table. 21. What fields should be at the tope of every search record definition that use table set Ids? SET ID is the field that should be at the top of every record definition that uses table set Ids. 22. What is a Record Group ID? A Record group ID is a group of record definitions that are Sharing the same set control field. 23. What do you determine using Table set Ids control information? Table set ID control information determines how the information should be shared. The Table set ID control panel defines which Table set Ids set control filed code will use for each record group. 24. What are the three types of Maps used by the navigator? The 3 types of Maps used by the navigator are.. 1. Business Process Map 2. Activity Map 3. Step Map 25. What are the types of layers in Crystal reports? There are 4 types of layers in Crystal Reports. They are.. 1. Report Header - In this, we will write title, date, and logos of the company.

2. Page Header – Used to write column headings. 3. Detail – Contains database column values. 4. Page Footer – Used to write page numbers and address. 1. Define security administrator? Security administrator is used to control and access the various People soft menus. 2. How many types of security administrator profiles? Define? There are three types of Security administrator profiles: 1. Access Profile: It is an RDBMS ID. It provides the necessary Ids and password for behind-thescene process. 2. Class Profile: It is defined to organize the users into groups with common access rights or privileges. 3. Operator Profile: It is commonly referred as a Operator Ids or operator having associated sign on passwords. 3. What is Set ID or Table Set? Set ID shares common control table values. 4. Define Object Security? The Security profile which is created as an operator security to restrict access to People soft data. 5. Define Object Group? It is a collection of one or ore objects that form a logical group for security purpose. 6. What are the steps involved in developing a conversion strategy? The following are the steps involved: 1. Setting Operational Goals. 2. Timing 3. Developing and testing data load routines 4. Mapping your data 5. Performing conversion analysis 6. Evaluating source data 7. Evaluating Target Table. 7. What operations can Import Manager perform? Import Manager provides a mechanism for converting data from existing files to your People soft application data tables. Record definitions are foundations for Import Manager. 1. Field formats and editing: Import manager is used to upload file data from a designated source file into your application database. The source file containing data to be imported must be a fixed length ASCII file (. DAT FILE) 2. SQL Inserts: The Import manager performs only SQL inserts. This means that new rows of data with a unique key can be inserted into SQL table. Updates to an existing row of data cannot be done through import manager. 3. SQL commit: The SQL commit takes place at the end of each import load. If the import stops before the end-of-life, none of the new rows of data will be written to the database.

8. Will the import manager write data values to the target table if it encounters key values in the source table? NO – If the utility encounters key values on the source file, error message is flashed and the rows will not be written to the database. To overcome this problem, we will have to enable “by pass key value” control in the Import manager. 9. Options available to run Import Manager? The following options are available to run import manager. 1. Edit: Read through the rows to imported and processes an edit report of the Results. No data is written to the database. 2. Load: Writes rows of data to the database and automatically prints an edit report Summarizing the result. 3. Compare: Reserved for future use. It currently has the same functionality as an Edit. 10. What is Translate Table? A translate table is a prompt table that serves as data dictionary to store values for fields that don’t need individual prompt tables of their own. 11. What are the limitations of Translate table? 1. Field type should be character 2. Minimum Field length should be 1 to 4 characters. 3. Field values should be small (static). 12. What is Effective Data? Effective data is used to store history, Current and Future information. 13. History date Vs past Date? Past date - Within 30 days of current date is called Past date. History date - Above 30 days of current date is called History Date. 14. What is a record? A Group of non-repetitive fields is called a record. 16. How many types of Displays are there in the tool bar? 1. Field Display - It shows the filed attributes (fieldname, Type, Len, Format, H, and Shortname, Long name 2. Use Display - It shows key related characteristics and default values for the fields (Field name, type, direction indicates, search key, list, system indicates, audit, H, default values) 3. Edit Display - It shows the auditing options available for the fields (field name, type required , edit, prompt table, reasonable date, people code) 4. People code display - It shows the different events and the user can choose required event to write people code. 1. What is a set ID or Table set? It is going share common control table values. 2. What is an object group? Collection of one or more objects that form a logical group for security purpose. 3. What is business Process Map? It is an alternative method for accessing panels or it is a graphical representation of a map. 4. What is an activity? It is a collection of logical steps. It represents specific transaction a user might need to perform. 5. What is a business Process?

It is a collection of activities and it represents broad area functionality, categorizing the several activities. 6.What is a Process? A task involved by the system. 7. What is a process instance? It is a process number used to request process. 8. What is a process server agent? It is going to initialize, select and parse the program. 9. What is a command line parameter? The executable (.EXE) file is nothing but command line parameter. E.g. C:/SQLbin\SQL.exe. 11. What is Application Upgrade? It is a migration of object from one database to another and updating other system components such as application software. 12. What is Mass change and explain the uses of Mass change? Mass change is a SQL generator you can use to develop and perform custom applications. Using mass change, a developer can set up a series of INSERT, UPDATE, OR DELETE SQL statements that the end user can execute to perform business functions. The overall structure of Mass change is similar to that of People soft Query Except that Query retrieves data from the database while mass change actually updates the database. The uses of Mass change are as follows. 1. It is used to perform high volume set oriented transactions. 2. Copy data from table or table 3. Archive table data (Archive means that the data does not have backup file and uses to update the values) 13. Why use Mass change and why not SQL execute to update a record, which is not attached to the panel? The reason why Mass change is preferred over SQL exec is…. 1. Two- Three Mass change program can work at a single time. 2. Data / information need not be defined in Mass change 3. Mass change can be used for file download upload. 14. What are the steps involved in Mass change? The following are the order of steps involved in Mass change. `1. Define type 2. Assign to template 3. Operator security 4.Mass change definition 15. What is Mass change group? Adding all Mass change into a group. (i.e., Multiple Mass change definitions can be executed simultaneously). 16. What is workflow? To an extent all the business processes defined using the Application designer involve workflow. However we usually reserve the term to refer to processes that involve multiple users and the routing of data between the users. People soft workflow tools help you build the routings into your computer systems. You use them to tie together the individual steps so that the system can help coordinate the activities. 17. How Workflow is controlled? It is controlled by Decision Point (it is graphically denoted by a (?)). Where user has to choose which activity is appropriate towards the next step.

Note: While defining the above fields in the record definition, a key has to be assigned in the record field properties. 19. What is routing in workflow? Transfer of roles / users 20. Why workflow is used and explains the advantage of workflow in People soft application? Workflow typically eliminates the job tasks associated with controlling paper flow, and frees people the once performed clerical functions to do more meaningful work. · Tasks that don’t require user involvement · Tasks that involve non People soft users · Tasks that several users work on together. 21. Define the components of workflow? There are 3 underlying components of workflow i.e., Rules, Roles, Routing. Rules Rules are your company’s business practices captured in software. Rules determine what activities are required to process your business data. The rules are contained in policies and procedures documents. Roles Roles describe how people fit into the workflow. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as clerks or managers. Your business rules typically specify what user role needs to do an activity. Roles direct the work to types of people rather than to individuals. Identifying roes instead of individual users makes your workflow more flexible and easier to maintain. Roles remain stable even as people change jobs. Routings Routings connect the activities in the workflow. They are the systems means of moving information from one place to another, from one step to the next. Routings bring the flow into workflow. The network of routings creates a business process from what used to be isolated activities. Routings make it possible to deploy applications throughout the enterprise. They work through the levels and departments of an enterprise to bring together the role that are necessary to complete complex tasks.

1. Define Data Move? Data Mover is People Tool that provides a convenient way to: 0. Transfer application data between People soft data tables 0. Move People soft database across Operating systems and database plat forms. 0. Create release specific archives of People soft database or individual People soft records. 0. Execute SQL statements against any People soft database, regardless of the underlying operating systems or database plat form. 0. Control database security and access. 2. What is the usage of Data mover? Data mover is used to create edit and run scripts. These scripts may include any combination of SQL commands and Data mover commands for exporting and importing database contents. 3. What is Trace SQL? Trace SQL logs a variety of information about SQL activity called from People tools and from batch COBOL on a client or server. OR SQL Trace records information about the actual API (Application Process Interface) Calls both our GUI (Graphic User Interface) and COBOL Programs send to the Database. This tool is useful for debugging SQL Note: While operating with the Data Mover utility, the trace option should be disabled. Use SET NO TRACE statement to disable the SQL Trace. 4. What is BOOTSTRAP MODE? When the Data Mover is launched using the Database Access ID and Password, it is called BOOTSTRAP MODE. Typically, using Bootstrap mode is necessary for database loading, because there are no People soft security tables established yet. It is also helpful for accomplishing other security-related tasks, such as running Grant_Users and Encrypt_password scripts. In Bootstrap mode the following commands are not valid export, rename and replace View. 5. Explain the types of commands in the Data Mover? A Data Mover script can contain two types of commands. 0. Data Mover commands: Used to export and import database information and to otherwise modify database. Also, used to control script execution, call other Data Mover files and to enter commands. 0. SQL commands: These include both standard and non-standard SQL commands and are used to modify the database. 6. What is SQR? Features of SQR? *SQR (Structured Query Reports) is a programming language used in data processing and data reporting. SQR program can execute multiple queries.* Features: 0. More flexible

0. Scalability for Client and Server architecture. 0. Multiple platform portability 0. Multiple RDBMS portability 7. What is a FLAG? It is an attribute given to programming for processing and generating output destination file. 8. What is difference between .LIS and .SPF file? . LIS (list file) is used for line printer execution. Normally it is used for printing cheques. .SPF file is portable format, this is used for all window-based applications with any

printer. Normally it is used for MSPAINT, Image, and Graphics. 9. How many types of SQR files are there? There are 5 types of SQR files…. 5. SQC: SQC program files contain commonly included procedures that are called by other SQR programs. 5. . LIS when an SQR reports generate output it is sent to a file with an. LIS extension. 5. . LOG: SQR.LOG file is the output file used by People soft. This file contains all information such as errors and displays statements. That is output to the terminal during the execution of SQR. 5. . MAX: SQR does not dynamically allocate memory. The default program allocations (which were coded for lower DOS memory) usually have to be increased for complex SQR programs. Note: People soft uses a .MAX file to increase any SQR parameter where default is not adequate for the program. There is one main .MAX file for processing under SQR W (windows) called ALLMAXES.MAX 5. SQT: These program files are precompiled SQR programs. As a People soft 5+ there are no delivered precompiled SQR programs. 10. Explain briefly about flags? The SQR command supports several flags. Each flag begins with a dash (-). Flags with arguments must be followed directly by the argument with no intervening space. SQR Command-Line Flags Flag Description -A Causes the report output to be appended to an existing file of the user name -Bnn (Oracle,SYBASE CT-Lib) indicates how many rows to buffer each time data is retrieved from the database. The default is 10 rows. -C Specifies that the cancel dialog box appear while the program. -CB (Callable SQR) forces the communication box to be used. -DEBUG (xxx) (Sybase) Causes lines preceded by #DEBUG to be compared. Without this flag, these lines are ignored. -E(file) Causes error messages to be directed to the named file, or to the default file report errs. If no errors occur, no file is created. -F (file) (Directory) overrides the default output file name program .lis

-KEEP In addition to .LIS files, creates an .SPF file for each report that your program generates. - LOCK(RR]CS]RO]RL]XX] (SQL Base) Defines the types of locking (isolation level for the session. -NR (SQL Base) specifies that the No Recovery mode is used when connecting to the database. -XCB Do not use the communication box. -XL Prevents SQR from logging on to the database. Programs run in this mode cannot contain any SQL statements. -XMB Disables the error message display so that a program can be run without interruption by error message boxes. -XP (SYBASE DB-Lib) Prevents SQR from creating temporary stored procedures. -XTB Preserves the trailing blanks in an LIS file. -ZIV Invokes the SPF viewer after generating program .spf file. Using this flag implicitly invokes the –KEEP flag to create program .spf file. -ZMF(File) specifies the full path and name of the SQR Error Message file. The Sqr err.dat located in the directory indicated by the SQR DIR environment Variable is the default. 1. What are the sections and paragraphs available? There are five sections and three paragraphs available in SQR programming. The sections include a. Begin-setup End-setup. b. Begin-program End-program. c. Begin-procedure End-procedure. d. Begin-heading End-heading. e. Begin-footing End-footing And the paragraphs include Begin-select paragraph. Begin-SQL paragraph. Begin-document paragraph 2. Is it possible to increase the array size once defined? No, it is not possible to increase the Array size once defined 4. Can you Call a SQR from another SQR? How? We can call one SQR program from another SQR program using Call.callsystem. But this is possible only in UNIX Operating system. 5. Briefly explain Most commonly used SQC’s in SQR programs? : Some of the most commonly used SQC’s are 1.STDAPI.sqc : This Is Process Scheduler Interface which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 2.SETENV.sqc : This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size,Date formats Etc…. 3.NUMBER.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format numbers. 4.DATETIME.sqc : This file contains generalized routines to format dates and times. 6.RESET.sqc : This is an important Footing SQc. 6. What are the commands used in filehandling of sqr? Using File Handling we can Import. Steps are 1. Opening a File Using ‘OPEN FOR-READING’ command.

1. Reading Data From File Using ‘READ’ command. Writing Data into Table Using ‘BEGIN-SQL’ paragraph & ‘INSERT’ command 7. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes. The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 8. How can you Debug SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 2. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 9. What is the difference between sqr and sqc? SQR SQC 1.This is nothing but the Actual 1.This is like a function in SQR. Source program. 2.This consists of Program Section. 2.This does not consists of program Section. 3.This can be Compiled & Executed. 3.This cannot be Compiled and Executed. 4.We cannot call one SQR from 4.We can call one SQC from another SQC or another SQR or SQC. SQR program. 11. Is there any read-only variable in sqr? Column Variables & System Variables are Read-Only Variables. 12. How to pass Inputs for sqr program while running from windows? Using ASK & INPUT Commands. 13. How to pass Inputs to the SQR while running through the Process Scheduler? Using Procedures & SQC’s to access data on Run Control Page (Run Control Fields). 14. What is the purpose of Stdapi.sqc This is a Process Scheduler Interface sqc which is used to initiate and terminate some field values such as Process_instance & Run_cntl_id 15. What is the SQT file? What are the advantages of SQT files? SQT’ file is nothing but resultant file after the compilation (i.e.) Runtime File. By using this SQT file for Execution we can increase the Performance of the program by reduciong the Compilation Time. 16. What is the SQC used to read data from translate table? ‘READXLAT.sqc’ is the SQC used to read data from Translate Table. 17. Which section is mandatory in an SQR program? ‘BEGIN-PROGRAM’ Section is Mandatory for an SQR program. 18. How will you display an image in SQR? Using ‘DECLARE-IMAGE , END-DECLARE’ command. 19. What is use of SETENV.SQC? This is used to set the Default Environment based on the Database such Printer Type, Paper Size, Date formats Etc…. 20. How will you perform ERROR handling in SQR? We can do Error handling in SQR using some command line flags such as –O, -L,-ZMF,-XMB and using Error handling commands such as ON-ERROR = Skip/Warn/Stop (for Compile time errors) ON-ERROR = Procedure Name (for execution stage errors).

22. Can you call procedure in oracle from Sqr? How? To call a database procedure using Begin-select paragraph, the syntax is as follows: Begin-select [(report arguments)] from Dual End-select To call from Begin-sql, the syntax will be Begin-SQL ;; End-SQL 23. Can you connect more than one database using one Sqr? How? Yes. 24. What are the differences between Load lookup and Array ARRAYS LOAD-LOOKUP 1. Arrays can be declared in any section. 1. Load-Lookup is declared in only in SETUP section only. 2. Number of rows are not automatically 2. Numbers of rows are automatically added. gives a error if the number of added. Exceeds the specified number. 3. We should insert data in to Array by 3. Rows are automatically inserted in to programming. Load-Lookup. 4.We can retrive any number of fields. 4.We can retrive only Two fields from from a table. a table. 5.We have Length & Data type. 5.We don’t have Length & Data type. 6.We cannot directly print from Array. 6.We can directly print from Load-Lookup. 25. What are the steps required to run the SQR from peoplesoft environment? Three steps we have to fallow to run the SQR program from the peoplesoft environment (Process Scheduler). These steps include a. Making the SQR program API aware by calling two procedures (stdapi-init, stdapi-term) from the Begin-program section and including the Stdapi.sqc in the bottom of the program. b. Create new run control table or using existing run control table and creating run control page, component and register the component. Creating new run control SQC if we create a new run control table. c. Giving the permission to the user by giving process groups. 27. What are On-break parameters? ON-BREAK causes the specified action to perform in a tabular report when the value of a field changes . The default action prints the field only when its value changes (PRINT=CHANGE).Mainly used for Redundancy of Printing on a page. 28 .How does peoplesoft Process monitor knows that the process (Say sqr report) is at what stage such as initiated, in process, completed etc From the Field Value of ‘RUNSTATUSDESCR’field from ‘PS_PMN_PRCSLIST’ table. 29. How can u Debugging SQR programs? We can Debug SQR using Debugging Commands such as 3. #IF DEBUGxxx #END-IF 2. DISPLAY and 3. SHOW 30. How to refer a global variable in local procedure? After special character (ex.#,&) we use underscore(_) after that variable name. 31. What is -Bnn flag? This is used to specify the number of rows that are to be taken from Dbase to the Buffer because

default the system takes 10 rows at a time. 32. What is -Tnn flag? This is mainly used for testing purpose. We can restrict the system to generate only a specific number of pages instead of generating all pages for testing. This is used in Windows Environment. 33. What is -RS & -RT Flags? RS is used to generate SPF file ie; stopping the program after the comilation. _RT is used to run the SPF file .This is also one kind of Performance increasing technique by saving the compilation time. 34. What are the sections in Sqr? Which one is necessary? Setup, Heading, Footing, Program & Procedure Sections. Program section is the Mandatory section. 35. What is -debug command line flag? This is used for Debugging in SQR. 36. How to place an corporate logo in sqr? Using “Declare Image” command 37. what are the debugging commands in sqr? Show & Display are debugging commands 38. what is the difference between them? Show is used to display more than one variable at a time. Display is used to display only one variable at a time. 1. How SQR Programs are evaluated and executed at different times? FIRST PASS: Or Compile stage. SQR processes the following components of the program. 1. All # include external source files (SQCs) are inserted into the source program. 2. All # commands are evaluated. 3. The setup section is processes including allocation and population of memory arrays created by the load-look up command. 4. Optimization of the SQL data access path is determined. 5. Checks syntax of SQR source program. SECOND PASS: Actual execution of the program source occurs starting at the begin Report stopping at the end-report. 1. Process data for the body section. 2. Senses page overflow or response to new-page command in code. 3. Process heading section 4. Process footing section 5. Writes entire page buffer to file. 4. Explain Print Function? The print command, is both explicit and implicit, is the focal point for formatting and processing. Explicit print is used to print database column referenced by its pseudonym (&column name) or a user defined variable. The Implicit print is only valid for database columns as they are retrieved in the select para. 5. What are positional co-ordinates? Printing in SQR is placing output on the page grid. Position syntax is used to define where to place data on the page within a given section. 6. Explain briefly about On-break processing? On-break option on columns will cause each column to break independently from each other. When a break occurs the following happens, After procedure are processed in descending sequence from the highest level to the level of the current break filed. 7. Difference between ASK V/S INPUT? ASK : It is requests the user for the value and substitutes the value during compilation. It

is used only in the setup section. INPUT : It requests the user for the value at runtime. (i.e., at execution stage). It can be used anywhere in the programming section. Note: INPUT is mere efficient than ASK. 8. Define an Array? An Array can be defined to store intermediate results or data retrieved from the database. 9. Define Process Scheduler? It is an centralized tool that enables application developers, system administrators and application users to manage People soft batch process. Process Scheduler enables you to schedule running process and create job. 10.Difference between Process and Job? Process: A process is a single task, program or routine (such as SQR reports or Batch Cobol) that runs either on client or server. Job: It is one or more process of the same or different type, which can run either in series or Parallel. (A group of process can be combined and run as process job) 2. Which effective dated rows can be retrieved in update/display mode, update/display all and correction mode? Update/display – can view current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Update/display all – can view history, current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Correction – can view and update history, current and future rows. 3. What types of audits are supported by people soft? In case of record level audit what is the structure of table? We have field level audit and record level audit. The structure of the table in record level audit is: AUDIT_OPRID, AUDIT_STAMP, AUDIT_ACTN, AUDIT_RECNAME and can add fields from record. 4. What are Table Edits? We have prompt table edit, yes/no table edit, translate table edit as the table edits. 5. What is the difference between Key and alternate search Key? KEY-It is the primary key of the record. Can be used as search key or need not be. Alternate search key-it is used for searching purposes. 6. Can you place Sub page into Grid? If yes How? Yes we can insert subpage using insert subpage. After insert subpage into main page, drag the subpage into the grid. When we save the page we are successfully able to save the page showing that we can insert a subpage into a grid. 7. Can you hide a primary page in a component? Reason? No, we can not hide the primary page of a component. If the component had only one page then by making this page also invisible we won’t have any component existing so we are not allowed to hide the primary page. 8. What is an Expert Entry? Expert entry enables a user to change from interactive to deferred mode at runtime for appropriate transactions. 9. What is Auto Update? This record field property is used to update the date field of particular record with the server's current date and time whenever a user creates or updates a row. Even the user enter the data into that field, the data which the user enters will be updated by the system’s current date and time. 11. How can you improve the security and usability of a Prompt table edit.? Prompt table view 12. What are the different ways to setup row level security?

We can setup row-level security using a SQL view that joins the data table with an authorization table. And By having Query search for data using a query security record definition. The query security record definition adds a security check to the search. 13. How does peoplesoft use views? Which are online functions? A) People soft uses views for search records, summary pages, prompt views, reports. Search records and summary pages are online functions. 14. Why do PeopleSoft often use views as search records? A) Search views are used for three main reasons. 1. Adding criteria to the search dialogue page 2. Providing row level security. 3. Implementing search page processing. 15. What is Record Group? Which records can be included into a record group? Record group consists of records with similar functionality. To setup a record in record group we should enter a set control field value in record properties 1) Order and flow of action types 1) Do When 2) Do While 3) Do Select 4) Peoplecode 5) SQL 6) Call Section 7) Message Log 8) XSLT 9) Do until 2) What is Prerequisite for the Temporary record? 1) Should have process Instance as key 2) Name should end with _TAO 3) Different types of Temporary tables - Dedicated - Un Dedicated (Shared) 4) Why Parallel Processing required? Potential performance improvements by splitting the data to be processed into groups and simultaneously running multiple instance of your program to deal with different groups of data. If you have a one program that uses a temporary table and is invoked multiple times, that single

temporary table could be used concurrently in multiple executions of the code. This could create unpredictable results since the different instances of the code would be issuing delete, Inserts and/or updates unsynchronized with each other. You could solve the problem by creating multiple temporary tables as a pool of tables. Each invocation of your program would have to allocate an unused temporary table, mark it as ‘in use’ , use it and release it back to the pool when you through with it (for each Application Engine program you write). 5) How running AE program as Batch differs from running it online? Application Engine programs are designed for two types of execution and each has its own pool of Temporary Tables Online: Invoked by CallAppEngine from People code Run quickly, synchronously, and at random times. Potential for simultaneous executions Uses the online Temporary Table pool. Not restart able. Psae.exe randomly assigns an instance number from the number range on your online temp tables. If the instance number is in use psae.exe puts the program in Queue until the assigned instance becomes free. Unlock on completion, on Crash free from Manage Abends. Batch: Invoked through the Process Scheduler. Run for longer amounts of time, asynchronously, and at scheduled times. Can be designed for parallel execution for performance. Uses the Batch/Dedicated Temporary table. Restart able. It allocates instance number based on the availability on a record by record basis and psae.exe begins with the lowest instance numbers.If the properties are set continue - Base table is used with Process instance as key. If Re-starable – Locked across Restarts until completes successfully. If not Re-startable on Program completion. 6) What are the important steps for implementing the parallel processing? Define you Temporary Tables. Set the Temporary Tables Online pool. Assign Temporary Tables to your Application Engine program in it program. Set Temporary Table Batch Pool – Instance count in the AE. Build / Rebuild your Temporary Table record. Code %Table Meta – SQL as reference to Temporary Tables in your Application Engine program, so that Application Engine can table references to the assigned Temporary Table instance dynamically at runtime. 7) What happens when all the instance of the temporary table are in use? It behavior can control by AE developer. If the runtime options are set to continue “People Tools will insert rows into the base table using the PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key”. If temp table

doesn’t contain PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key field in a Temporary table, you should change the Temp table runtime options to “Abort” in the appropriate Application Engine programs. 8) How can you divide the data to be processed by different instance of the program to perform parallel program? Run control parameters passed to each instance of the AE program enable it to identify which input rows “belong” to it, and each program instance inserts the rows from the source table into its assigned temporary table instance using %Table. 9) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 10) What is the main purpose of the Access property in the Section? Basically they have two option, public and private if section declared as public then it be access from other program.Private we cannot call from other program. 11) Which actions are mutually exclusive and why they are mutually exclusive? Sql and callsection. 12) Error handling or Exception handling in Application Engine ? Step properties:On Error:Abort – Write message to message log and terminate. Ignore - Write message to message log and continue. uppress – No message will be written, but program will continue. People code Action: - On return options can used to handle run time errors. Abort: - Exits immediately – Not recommended. Break:- Exits the current step and section and control returns to the calling step. Skip Step:- The program exits the current step, and continues processing at the next step in the section. If this is the last step in the section, the calling step resumes control of the processing. SQL Action properties:No Rows:- When the Sql doesn’t return any rows, you can tell what application engine program should do. Abort: - Program terminates Section Break: - Application Engine exits the current section immediately, and control returns to the calling step. Continue: - The program continues processing Skip Step: - Application Engine exits the current step immediately and moves on to the next step. When using skip step keep the following in mind: 1) Application Engine ignores the commit for the current step at runtime 2) If the current step contains only one Action, only use skip step at by-pass the commit. 14)What is the maximum limitation on temporary tabel instances in AE. 99 15) what is the difference between the %SELECT and %SELECTINIT meta sql functions. Ans %select : if any values have not selected then previous value will be there %selectinit : if any values have not selected then previous value will reinitilate to null 16) what is the difference between exit(0),exit(1) when we are using this functions in AE Exit (1) causes immediate termination of a PeopleCode program. Use this parameter to rollback database changes. Exit (0) caused immediate termination of a Peoplecode Program but don’t make rollback in the database. Peoplesoft Interview Questions - Component Interface Builder 1) What are the main elements in the component Interface ? Main elements of component Interface · Component interface name

· Keys · Properties and collections · Methods 2) Difference between Get keys, find keys and Create Keys ? Get keys: - These are mapped to the fields marked as scrh in the component’s search record. Automatically “Search key” fields in search record become Get keys. We cannot change it. Find keys: - These are mapped to fields marked as Alt or Srch in the component search record. You may remove Find keys that you do not wish to make available for searching. Create Keys: - It is generated from the key fields for the search record. If Add search record is present then its key fields are taken. We cannot change it. 4) What the steps that you need to do in people code to invoke Component Interface? · Establish a user section · Get the component interface definition · Populate the create keys · Create an instance of the component interface · Populate the required fields · Save the component Interface. &Session = GetSession(); &CI = &Session.GetcompIntfc(CompIntfc.INTERFACE_NAME) &CI.KEY_FILED_NAME = ‘NEW’ If not &CI.Create () Then Else Populate other fields End-if; Populate the other fields If not &CI.Save () Then Else End-if; 5) How do you test Component Interface? · Using the Component Interface tester · Give values in the tester for options · Get Existing, Create new, Find and perform the operation from the CI Tester 7) What is method? What are the different types of method? Methods: - A method is an object that performs a very specific function on a component interface at run-time. Standard methods and user-defined methods. Standard methods: - Automatically generated upon the creation of a new component Interface in Application. Apart from the Standard methods there are Standard methods available for the use with any collection. User-Defined methods: - User-defined methods are those that you can create to meet the requirements of an individual component interface. 8) What are properties? The Fields in the level 0 in the component are the properties of the component. Standard properties User-Defined properties Createkeyinfocollection Developer can further control the exposed Getkeyinfocollection field properties. Findkeyinfocollection Property Info collection GetHistoryItems (Update/Display mode or Correction mode)

EditHistory Items InteractiveMode. 2. What is ordering key? The following way we have to arrange the fields 1. Field with primary key and search box. 2. Field with primary key 3. Field with duplicate order key. 3. Define Scroll? How many types of scrolls are there? A Scroll is used to enter multiple rows and retrieve multiple row data. There are two types of scrolls: 1. Nested scrolls – For each repeating data and for each entry with other set of repeating set of data is called a nested scroll. Maximum 3 nested levels are allowed. The nested scrolls share same high-level keys. 2. Independent scrolls – At each scroll level a maximum of 15 screen be included. 4. Define Occurs Level? Occurs level specifies the level of a scroll bar relative to any other scroll bars on a panel. The following are the occurs level at each nested scroll bar. The primary scroll bar in a set of nested scroll bars has an occur level 1 A Secondary scroll bar has an occurs level of 2, which means it is subordinate to scroll bar 1.The third scroll bar has an occurs level of 3, which means it is subordinate to scroll bar 2. 6.Define Sub-panel and Secondary panel? Sub-panel : It is a predefined, preside group control, which will appear in more than one panel. (Utility: if you have group of controls, such as address coasts, which you use on multiple panel definition, you can save those panel control groups on sub- panel) Secondary Panel: An invisible control that associates a secondary panel with a primary panel. (Utility: Secondary panels are used to gather or display supplemental information related to the object that appears in a primary panel) 7. Explain about display control field and related display control field? Display control field: It is controlling the field in some other record. Related control field: display control field controls it. 8. What is panel group? Explain in brief about panel group? Panel group is the bridge between panel and menu. A panel group is a set of panels That should be processed as if it is one panel. The panel group represents a complete business transaction because all the Information goes together. The group must be stored in the database as a single Unit of work. At runtime, we are opening and saving panel group not individual Panels. 9.Define a Menu? How many types of Menus exist? Menus are used to navigate the application (Menu is a window to the application) There are two types of menus: 1. Standard menu: It appears in the menu bar of a Peoplesoft application. 2. Popup menu: Allows the user to navigate related information in other areas of application by right clicking on a panel or panel control. 39. How many types of securities are available in People soft? There are 6 types of securities: 1. RDBMS Security 2. Network security 3.Operator security 4. Object security 5.Tree level security 6. Query security (row level security) 2. What is MDI? Multiple Document Interface – having an option to open multiple windows at the same time. But only one window can be activated at a time.

3. What is Morphing? The Application designer uses an approach of morphing, or dynamically transforming the menus and toolbars to edit the definition in the active window. 4. How is data stored, retrieved, manipulated and processed in People soft applications? People soft is a table-based system. A database for a people tools application contains three major sets of tables… 1. System catalog tables; it stores physical attributes of tables and views. (e.g. Sys, Columns, Sys tables) 2. People Tools tables; it contains information that you define using People Tools (e.g. PSRECDEFN, PSPNLDEFN, PSMENUDEFN) 3. Application Data Tables; Store the actual data users enter and access through People Soft application windows and panels. (E.g. PS_ <>) 5. What is SQL Talk? SQL Talk is an interface to Peoplesoft database. 6. How many types of RDBMS support Peoplesoft? The following are the list of RDBMS supporting Peoplesoft application.. 1. DB2 2. DB2/AS400 3. DB2/MVS 4. SQL Base 5.Oracle 6. MSSQI.Server 7. Informix 7. Define a Field? Fields are basic building blocks in People soft and can be used in application when they are added to atleast one record. Fields are globally defined. 8. What are the various Field attributes? The commons filed attributes are: 1. Data type 2. Field name 3. Long name 4. Short name 5. Formatting 6. Help context number 7. Translate values – stored in separate table (XLATTABLE). 9. Define Field properties? Fields are 1.Globally defined 2.Reusable components and can be shared across multiple record definitions 3.A change to the Field properties affects all the records that include the field. 1) There are different types of variables in the Application Engine people code? Local variable – these are available for the duration of the program in which they are declared. Global / Component – These variables are available while the Application Engine program is running. They are saved at commits and checkpoints, So they can be used for restarts. Component variables are same as Global incase of the AE. 2) What are the Different ways pass data between the steps? 1) State records – One row can be passed and can have many state records. 2) Component/Global People code variables 3) Temporary records – Multiple rows of data can be passed. 3) What is Prerequisite for the State record? 1) Should be either Derived work record Or SQL Table. 2) Name of the record must end in AET; this is how the system identifies the record as a state record. 3) PROCESS_INSTANCE must be a key.

4) Any data types except character or numeric must not be required fields. Note: - No People code fires on an Application Engine state record. No Validation of translate values or Prompt tables are done.

6) What is the syntax for CallAppEngine? CallAppEngine (applid [, state record]); 9) What is the difference between a Trace value and Trace parameters? A Trace parameter determines which type of trace is turned on. A Trace parameter determines what type of data is recorded in your trace files (s). 10) What are the 3 common ways to pass a trace parameter and value to your program psae.exe? Configuration manager, Process Definition, Command prompt. 11) What are the Different types of Application Engine? Standard: Standard entry-point program. Upgrade Only: Used by PeopleSoft Upgrade utilities only. Import Only: Used by PeopleSoft Import utilities only Daemon Only: Use for daemon type programs. Transform Only: Support for XSLT Transform programs. 13) What is Set Processing? Set Processing uses SQL to process groups, or sets, of rows at one time rather than processing each row individually. With row by row processing you following a repetitive loop that selects a row, determines if it meets a given criteria, if so, apply rule x to row Update row, commit. With set processing, you only select those rows that meet the filtering criteria and then run the rule once again all the affected rows. 14) Advantages of Set Processing? Improved Performance: - Our internal testing has revealed that, in an overwhelming majority of cases, set processing performs significantly better than it is -by-row counterpart for “reasonable” batch processing volumes. Minimized SQL Overhead: - It tends to use fewer Application Engine SQL statements that each processed more data than the statements executed in row-by-row processing. Easy Maintenance : - if need to make a fix or add an enhancement to SQL, it’s just a matter of modifying the SQL or inserting the new “Chunk”. Leveraging the RDBMS: - With Set – based processing, you take advantage of the SQL processing engine on the database rather than placing the processing burden and overhead on the application executable. 16) Order and flow of action types 1) Do When 2) Do While 3) Do Select 4) Peoplecode 5) SQL 6) Call Section 7) Message Log

8) XSLT 9) Do until 17) What is Prerequisite for the Temporary record? 1) Should have process Instance as key 2) Name should end with _TAO 19) Why Parallel Processing required? Potential performance improvements by splitting the data to be processed into groups and simultaneously running multiple instance of your program to deal with different groups of data. If you have a one program that uses a temporary table and is invoked multiple times, that single temporary table could be used concurrently in multiple executions of the code. This could create unpredictable results since the different instances of the code would be issuing delete, Inserts and/or updates unsynchronized with each other. You could solve the problem by creating multiple temporary tables as a pool of tables. Each invocation of your program would have to allocate an unused temporary table, mark it as ‘in use’ , use it and release it back to the pool when you through with it (for each Application Engine program you write). 22) What happens when all the instance of the temporary table are in use? It behavior can control by AE developer. If the runtime options are set to continue “People Tools will insert rows into the base table using the PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key”. If temp table doesn’t contain PROCESS_INSTANCE as a key field in a Temporary table, you should change the Temp table runtime options to “Abort” in the appropriate Application Engine programs. 23) How can you divide the data to be processed by different instance of the program to perform parallel program? Run control parameters passed to each instance of the AE program enable it to identify which input rows “belong” to it, and each program instance inserts the rows from the source table into its assigned temporary table instance using %Table. 25) What is the main purpose of the Access property in the Section? Basically they have two option, public and private if section declared as public then it be access from other program.Private we cannot call from other program. 26) Which actions are mutually exclusive and why they are mutually exclusive? Sql and callsection. 1) Application Engine ignores the commit for the current step at runtime 2) If the current step contains only one Action, only use skip step at by-pass the commit. 29)What is the maximum limitation on temporary tabel instances in AE.

99 30) what is the difference between the %SELECT and %SELECTINIT meta sql functions. Ans %select : if any values have not selected then previous value will be there %selectinit : if any values have not selected then previous value will reinitilate to null 31) what is the difference between exit(0),exit(1) when we are using this functions in AE Exit (1) causes immediate termination of a PeopleCode program. Use this parameter to rollback database changes. Exit (0) caused immediate termination of a Peoplecode Program but don’t make rollback in the database. 3. How to define parent-child relations in people soft? Some times while creating records, you'll have a field within a table for which you want to allow multiple occurrences, in which case you create a subordinate or child table. For ex. For employee reviews, an employee can be reviewed for performance in multiple categories organization skills, interpersonal skills etc.,. These categories and ratings are stored in a separate child table, EE_REVIEW_RT, which is related to REVIEW_DT, the parent table which stores data about employee reviews. The keys you set on parent record will determine which keys are required on any child records. The child must have the same keys as the parent, plus one or more keys that uniquely identify each row. 4.Can we assign default value for a field in Data Designer? Yes, we can assign a default value to a field. Record field properties - Use - Default value 5.How do we create custom field format? Custom field format allows you to create your own format definitions using format notation, and apply them to fields. These formats are organized into Format Families, which can include one or more unique formats. 6.What are the keys available in People soft? Key - Search Key - Duplicate Order Key - Alternate Search Key - Descending Key 7.What is significance of 'Rs Dt' in Data Designer? Reasonable date specifies whether a reasonable date test will be performed on a date field. The reasonable date test warns if the date is outside a 30-day range before and after the current date. 8.What is a prompt table? If you want to provide prompt support for a field based on the data stored in a separate table, enter the name of the table you want to use as the Prompt Table at: Record field properties - Edits - Prompt table. This will enable users to position their cursor on the field and press F4 to prompt for a list of values stored on the table. For example, let's say that we want users to enter Employees IDs in the EMPLID field, which is stored in PERSONAL_DATA. By entering PERSONAL_DATA as the Prompt Table, users simply press F4 on EMPLID to select from a list of Employee ID values for this field. 9.What is Translate/xlatt field?

The translate table is a table that stores values for fields that need to be validated but don't need individual tables of their own. 10.What is the maximum field length for an xlatt field and what data types does it support? Max field length – 4, ‘CHAR’ Datatype. 11.What is the significance of 'No Edit ' in edits section in Data Designer? If you don't want to establish any special edits for a record field click 'No Edit' option button in Record field properties - Edits 12.What is Set control field, where can it be utilized? When you enter a name in Prompt Table (Record field properties - edits) and tab off the field, Set Control Field is activated. This enables you to select a Set Control Field that overrides the Set Control Field of the record definition specified in Prompt table. If you don't specify a name in this field, it defaults to the Set Control Field of the table specified in prompt table. 13. What is Cache how does it useful for clients? The Cache or Cache record is a PS record, keyed by process instance that must be created and maintained by the Application Engine Developer. This record defines the fields that an application uses to pass values from one SQL statement to another. When an application is started, a row in the cache record is created for the assigned process instance. It is then updated by application engine whenever a COMMIT is performed. The cache row is deleted upon successful completion of the application. 14. What is Query Security Record? Query Security Record is to secure access to a particular record using a security view. 15. What is a Dynamic view record? Record def that can be used like a view in panels and People code, but is actually not stored as a SQL View in the database. Instead, Application Processor uses the text as a base for the SQL SELECT that is executed at runtime. Dynamic views some times provide superior performance such as search records. 16.What is the use of Derived/work record? A temporary work space to be used during online panel processing. A derived or work record is not stored on the database, so you don't build it. 17.What is Query view, how to define it? A view constructed using People soft Query tool. 18. What is the use of Search key and list box item? When you turn on Search Key, the system will include this field in the search dialog for a panel. And it automatically turns on the List Box item. Turn on the List Box Item if you want the field to appear in F4 prompt lists and in the list box preceding a panel. 19.Can we rename a field/record, How does it effect front-end and database? When you rename a record definition, the system automatically renames all references to it in Peoplecode except in the text portion of the SQL Functions, such as SQLExec and Scroll Select. If you have already SQL Created the underlying tables for the record definition you renamed, you'll need to recreate the table. If you have data in this table you want to preserve, you should use the SQL Alter function to rename the data base tables. When you rename a field, the system automatically renames all references to it in Peoplecode, except

in the text portion of the SQL functions such as SQLExec and Scroll Select. 20.Can we delete a field in the record structure? You cannot delete a field if it is currently used on any records. Before you delete a field, you must first remove it from any records where it resides. 21.How exactly index are built in application designer? Using Application Designer, you create several kinds of object definitions that represent database components. Record definitions represent tables, indexes and views. The Build process is the centerpiece of Application Designer, which uses DDL to construct a database component (index is one such component) based on the associated records and fields. Some indexes are defined automatically, based on the search key, list box items and alternate search keys you set in your records. However it is sometimes necessary to define additional indexes to improve the performance. 22.What are system tables, application tools table, User tables in peoplesoft? System Catalog Tables Ptools Tables Application Tables Sysobjects PSRECDEFN JOB_DATA Syscolumns PSPNLDEFN PERSONAL_DATA 23.What is audit? How many types of audits available in peoplesoft? For some field values, you may want to keep a history of who adds, changes, or deletes data. When you set the options for tracking that info it is called auditing. When you turn on the Audit field options (Record field properties - Use) Psoft track the info into PSAUDIT table. Three types of audits are available in peoplesoft? Field Add: Audits the field whenever a new row of data is added.

Field Change: Audits the field whenever the contents are changed. Field Delete: Audits the field whenever a row of data is deleted. 24.What is the System Maintain field in Record field properties - Use? The System maintained option is for system documentation purposes only and doesn't affect processing. Check this if you want to document that the field value is system-generated. 25.What is a Subrecord? A SubRecord by definition allows you to add a group of fields that are commonly used in multiple record definitions. A SubRecord must be defined before it can be entered into a record definition. Insert - SubRecord 26.What are Sub panels? If you have groups of controls, such as address controls, that you use on multiple panel definitions, you can save it as a subpanel. And insert this sub panel wherever you want. 27.What are Secondary panels? Secondary panels are used to gather or display information related to the objects that appear in a primary panel. A secondary panel can be called from the primary panel and used to enter or display additional data without cluttering your primary panel.

29. What is a Related Display field and Display Control field? A related display field is for display purposes only - it always references a row that's not being updated from the current panel. The display control when you select Related Display field, you need to relate it to the appropriate control. A list of all the controls on the panel marked as display control fields in the Related control field box. Select the control field to which this particular related display is related. 30.How many scroll levels are available in peoplesoft? –3. 31.Can we define Child table fields in '0' level? No, Parent tables only can be associated at '0' level. 32.What is a Command Push button? Command Push buttons are associated with a record.field, so when the user presses the push buttons, the Application Processor executes any field change Peoplecode associated with that panel control. 33.What is a menu item and bar name? There are four types of menu items:Panel group: defined only in standard menus Transfer menu items: defined only in pop-up menus. Peoplecode and Separator menu items: Available for both pop-up and standard menus. 34.What is a panel group? A panel group represents a complete business transaction. It can be composed of either a single panel or a set of panels that should be processed as if it were one panel. Think of it as paging through several pages of a single display. Panel group control : The grouping of panels and their associated labels on a cascading menu - The search record used to retrieve data into the panel - Associated user actions. 35.What is standard / panel group search record ? The panel group search record is the record used to populate the panel group's level-zero search key fields; this enables the system to identify a unique row of data for the level-zero primary records in the panel group's panels, build a panel buffer for the panel group, and display the panel. 36.What is add mode search record? When a different search record (other than standard search record) is specified for Add actions to create special security views that limit the rows operators can add based on specific search criteria or to specify a different search record for add actions. 37.What are the allowed actions in menu? Add, Update/Display, Update / Display All, Data Entry and Correction. 38.What is the main difference between 'update/display' and 'update/display all'? Update / Display - Used to update existing rows only. Update / Display All - Used to update current and future rows in an effective dated record. Only used with effective dated records. 39.How exactly allowed actions work with 'Effdt' panels? Action Type View Change Insert New Rows Update / display Current , Future Future only Eff dt > the current row Update / Display all History, Current Future only , , Future Correction History , Current All existing rows Add new rows with no Future Eff dt restrictions 40.What is a menu group?

Menu groups are groups of standard menus that can be accessed from the PeopleSoft Go menu bar. If the menu group contains two or more standard menus, the standard menu labels appear in a cascade menu to the right of the menu group on the Go menu bar.

41.What is an operator and operator class? Operator definitions - commonly referred to as operator Ids, or just operators - have associated pass words. Operator definitions are for each user in your system. An operator can be defined with its own set of system permissions and restrictions, or it can inherit this info from one or more class definitions to which it is linked. Class def have no user passwords associated with them; you can't use a class def to sign on to the system. Instead, u use classes to organize your users into groups with common access rights. Instead of setting up access rights for every operator, you can define just a few classes and link your users to them. 42.What is the purpose of access_id? When you create an operator ID you must assign it an access profile, which specifies an access ID and password. Access ID connects Peoplesoft application(s) with RDBMS, once their password is validated. 43.What is Operator security and Object security? Object Security is to control access and update to the people tools objects - record def, menu def, proj def, panel and panel group def, tree structures, trees, import def, translate tables and queries. Operator Security is to control when each Peoplesoft user can sign on, which People Tools and application menu items they can access, what processes they can run and more. 44.What is SetID? SetIDs are simply the lables used to identify a TableSet. SetId is an additional primary key in control tables, that enables sharing of control table information across business units. All rows of data in your control tables keyed by the same SetID make up a TableSet. 45.What are the tablesets? A TableSet is a group of rows across your control tables identified by the same SetID. In other words, all rows of data in your control tables keyed by the same SetID make up a TableSet. Tablesets or group of tables enables sharing of control table information and processing options among business units. For ex., using Tablesets you can define a group of Job Codes that can be shared by different business units. 46.What is Application processor? The Application Processor does all the behind scenes (panels) work. Application Processsor the People Tools online processor, manages the flow of data processing as users enter informatiion on panels - builds SQL statements based on the actions performed on panels issues INSERT, DELETE and UPDATE statements to maintain data on the database and SELECT statements to retrieve data. 47.What is the significance of PER099.SQR program? Refresh Employee Data - When you run this report, the system will update the table with data valid before or on the 'As of Date' you specify. 48.What are the paragraphs available in SQR? - SELECT - SQL - DOCUMENT

49.How many kinds of trees are available in tree manager? Many kinds of trees for a variety of purposes can be created, but all trees fall into these major types:  Detail trees - in which database field values appear as detail values.  Summary trees - provides an alternative way to group nodes from an existing detail tree, without duplicating the entire tree structure.  Node - oriented trees - in which database field values appear as tree nodes.  Query access trees - to organize record definitions for PeopleSoft Query security. 50.What are the tree structures, and how to define a new structure in tree manager? Two kinds of tree structures : Detail tree structures and Summary tree structures. You use detail tree structures for all trees except summary trees, including node-oriented trees.  Creating a detail tree structure:  Select Structure, New, Detail  Enter a Structure ID and description for the tree structure  Enter the panel and record definition to use for entering and storing info about levels.  Enter the panel, record def and field to use for entering and storing info about tree nodes.  Enter the info the tree manager needs for capturing and storing detail values.  Click the Save button to close the dialog box and create the tree structure. Creating a summary tree structure: Select Structure, New, Summary. Enter a Structure ID and description for the tree structure. Enter the panel and record definition to use for entering and storing info about levels. Enter the panel and record definition to use for entering and storing info about tree nodes. Enter the name of the view that joins the summary tree to a detail tree. Identify the detail tree whose detail values the summary trees summarizes, and the level from which to start. Click the save button to close and create the tree structure.

      

51.What is query tree? PeopleSoft query uses a special type of tree, query tree, that organizes record definitions into access groups. In the Query Security panel group, you specify which access groups an operator or operator class has access rights to. Users can only create or run queries on record definitions from access groups they have rights to. 53.What function is used for invoking a secondary panel? – DoModal. 54.What is a message agent? The Message Agent is an automated user workstation. Rather then taking input from the keyboard, it receives messages from third-party applications. The messages tell the Message Agent to do some of the same things a user would: navigate a panel group, enter data into the panel fields and save panel. For ex. It could accept a form from an electronic forms package, read its contents and transfer the data to a panel. It acts as an electronic clerk to process requests according to rules defined in workflow. Using the Message Agent API, you can write programs that add data to the PeopleSoft database. 55.What is a role and how to define a role? Roles describes how people fit into the workflow. A role is a class of users who perform the same type of work, such as clerks or managers. Business rules specify what user role needs to do an activity. For ex., department managers ( a role) must approve external course requests. 62.What is Tuxedo? The application server, the centerpiece of PeopleSoft's three-tier architecture, utilizes Tuxedo, BEASystems' transaction monitor, to manage and monitor client transactions. When a client work station requests sends requests to the application server where Tuxedo then schedules a PeopleSoft service, such as Panel Group Build or Save. BEA tuxedo software for thewindows and web client comes bundled with Peopletools - embedded in PeopleSoft's binary directory. 65. Which PeopleTool is used to input peoplecode? - Application Designer. 67. When is PeopleCode case sensitive? PeopleCode is only case sensitive within a quoted literal. 68. What are the most commonly used PeopleCode events? FieldChange, RowInit, SaveEdit, FieldEdit, FieldDefault, and SavePreChange in that order. 69. In which PeopleCode would you code errors and warnings? SearchSave, FieldEdit, SaveEdit and RowDelete primarily. You may also code errors and warnings in RowSelect. 70. What is the biggest draw back to Fieldformula? Since FieldFormula is performed every time the panel is displayed on every row of data, its biggest drawback is the performance overhead it adds. 71. What other PeopleCode event might you expect to find with RowInit? FieldChange. Since RowInit initializes the data before it is displayed, usually it is used along with FieldChange to accommodate any of the changes that are performed by the operator once the panel is displayed.

72. How do FieldEdit and FieldChange differ? The main difference between FieldEdit and FieldChange is how Error and Warning statements are handled. In FieldEdit, Error and Warning statements will cause the panel to be displayed with a message informing the operator of a possible problem. In FieldChange, Error and Warnings statements cancel the panel group. 73. How does SaveEdit differ from FieldEdit? SaveEdit and FieldEdit are both used for validation, but each one is performed at a different time. SaveEdit performed when the operator saves, FieldEdit is performed when the operator changes a field. SaveEdit is also performed on every row of data; FieldEdit is only performed on one row of data. When an error is received in FieldEdit, the field turns red; in SaveEdit field do not turn red. 74. How does SavePostChg differ from all other Peoplecode events? SavePostChg is different from all other Peoplecode events since it is performed after the updates are made on the database. 75.What built-in function will you probably see in SavePostChg programs? Since SavePostChg usually updates tables that are not contained in the buffers, the built-in function SQLExec is often used to perform these updates on the database. 76. Can calculated fields be stored on SQLTables ? Should they? Calculated fields usually are not stored on SQLtables. However, they might be if the calculated field is being passed to an interface that does not have access to the fields needed to calculate the field again. 77. Why would a derived/work field be used? A derived / work field may be used to store and display a calculated value on a panel or to pass a value from one PeopleCode program to another. 78. How is a record definition indicated as a derived / work record? A record definition is indicated as a derived / work record by selecting the "Derived/Work" radio button under the Type tab in the record properties. 79. What major difference is there between derived/work fields and other fields on panel definitions? Derived / Work fields can be on any occurs level and do not need to come from the primary record definition for the level. 80. What types of variables can you define in PeopleCode? Local an Global variables. 81. What happens if you don't declare a variable? If a variable is not declared PeopleCode will assume it is a local variable. 82. How long do local variables last? Local variables are retained in memory only until the PeopleCode program ends. 83. Why are application specific people-code functions used?

PeopleCode functions are used to perform the same logic in multiple programs while only having to maintain it in one place. 84. How is an external PeopleCode function declared? An external PeopleCode function is declared at the top of the program where the function will be used with a Declare function statement. The only PeopleCode that can be above a Declare Function statement is Comments. 85. How is a PeopleCode function called? A PeopleCode function is called by referencing the function name and then passing the function the appropriate number of parameters in parentheses. 86. How must a PeopleCode function be defined so that it can be used as a variable in the calling program? In order for a PeopleCode function to be used as a variable, it must be defined using a "Returns" in the Function statement. Also, at least one "Return" statement must be used in the function code. 87.Why is the Message Catalog used? The Message Catalog is used to store the text of error and warning messages that will be used in PeopleSoft applications. This allows the same message to be used in more than one PeopleCode program while only maintaining it in one place. It also prevents the text of messages from being hard-coded into Peoplecode programs. 88.How is a message added to the Message Catalog? To add a new message to the Message Catalog, the correct message set should first be retrieved. A new message can be added to the set by performing a row insert (F7). The new message number will automatically be assigned. 89. Which message sets does PeopleSoft reserve as its own? Message sets 1 through 19,999 are reserved for use by PeopleSoft applications. Message sets 20,000 through 29,000 can be used by PS users. 90. How is a message retrieved from the Message Catalog in PeopleCode? To retrieve a message from the Message catalog in PeopleCode, the MsgGet built in function is used. The required parameters of the function are message set, number and a default message. 91. When should WinMessage be used? The WinMessage built-in function is used to display an information message to the operator without performing normal error and warning processing. It also can be very helpful when used for debugging. 92. What is the purpose of Gray, UnGray, Hide, and UnHide? These built-in functions change the display characteristics of fields on a panel. The Gray built-in function will make the field display-only. The Hide will make the field invisible. This is helpful when enforcing field level security. 93.What does SetDefault do? The SetDefault built -in function will clear out the contents of the field. The record default or FieldDefault PeopleCode can than be applied if appropriate.

94. Why are All and None used? The All and None built-in functions check for the presence or absence of a value that the operator has entered. This can be helpful since a different value may be stored on the database if a value is not entered into a field based on its type. 95. When would FieldChanged, RecordChanged, RecordDeleted, RecordNew, and PanelGroupChanged be used? These built-in functions can be used in SaveEdit, SavePreChg, or SavePostChg programs to filter down the processing to occur only when necessary. 96. Why is PriorValue used? The PriorValue built-in function is used to determine the value of a field before it was changed. 97.What is the CurrentRowNumber? It is the number of the row of data the application processor is performing PeopleCode on in the buffers on the client workstation. 98.How does AddToDate work? This function is passed a date field and then the number of years, months and days to add. Leap years are automatically taken into consideration, and negative numbers may be passed as parameters to subtract from the date. 99. Which two cross reference reports are best for PeopleCode? How do they present their data? XRFFLPC reports for one field all of the PeopleCode programs where it is referenced. XRFPCFL does the opposite. It reports for one PeopleCode program all of the fields it uses. 100. What does Find in PeopleCode do? The Find in PeopleCode utility will scan through all of the PeopleCode on a database looking for a specific character - string. 101.When is it useful to select the Export to File option in Find in PeopleCode? An Export report produces an unformatted copy of all of the source code where the character string was found. This can be very helpful in an upgrade. 102. How can you use WinMessage as part of the debugging process? A WinMessage can be used to set break points and display the current value of fields and variables in the PeopleCode debugging process. 104. What is the name of the file created by the trace? DBGI.TMP which is stored in TEMP directory. 105. How do you turn off the PeopleCode trace? The PeopleCode trace can be stopped by turning off all of the check boxes on the PeopleCode trace control panel and selecting the set push button. It can also be turned off within PeopleCode by passing the parameter zero to the SetTracePC built-in function. Once the PeopleSoft session is closed, the PeopleCode trace will also automatically be turned off.

106. How many rows of data can there be at occurs level 0? There can only be one row of data for each record definition at occurs level 0. Scroll bars are not allowed at this level. 107. How many rows of data can be there at occurs level 1? There can be multiple rows of data for each record definition at occurs level 1 since a scroll bar can be used to navigate between them. 108. What must exist at occurs levels 1,2,and 3 but not occurs level 0? - A scroll bar. 109. How does the application processor allocate buffers to hold data? The application processor starts allocating buffers at occurs level 0 and then works its way down. It uses the panel and record definitions to determine the data it needs. From a panel definition, fields are allocated in TAB order. Generally, if there is one field from record definition on the panel, the entire row will be brought into the buffers. The exceptions are fields that are in the search dialog box, derived work fields and related display fields. 110. What record definitions will perform PeopleCode in a panel group? Any record definition that is not used as a related display record will perform PeopleCode in a panel group. 111. In what order will PeopleCode be performed on the buffers in a panel group? PeopleCode starts at the top of the buffers in a panel group and works its way down to the bottom. The PeopleCode programs on a given row will be performed in the same order as the fields on the record definition. 112. What do ActiveRowCount and FetchValue do? Why are they generally used together? The ActiveRowCount function returns the number of rows at a specific occurs level. The FetchValue built-in function is used to retrieve the value of a field when using a looping statement. The two are usually found together in most For Looping statements. 113. When is UpdateValue necessary? The UpdateValue built - in function must be used when updating the value of a field within a PeopleCode looping statement. 114. How will the syntax of built - in functions change if they are used in a multiple occurs level applications? When built- in functions are used in multiple occurs level applications, the record name and row number of the parent always must be specified. 115. Why are command push buttons used ? What are the advantages? Command push buttons can be used to trigger PeopleCode programs. The advantage of using one is that the operator determines when the program should be performed. 116. What PeopleCode events will a command push button perform? Any FieldEdit and Fieldchange PeopleCode programs on the field where the push button is attached. 117. What are the two different ways to retrieve a bitmap to display on the command push button? Bitmaps can be retrieved from a file using the Browse push button or from the clipboard

using the Paste push button. 118. How do you attach a field to a command push button? A field is attached to a command push button in the panel definition. Select Edit, panel Field properties and modify the field entries under the Record tab. 119.Why should the SortScroll function be used? The SortScroll built-in function can be used to dynamically sort the rows of data within a scroll bar. 120.What are the parameters of the SortScroll function? The occurs level and primary record definition to be sorted, followed by the field to use for the sort with "A" for ascending or "D" for descending. Multiple sort fields can be referenced. 121. Why is the ScrollSelect function used? To control the process of allocating buffers in a panel group using peoplecode, instead of the application processor. 122. What are the parameters of a ScrollSelect function? First the occurs level number and primary record definition of the scroll bar the data will be selected into. These are followed by the select record, and the When Clause within quotes. Bind variables are then passed if necessary. 123. When is the ScrollFlush function used? Is used to remove the rows of data from within a scroll bar without deleting them from the database. 124.What are the parameters of a ScrollFlush function? Name of the primary record definition for the scroll bar where the rows of data will be removed. 125.How and where can a user invoke a popup menu? User can invoke a standard popup menu by right-clicking in an edit box or long edit box. If a developer-defined popup menu is attached to a panel field or to the panel back ground in the panel definition, it can be accessed when the user right - click on the panel field or on the back ground, respectively. 126.What type of actions can a popup menu item perform? A menu item in a developer-defined pop up menu can perform a Transfer, which invokes the panel specified in similar way to if the user selected the panel via menus. It can also run a PeopleCode program attached to the ItemSelected event. 127. How do u associate a popup menu with a panel field? With the panel background? To associate a popup menu with a panel field, select the panel field in the panel definition and access the Panel Field properties. Click the use tab and specify a popup menu. To associate a popup menu with the panel back ground, access the Panel Properties using File, object Properties (or the Properties icon). Click the use tab and specify a popup menu. 128.What PeopleCode event is fired before a popup menu is displayed? PrePopup. It allows you to alter the appearance of the popup menu.

129.What functions may be used to alter the appearance of a menu item? DisableMenuItem, EnableMenuItem, HideMenuItem, CheckMenuItem and UnCheckMenuItem. 130. What PeopleCode event is fired when the user selects a menu item? ItemSelected. Remember, this is associated with menu PeopleCode rather than record PeopleCode. 131. What are the major uses for SQLExec? The SQLExec built-in function is mainly used to perform SQL Select, Insert, Update and delete statements from within PeopleCode. 132.How can SQLExec aid performance? It can aid performance by only retrieving from the database the data required, instead of an entire row. 133. What PeopleCode event should be used to update other tables with SQLExec? In order to update other tables that are not contained in the buffers on the client workstation with a SQLExec, SavePostChg PeopleCode should be used. This is because SavePostChg is the only PeopleCode event that is performed after the updates have been made to the database. 134. What parameters are passed to the built-in function SQLExec? The SQLExec built-in function is passed the SQL statement to perform within quotes, followed by any bind variables or output variables if necessary. 135. What are Inline variables? How are they used? Inline variables are used to reference the value of fields stored in the buffers in SQL statements. An inline variable consists of a colon followed by the appropriate record and field name to be referenced. 136. How are dates converted within SQLExec statements? Dates are converted within SQLExec built-in function by using the system variables %DateIn and %DateOut. 137. What are the drawbacks of using a SQLExec built in function? Since the SQL statement is contained within quotes, it is a black box to PeopleSoft. Means the programmer is responsible for the syntax, efficiency and maintenance of the SQL. Also, if a SQL Select is being performed within the function, only one row of data can be returned. 138. When should the SQLExec function be used instead of the scroll buffer functions? Dates are converted within SQLExec built-in function by using the system variables %DateIn and %DateOut. 139. Describe the 'modal' aspect of a modal panel group? You may only interact with the objects in the modal panel group dialog box. You cannot interact with the originating panel group nor the menus on the originating window. 141. Compare secondary panels and modal panel groups. Secondary Panels Modal Panel Groups Modal Single panel group Usually only accessed from originating panel Via standard menu Buffer is relating to originating panel Independent

buffers Keys must be related to originating panel Keys may optionally relate Can read fields on originating panel Reads only shared fields from o.p. Cannot modify fields on originating panel Can modify shared fields on originating panel Secondary panel push button or Do Modal () Do Modal Panel Group () 142. How is data synchronized between the originating and modal panel groups? You must add fields from a derived / work record that are shared between the two. You must also add PeopleCode to pass and return values in the derived fields. 143.What are the differences among the OK, Cancel and Apply buttons in a modal panel group? OK and Apply both save the data within the modal panel group. OK also dismisses the dialog box, Apply doesn't. Cancel dismisses the dialog box without saving any changes to the modal panel group. 144. What questions should you ask yourself before starting to implement a modal panel group? Should the originating panel group provide search key values for the modal panel group? If so, what are the search keys? 1.Can we insert sub record into another subrecord? Ans:Yes,we can insert a Sub-record into another Sub-record. When a Sub-record definition is opened goto Insert and Sub-record. 2.Difference between Save Prechange & Save Post change? Ans: In Save Prechange we can get the data from Component Buffer for that particular Component where as in Save Post change Component Buffer is cleared we have to get data from Database and this is used to update values outside the database. 3.What is naming convention of SQR program? Ans:The program must End with ‘.SQR’ extension and the length of name must be <=8 characters. 4.Can we run SQR program through a push button from a page? Ans: Yes we can run using properties of Push Button. That are Specifying Destination = Process Process Type = SQR Report and Name = SQR report name. 5.Order of Execution of Deferred processing? Ans: This is similar to Interactive Processing where as in this Field Change, Field Edit Peoplecode events & System edits will be differed until we press the Save Button. 6.What are Data Buffer Classes in Peoplesoft? Ans: There are totally 4 Data Buffer Classes in Peoplesoft. They are 1.Row Class 3.Field Class 2.Rowset Class 4.Record Class. 7.Define Signon Process? 8.What are Different Functions in PeopleCode? Ans: There Are Totally 4 types of Functions in Peoplecode. They are 1.Builtin Functions 2.Internal Peoplecode Functions 3.External Peoplecode Functions & 4.External Non-Peoplecode functions 9.Does Save Edit & Save Prechange Are in Component Level or Component Record Level? Ans: These are available in Component Level. 10.What are Heading And Footing SQC’s?

Ans: These SQC’s are useful for Heading & Footing Sections of an Report. One of the important Footing SQC is ‘RESET.SQC’ . Some of Heading SQC’s are some “PATxxHDG.SQC’. 11.What is Application Messaging? Ans: This is mainly used to publish or subscribe Messages to other Systems . This is kind of communication as per my knowledge. 12.Where and when do we use SQR? Ans: 1.Where the Programming logic is more. 2. If We need to generate different kinds of reports. 3. Background SQL processing. 4. File Interfacing. Etc… 13. People Code Event sequence Execution Ans: 1.Search Init 2. Search Save 3. Row Select 4. Prebuild 5. Field Default 6. Field Formula 7. Row Init 8. Postbuild 9. Activate 10. Field Edit 11. Field Change 12. Row Insert 13. Row Delete 14. Save Edit 15. SavePrechange 16. Work Flow 17. SavePostchange 14.Steps for Running SQR in PeopleSoft Environment? Ans: There are mainly 3 steps for running SQR in PeopleSoft Environment. 1. Making our SQR program API aware. 2. Creating Run Control Table and Run Control Page (Using PRCSRUNCNTL_SBP sub page). 3. Scheduling our program in Process Scheduler. (PATH: People tools -> Process Scheduler -> Processes). 15. How to change the prompt table Dynamically? Ans: Using People Code function “%Edit Table”. 16. How do you perform People Code Debugging? Ans: 1.First we have to set the Debugger mode by selecting “Enter Debugger Mode” in “Debug” menu in the Application Designer. 2. Next we have find which variables we need to Debug, this we can do by selecting local, component or Global variables from the “Debug” menu. 3.Next we have to set the Breakpoints using “Toggle Break at Cursor” or “Break Point at Start” from the menu items of the “Debug” menu 17.How do you connect to Client Database? Ans: Using VPN (Virtual Protocol Network) Protocol. In our company we use ‘Cytrix’ or ‘Terminal Software’ Software’s. 18. What is PS Enterprise Portal? 19. What is Effective Date? Ans: This is an important Concept for an ERP using this we can enter more than one values to row for the same key fields depending on date. Here we can maintain History, Current & future rows. We can also maintain more number of rows for same effective date using

Effective Sequence. This concept is mainly used in most of the Control Tables. 20.What is SETID & BUSINESSUNIT? Ans: These are two high level key fields for Control tables & Transaction Tables respectively. These fields play a vital role in People soft. 21.How to build customer indexes? Ans; By using Key fields & Alternate search key we can create system indexes. Where as we can create User defined indexes using App. Designer. Path is: In menus Tools -> Data Administration -> create indexes. 22.What are types of instances in which you are working? Ans: In our company we have Development & Testing Instances of databases. I worked on Development Instance. 23.How do you interact with client and how do you deliver output to client? 24.Current Version working? Ans; I am presently working on Tools 8.42 & HRMS Application 8.8 . 25 Purpose of Upgrade Tab? Ans: This is mainly used for version up gradation. 26. How do you send project to client and How do you test the project? 27. How to Debug AE program and Ways of running AE Program? 28. Which Server do you use & what are the views purposes and different between Search Views & Fast Views? 29. How do you solve Bugs? Ans: Using Debugging Techniques and Messaging in that particular area. 30. Difference between Query Views & Dynamic Views? Ans: 1.Query Views are designed using Query Manager Tool where as we write SQL in Dynamic Views. 2. Query View is Built and Exists in the Database where as Dynamic View can’t be build so it doesn’t exists in Database. 31.How work will be assigned in Production Environment? Ans: Actually I don’t know because I am in Development Environment. 32.How do you assign Search Record to Component? Ans: By going to the component properties , Use Tab and Specifying the search record in that particular area ie; ‘Add Search Record’ Property. 33.How do you move data from legacy system to Peoplesoft? Ans: We can use some Integration Tools such as Component Interface, File Layout & Integration Broker and also using Flat files in SQR. We have some specific commands in Flat files handling in SQR such as OPEN, CLOSE, FOR WRITING, FOR READNG & FOR APPENDING, WRITE and Finally READ commands. 34. Interaction with client? 35. What is your Team size? 36. Say about your team? 37. What is your Role in the Current Project? 38. How will be the interaction with the Team Leader? 39. How do you open a file? Ans: In SQR the Syntax is OPEN ‘filepath’ AS number FOR READING/FOR-WRITING/FORAPPENDING… 40.Can we use multiple printers in SQR?

Ans: Yes we can use. In SETUP section By Defining printers what we need . we have some SQC’s. 41.What are the variables used in people code? Ans: System Variables, User Defined Variables. & Derived Work record Fields 42.How can we Know whether we are in a particular mode? Ans: Using ‘%Mode’ Built in function. 43. How to Execute App. Engine Program? 4.Dynamic View 45. Difference between Interface, Report & Process? Ans: Interface: This is used to interact with other system may be PS or Legacy System Report: This has an user interaction to execute or generate. Process: This is scheduled in Batch Server so there is no need for the user to especially run it. It Automatically Executes. 46. What is State Record? Ans: These are used in Application Engine Programs to pass values between Actions & Sections. 48.Difference between Do Select & Do When? Ans: Do Select is like FOR Loop in C. How many rows it retrieves that many times it performs the Do When & SQl actions below it. Where as Do When is like a condition operator such as IF statement in C. 49.Pupose of App. Engine? Ans: 1.Backgroung SQL processing. 2.To pass data between Modules. 3.To pass data between Databases. 4.To populate Reporting tables using data in Transaction Tables. 5.For integration purpose. 6.Validation of data 7.Data Manipulations. 8.For Version Up gradation. 9.Archive Data .Etc…. 50.Performance Tuning in SQR? Ans: 1.Using LOAD-LOOKUP & LOOKUP. 2.Using ARRAYS. 3.Multiple Reports. 4.Using –S & -Bnn. 5.Using SQT file. 6.Running on Batch Server. 7.Using Proper programming logic in sQR such as BREAK statement in Evaluate. 8.Using proper SQL Statements. 51.File types in SQR? Ans:1. “.SQR”=This is nothing but the SQR source file. 2. “.SQC”=This is a used as functional Libraries. 3. “.Lis”=This is Line Printer Output file. 4. “.SPF”=This is a Portable format file. 5. “.SQT”=This is Complied time file. 6. “.INI”=These files are used to set the default Environment for our SQR Report. 7. “.MAX”=These are used to increase the memory size. 8. “.ERR,.LOG,.DAT”=These are used for Error Handling purpose. 52.List Out some Command Line Flags in SQR? Ans:-S,-A,-KEEP,-ZIV,-XMB,-ZMF,-E,-O,-Debug,-RS,-RT etc…

53.Purpose of the Arguments in the LOAD-LOOKUP? Ans: To Create a Load-Lookup array as per requirement in the arguments. 55.Diff between ASK & INPUT Commands? Ans:”ASK” 1. This is used in the Setup section i.e. . Compile Time Variable. 2. This prompts for the values during the compilation time. 3. This does not have the data type and length. “INPUT” 1. This can be used in other than the Setup section i.e. Run time Variable 2. This prompts for the values during the Execution Time. 3. Here, we can specify the data type and the length. 57. Effdt and EffSeq Quries? Ans:Select * from Table1 A where A.EffDt= (Select Max (B.EffDt) from Table1 B where A.keys B.keys AND A.EffDt<= as of Date) Select * from Table1 A where A.EffDt= (Select Max (B.EffDt from Table1 B where A.keys B.keys AND A.EffDt<= as of Date AND B.EffSeq=(Select Max(C.EffSeq from Table1 C where B.keys=C.keys AND B.EffDt=C.EffDt AND B.EffSeq=C.EffSeq) 58.What is SQC , List out some of them? Ans: SQC is used as Functional Library mainly used to re-use code and get some predefined functionalities used for our SQR programs. Some of the Important SQC are STDAPI.SQC,SETENV.SQC,RESET.SQC,SETUPxx.SQC,NUMBER.SQC,STRING.SQC,DATETIME. SQC etc.. 59.What is Process Scheduler? Ans: This is a People tool used to Schedule and monitor the Execution of any Process or Report or Program in People soft Environment. 62.What is Scroll Area ? How many can we keep on a Page? Ans: Scroll Area is a Page Control which contains Child Records’-Fields which is used to maintain the Parent-Child Relationship between Tables. We can place any number of scroll areas on a page. 63.Duration of the Project? 64.What is Data Mover? Ans: Data Mover is a People tool which is used to move Data between different Databases. 65.Diff between Migration , Import and Export? 66.What are Upgrade Instances of Databases?. 67.To Whom you will Report ? Who Will give Specification to you? 68.Why you are Leaving Current Organization? 69.Where is the Location of the Current Organization? 70.Can we send SQR Output to Ms-Word or Crystal Reports? Ans: Yes. 71.How do we refer Component Buffer in the Object-Based or Procedural-Based People Code? Ans:In Procedural Based People code by using scroll path we can refer. In Object-Oriented People code by Instantiating Objects to Record, Row, Row Set, Field we can refer the Component Buffer. 72.Limitaion of SQL Exec function in People code?

Ans:1.Used in only SavePrechange , Workflow , SavePostchange, and for DML commands and for Select statements used other Event types. 2.Results only one Single row of data. 73.What is the State Record? Ans: State Record is used to pass values between Sections. 74.What are the Actions available in the AE Program? 75.How will you read Data from the CSV file or Excel file and Upload it into the Database using AE Program? Ans: Using File Layout Integration Tool. 76.Why are SQC files used in SQR? 77.Which SQC is used to read Data from the Translate table? Ans: ReadXlat.SQC 79. How will get the System Date in Oracle? 80. Effective Date Event in SQR? 81. What is a Sub-Query? Why it is used? 82.Why is Load-Lookup used in SQR? Ans: Used to increase the performance mainly in the case of Master Detail Reports. 83. Why are Field Edit and Field Change Events Used? Ans: 84.Why is Save Edit Event Used? 85.Why is SQLExec function is used and how many rows you can retrieve using it? Ans:This is mainly used to Directly access the Database by-passing the Component Buffer. 86.What is a Sub-Page? Why it is used? Ans:Sub-Page is a Page control which is mainly used to insert Sub-Records. 87.Why is Derived Work record used? Ans:DerivedWork record is mainly used for the Online page calculations and also used as Functional Libraries in People Code. 91.How will you delete the button [Add,Update/Display,Update/DisplayAll and Correction] from a Page on the Browser? Ans:By going to the Internet tab of the Component properties in the App. Designer and disabling the checkboxes as per our requirements.

93.Diff between the User-Profiles, Roles and the Permission Lists? 94.What is the Diff between the Prompt Table and the Translate Table? 95.What is the Purpose of the State-Record? 96.What is the diff between the Local and the Component Variables in the People Code? Ans:Local variable scope is upto that particular program where as the Component variable scope is upto the particular Component. 97.What are the Steps in the Implementation? 98.What are the types of the Table Joins? Ans:1.Self Join 2.Cartesian Join 3.EquiJoin 4.OuterJoin

5.Inner Join 99.How many Objects are there in the PeopleSoft 7.5, 8.1.2 & 8.4.2? 100.How many Events are there in the PeopleCode,When do they get Fired? 101.What is the Architecture of the PIA? What are its Components? 102. How will you read Data from the CSV file or Excel file and Upload it into the Database using SQR? Ans:Using File-Handling and Unstring Commands. 103.Why is On-Break used? Ans:1.To reduce the Redundancy of Printing the data. 2.For Group-Footing and Group-Headings. 104.Why is the Process Definition in Process Scheduler used and What are the options available in it? 107.Diff between Update/Display,UpdateAll and the Correction modes? 108.How will you display an Image in SQR? Ans:Using Declare-Image Command. 109.Which Sql Commands can be used in the SQL-Paragraph? Ans:Except Select command We can use DDL,DMLand DCL. 110.In which section Select Paragraph Statement be used? Ans:In the Setup, Program and the Procedure sections we can use the Select Paragraphs. 111.What is Effdt and the EffSeq? 112.SQR Debugging? 113.How will perform Error-Handling in SQR? Ans:Using the command line flags –O,-L,-ZMF and –XMB Using SQR commands ON-ERROR=Skip/Warn/Stop, ON-ERROR=Procedure_name 114.How are Multiple-Reports Generated in SQR? 115.What are the ways of Performance Tuning in PeopleCode? Ans: Using Object-Oriented programming and Proper programming logic. 116.Why is ‘SETENV.SQC’ is used? Ans: To set the default Environment for the SQR Report. 117.Why is Process Monitor used and in What is that Which Updates the Status of the Process Monitor? 118.What are the Key-Fields in the PS_JOB and the PS_EMPLOYMENT? 119.In Which record is the Status of the Employee Stored? Ans: PS_JOB. 120.How will you draw a Line of Hyphens in SQR? Ans: Using Fill argument in the Print Command. 121.When an incorrect value is entered in a Field and the Field turned Red then what is the action to be taken? Ans: To Enter the Appropriate value which does not Violate the Field Edit & System Edits of that particular Fields. 122.Can u Declare Multiple Heading sections in one SQR Program? 123.What are the Compile-Time Variables ? How to refer them? 124.What are the Run-Time Variables? 125.What is Dynamic Query Variable ? How to refer?

126.What is SQC ? Purpose of the ‘STDAPI.SQC’? 127.What are the Debugging Commands in the SQR ? Diff between them? 128.What is Load-Lookup? In Which situation you use this Technique? 129.What are the File-Manipulation Commands in the SQR? 130.Is there any Limitations to Opening a File? Ans:To Open a file we have to specify the mode of file and the file must exists. 131.What are the Before and the After Procedures? How is the Execution Sequence? Ans: Before Procedure Level Execution is from 1 to n Level and the After Procedure Level Execution is from n to 1 level. 132.I want the Previous value of the On-Break ? Which is the Command Used? Ans: ‘SAVE=Variable’ 133.How to Identify the Document Variables? Ans: By @. 134.What is the SPF File? What are the Flags required to make a file to SPF? Ans: SPF is a Portable Format File and the command line flag used is –KEEP. 135.How to refer a Global Variables in the Local Procedures? Ans. By prefixing the “_” underscore for the Variable name. 136.How the Output variables denote in the Local Procedures? 137.What is –Bnn,--Tnn,--RS & --Rt Flags? Ans: --Bnn for specifying default number rows to retrieve from the database. --Tnn used for Testing Which specifies the number of pages we want to test. --RS is used to create an .SQT file. --RT is used to run .SQT file. 139.What is Debug Command Line Flag? Ans: -DEBUGxx. 140.How to Place and Appropriate Logo in SQR? Ans: Using ‘Declare Image’ Command. 141.Diff between SavePreChange and the SavePostChange? 142.How to get the Most Current EffDt Row and the EffSeq Row? 143.When the Work-Flow Events fires? Ans: After the successful Execution of the SavePrechange. 145.How to refer a Second Level Field value? 146.What is the Component Buffer? Ans: Tempory memory area to Store data related to ‘Current Active Component’. 147.Can you write Error-Messaging in the Field Change event? 148.What is the Field Formula and the Field Default events? 149. What is the Message Get Function? What is the diff between Message Get and the MessageGetText functions? Ans: 150. What are the Meta-Sql Commands? 151.How many SQR’s you modified Explain? 152.Why do we use SQR ? Explain them? Ans: 1.Where ever Programming Logic is more. 2.For Background SQL Processing.

3.For Interfacing. 4.Mainly it is a Powerful Reporting Tool. 153.What is the diff between Including the SQC’s at the Page-Header and the PageFooter? 154.How can we use DML and the DDL Commands in the SQR? Ans: Directly writing those commands in ‘Begin-SQL’ Paragraph. 155.How can you know the Status of the SQR Report? For that any SQC is needed or not? Ans: We can Know by verifying in Process Monitor the SQC needed for it is ‘STDAPI.SQC’. 156.How can you Export or Import the Data in the Flat File to PS Database? Ans: Using File Layout & Using File Handling Commands in SQR. 157.Diff between Load-Lookup and Arrays 158.Diff between ASK and the INPUT Command? 159.What is PIA? Explain each part? Functions of the AppServer? 160.Diff between Search-Record and the Add Search-Record? 161.What are the events associated with the other events? 162.How can you define Global variables and impact of it ? 1. what is the purpose of multiple reports? In what situation u use this? Ans.Multiple reports are mainly used to increase the performance of sqr program.This is used when we are generating different reports for the same source i.e; for same tables. 2. can u declare multiple heading sections in one sqr program? Ans.Yes,we can declare multiple headings in the Multiple Reports. 3. what is the compile time variables?How to refer? Ans.Ask variables are compile time variables. 4.What is run time variables? Ans.Input variables are run time variables. 4. what is dynamic query variable?How to refer? Ans. 5. What is sqc?what is the purpose of stdapi.sqc? Ans.SQC’s are nothing but some functions in SQR.here, we have reusable code.by including those SQC’s and calling those functions in our SQR program we can get the functionality of that fu8nction.This is mainly used to make our SQR program API aware.ie; we can see the status of that SQR program in process monitor. 6. What are the steps to run an sqr program from people soft environment? Ans.1.Make the program API aware. 2.Create run control table to pass variables in runtime,create a page,and component. 3.Schedule the program in process Scheduler 7. what are the debugging commands in sqr? Ans.Show & Display are debugging commands 8. what is the difference between them? Ans.Show is used to display more than one variable at a time. Display is used to display only one variable at a time 9. what is load lookup?in what situations you use this technique? Ans.Load lookup is like an array in C Language.This is mainly used to increase the performance of our program.Mainly used in Master Detail Reports where the number of rows are more in the table. 13. Is there any limitations to opening an file? Ans.We can Open at a time a liited number of files that is 256 14. What are before and after procedures?How the execution sequence? Ans.For group headings before and for group footings we use after .

15. I want to get previous value of on-break? what is the command? Ans. Save command 16.How to identify document variables? Ans.By seeing the Document Marker Symbol ie;@. 17.What is spf file?what are the flags exists to make a file to an spf? Ans.The Output File after the compilation is SPF file.we can create it using ‘-Rs’ command line Flag and we can run it using ‘-RT’ command Line Flag. 18. How to refer a global variable in local procedure? Ans.after special character (ex.#,&) we use underscore(_) after that variable name 19.How the output variable denotes in a local procedure? Ans. 20.what is -Bnn flag? Ans.This is used to specift the number of rows that are to be taken from Dbase to the Buffer because defaultly the system takes 10 rows at a time. 21.What is -Tnn flag? Ans. This is mainly used for testing purpose. We can restrict the system to generate only a specific number of pages instead of generating all pages for testing. This is used in Windows Environment. 22. What is -RS & -RT Flags? Ans.-RS is used to generate SPF file ie; stopping the program after the comilation. _RT is used to run the SPF file .This is also one kind of Performance increasing technique by saving the compilation time. 23. What are the sections in Sqr?which one is necessary? Ans. Setup, Heading , Footing, Program & Procedure Sections. Program section is the Mandatory section. 24.What is -debug command line flag? Ans. This is used for Debugging in SQR. 25. How to place an corporate logo in sqr? Ans. Using “Declare Image” command 26. How to get most current effdt row & most effseq row? Ans. People code 1.what is the diff between Field edit& save edit? Ans.In save edit it checks for all the system edits & Field edits. 2.what is field change? what are the events fires when a field change? Ans. When a Tab is pressed or a field value is changed on the page then this occurs. Events that fire are Field Edit & Field Change. 6.what is sqlexec function? Ans.This is a functio which is used to write SQL commands in People code. This directly connects to database and execute. Mainly used for BackGround SQL processing.RetrivesOnly one row of data. 7. what are the save action events? Ans.Save Edit,Save Prechange, Work Flow & Save Post change 8. How to refer a second level Field value? Ans.”RECORD.level1recordname, &lvl_row, RECORD.level2recordname, &lvl2row,

Record.fieldname ” I the Scroll Path 9.How to refer a low level row from higher level? Ans.By specifying the high level row first and then the low level record.ie;by Scroll path. Using object oriented Peoplecode And Creating Objects for the rowsets. 10.What is component buffer? Ans.It is a temporary memory area for the people code to access the data base columns and user defined variables in the people code. 11.can u write the error messages in field change event? Ans.no. 12. What is field default event? Ans.Which is used to assign default values and if o defaults exists for the field then it sets to the system defaults depending on the data type of the field. 13.What is field formala? Ans. This is an Event Type which is mainly used to do calculations and define functions in Derived work record which can be used as a function libraries. 14. what is message get function? what's the diff between message get& message get text functions? Ans: This is used to gwt the messages from the Message Catalog. App Engine 1.what are the components of appengine? 2.How many action available? Ans.Totally we have 8 Actions but two are mutually Exclusive so only we can use 7 actions in a step. Application designer 1.what are the record types? Ans. This is used to specify the type of Record while crating a record. There are totally 7 record types SQL Table, SQL View, Dynamic View, Derived/Work Record, Query View, Temporary Tables & Sub Record. 2.what is Dynamic view & Derived/work record? Ans. This is mainly used to increase the performance in People Code programming. 3.What is effective dated concept? how it acts in different modes? Ans. This is used to maintain Different rows for the same key field value depending on he Date. 4. what is effective sequence? Ans. Which is used to maintain different row for the same key value & same Effective Date. 5.What is alternate search key? Ans. This is some thing like secondary key. This is Found in search dialog box to seach based on this value even though this is not a key field. & search key. 6.where do u set default value property? Ans. In the record field properties in the use tab we have ‘constant’ here we set the default value. This is used mainly for Speedy data entry and search procedure. We can set default value in people code also. Oracle 1. What is meant by outer join? Ans. In addition to rows which satisfy the condition in two table we can get the rows that

are available in second table that are not in first table. Functional 1. What are the key fields in job table? 2. What is meant by empl_rcd? 1. What is the difference between Key and alternate search Key? KEY-It is the primary key of the record. Can be used as search key or need not be. Alternate search key-it is used for searching purposes. 2. Which effective dated rows can be retrieved in update/display mode, update/display all and correction mode? Update/display – can view current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Update/display all – can view history, current and future rows. Can update only future rows. Correction – can view and update history, current and future rows. 3. What types of audits are supported by people soft? In case of record level audit what is the structure of table? We have field level audit and record level audit. The structure of the table in record level audit is: AUDIT_OPRID, AUDIT_STAMP, AUDIT_ACTN, AUDIT_RECNAME and can add fields from record. 4. What are Table Edits? We have prompt table edit, yes/no table edit, translate table edit as the table edits. 5. What conditions are required to establish parent child relationship between two records? What are the advantages with that? Conditions are: 1) The child record should have all the key fields of parent record and at least one more key field other than the key fields of parent record. 2) We should mention the parent record in the record properties of child record. 3) We can not go for more than three levels of parent/child relationships. Advantages are: 1) To have referential integrity. 2) No need to enter information again and again 8. What is an Expert Entry? Expert entry enables a user to change from interactive to deferred mode at runtime for appropriate transactions 9. What is Auto Update? This record field property is used to update the date field of particular record with the server's current date and time whenever a user creates or updates a row. Even the user enter the data into that field, the data which the user enters will be updated by the system’s current date and time. 10. What is Record Group? Which records can be included into a record group? Record group consists of records with similar functionality. To setup a record in record group we should enter a set control field value in record properties 11. How can you improve the security and usability of a Prompt table edit.? Prompt table view 12. What are the different ways to setup row level security? We can setup row-level security using a SQL view that joins the data table with an authorization

table. andBy having Query search for data using a query security record definition. The query security record definition adds a security check to the search. 13. How does peoplesoft use views? Which are online functions? A) People soft uses views for search records, summary pages, prompt views, reports. Search records and summary pages are online functions. 15. How can a component have more than one search record? Give a situation. You might want to reuse the same component multiple times with different search records. You can accomplish this by overriding the component search record at runtime when the component is opened from a menu item without creating separate copies of the component. The component override is temporary, and occurs only when the component is opened from the menu item in which the override is set. It does not change the component definition. 16. What is PIA and what are its components? It is n-tier architecture. W e have client, web server, application server and Database server. W e have jolt and tuxedo. We have WSL, WSH, JSL, JSH, QUEUES and services. In database server we have system tables, peopletools tables and application tables. 17. Differentiate Field edit and Save edit? In Field edit for each field change, a transition to the application server to the database is taken place. In Saveedit for all the fields , only one transition to the application server to the Database is taken place. 18. What are think time functions? Think-time functions suspend processing either until the user has taken some action (such as clicking a button in a message box), or until an external process has run to completion. 19. In which events error & warning are used most extensively. Field edit, Save edit, Search save, row delete, row insert 20. Is there any way by which you can find out whether the user is in Add mode or Update mode? %mode---returns A---for Add mode. Returns U –for Update mode 21. What is the purpose of the SQLEXEC function? What are its benefits and draw backs? SQLEXEC is used to execute the sql statements(select,insert,update,delete). We can get only one row at a time. 23. What is the difference between component buffer and data buffer? Component buffer contains all the data of the active component. Data buffer contains the data other than the data in the component buffer (Data of other records) 24. What databuffer classes are available in people code? Rowset, Row, Record, Field, Array, File, Sql, chart, grid and so on. 25. When we select a component what events will be fired? If default mode for component is search mode: only searchinit will fired .If default mode for component is new mode :field default, field formula, rowinit, searchinit. 26. What are different variables in people code and their Scope?

System variables and User defined variables. Scope ---Global, Component, Local. 28. What is difference between field default and Row init? Field default specifies only the default value for a field when we are in Add mode. Row init fires only when a row of data coming from database to component buffer 29. What is difference between saveprechange and savepostchange? Which function directly interacts with the database? Saveprechange---last event that executes before updating the data from component buffer to the database. Savepostchange –fires after the updation of data in the database. SQLEXEC --- function directly interacts with the database. 29. What is Getlevel0()? What is the use of %subrec and %selectall functions? Getlevel0()---used the get the rowset of the level0. %subrec--is used only in Dynamic View SQL where it expands to the columns of a subrecord: %selectall--%SelectAll is shorthand for selecting all fields in the specified record, wrapping date/time fields with %DateOut, %TimeOut. 30. What is an array in people code? What is maximum dimension of an array? Which function inserts values into an array? What is “pop”? An array is a collection of data storage locations, each of which holds the same type of data. The maximum depth of a PeopleCode array is 15 dimensions. Push and unshift are the functions of the array used to add the elements into the array one from the end of the array and one from the beginning. Pop is a function of array used to select and delete an element from the end of the array. 31. What is difference between Getrowset and Createrowset in people code? Getrowset –is used to get rowset for a record in the component buffer. Createrowset—is used to create rowset for a record which in database, and is also called a Standalone rowset 32. Can you save the component programmatically? Using Dosave and Dosavenow functions. 33. What is differed processing and its advantages? Postpones some user actions to reduce the number of trips to the database so that increases the performance (in system edits, field edit, and field change). Advantages: 1) Reduces the network traffic. 2) Increases the performance. 33. Write the syntax to access third level record field using object oriented peoplecode? &fld=Getlevel0()(1).GetRowset(Record.<level1 record>.GetRow(1), GetRowset(Record.<level2record>).GetRow(1), GetRowset(Record.<level3 record>).GetRow(1), GetRecord(Record.<level3 record>).GetFieild(Field.<field name>)) 34. What are the built-functions used to control translate values dynamically? Adddropdownitem() Deletedropdownitem() 35. How to populate data into grid in online? &Rs.Select or Scrollselect(). 1. Before accessing a people soft application what levels of security must be passed through.

a) Field level security b) Row level security c) Maintain security d)definition security e) Portal security. 2. What is the use of primary permission list in user profile? Primary permission list is used for mass change and definition security purposes. 3. How to authorize the user to run a process or report? To authorize a user to run a process, the process group, which contains the process or report, should be added to the permission list of that user. 4. How to give access to the records that are to be used in a query? To give access to the records that are to be used in query, we have create a new query security tree and add the records which we want to give the access and then assign a access group to the tree. After that we have to add that query tree and query access group to the permission list. 5. What are the rules used by the system to determine whether a user is authorized to update an object? The user should have the permission to update the object. This is given by the Definition security. The group, which holds the object, should be added to the permission list of the user in update mode. 6. What are the different ways we can set up the portal security to access component in portal? 1) Structure & content 2) Menu import 3) Register component 56.What is Work list? A work list is a list of the items awaiting an activity. Users select items from the list, and the system automatically displays the panels they need in order to work on the items. Work lists are automatically created as you route items to them. To define a worklist, you just need to create a worklist record definition and define worklist routings. 58.What is Global variable and local variable, how to declare them? A global variable, once declared in any Peoplecode program, will remain in scope throughout the PeopleSoft session. The Global statement allows you to declare PeopleCode global variables. The variable must be declared with the Global statement in any PeopleCode program in which it is used. A local variable remains in scope for the life of a PeopleCode program. They cannot be declared inside of function declarations; that is, there are no function-level local variables.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful